TWI775592B - Control device and method for controlling illuminating device - Google Patents

Control device and method for controlling illuminating device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI775592B
TWI775592B TW110133089A TW110133089A TWI775592B TW I775592 B TWI775592 B TW I775592B TW 110133089 A TW110133089 A TW 110133089A TW 110133089 A TW110133089 A TW 110133089A TW I775592 B TWI775592 B TW I775592B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
physical parameter
range
variable
control
code
Prior art date
Application number
TW110133089A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW202202954A (en
Inventor
鍾國誠
Original Assignee
鍾國誠
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 鍾國誠 filed Critical 鍾國誠
Priority to TW110133089A priority Critical patent/TWI775592B/en
Publication of TW202202954A publication Critical patent/TW202202954A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI775592B publication Critical patent/TWI775592B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02EREDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/20Hydro energy

Landscapes

  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

A control device for controlling a first variable physical parameter includes a sensing unit and an operation unit. The first variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measurement value target range. The sensing unit senses a second variable physical parameter to generate a sense signal, wherein the second variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range. The operation unit obtains a measurement value in response to the sense signal, and generates a control signal serving to indicate the measurement value target range under a condition that the operation unit determines the physical parameter application range which the second variable physical parameter is currently within by checking a mathematical relation between the measurement value and the measurement value application range.

Description

用於控制照明裝置的控制裝置及方法 Control device and method for controlling lighting device

本揭露是關於一控制裝置,並特別是關於用於依靠一觸發事件而控制一可變物理參數的控制裝置及方法。 The present disclosure relates to a control device, and more particularly, to a control device and method for controlling a variable physical parameter in dependence on a trigger event.

一觸發事件能夠是一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並能夠應用於一控制裝置以控制一控制目標裝置。該控制目標裝置能夠使用一機械能、一電能和一光能的至少其中之一,並能夠包含用於一門禁管制的一電動機、用於一電力控制的一繼電器、和用於一能量轉換的一能量轉換器的其中之一。該控制裝置依靠該觸發事件而傳輸一控制訊號到該控制目標裝置以控制該控制目標裝置。為了有效地控制該控制目標裝置,該控制裝置能夠獲得基於一可變物理參數而被提供的一測量值。該控制裝置可能需要一改良的機制以有效地使用該測量值,並藉此有效地控制該控制目標裝置。 A trigger event can be one of a user input event, a signal input event and an identification medium occurrence event, and can be applied to a control device to control a control target device. The control target device can use at least one of a mechanical energy, an electrical energy, and a light energy, and can include a motor for an access control, a relay for a power control, and a One of an energy converter. The control device transmits a control signal to the control target device depending on the trigger event to control the control target device. In order to effectively control the control target device, the control device can obtain a measurement value provided based on a variable physical parameter. The control device may require an improved mechanism to effectively use the measured value and thereby effectively control the control target device.

美國第2015/0357887 A1號公開專利揭露一種製品規格設定裝置及具備其之風扇馬達。美國第7,411,505 B2號公告專利揭露一種開關狀態及射頻識別標籤。 US Published Patent No. 2015/0357887 A1 discloses a product specification setting device and a fan motor having the same. US Patent No. 7,411,505 B2 discloses a switch state and a radio frequency identification tag.

本揭露的一目的在於提供一種依靠一觸發事件和一感測單元而有效地控制一可變物理參數的一控制裝置及方法。 An object of the present disclosure is to provide a control device and method for effectively controlling a variable physical parameter by relying on a trigger event and a sensing unit.

本揭露的一實施例在於提供一種用於控制一第一可變物理參數的控制裝置。該第一可變物理參數基於由一測量值目標範圍所代表的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化。該控制裝置包含一第一感測單元和一操作單元。該第一感測單元感測一第二可變物理參數以產生一第一感測訊號,其中該第二可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化。該操作單元耦合於該第一感測單元,在一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該第一感測訊號來獲得一第一測量值,並在該操作單元藉由檢查該第一測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係而確定該第二可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下產生起到指示該測量值目標範圍的作用的一第一控制訊號。 An embodiment of the present disclosure provides a control device for controlling a first variable physical parameter. The first variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measurement value target range. The control device includes a first sensing unit and an operating unit. The first sensing unit senses a second variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal, wherein the second variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range change. The operating unit is coupled to the first sensing unit, and responds to the first sensing signal to obtain a first measurement value when a trigger event occurs, and checks the first measurement value and the A first mathematical relationship between the measurement value application ranges to determine the condition of the physical parameter application range that the second variable physical parameter is currently in generates a first control signal that functions to indicate the measurement value target range.

本揭露的另一實施例在於提供一種用於藉由產生一第一控制訊號而控制一第一可變物理參數的方法。該第一可變物理參數基於由一測量值目標範圍所代表的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化。該方法包含下列步驟:提供一第二可變物理參數,其中該第二可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;感測該第二可變物理參數以產生一第一感測訊號;在一觸發事件發生的條件下,響應該第一感測訊號來 獲得一第一測量值;以及藉由檢查該第一測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係,確定該第二可變物理參數和該物理參數應用範圍之間的一物理參數關係以做出起到指示該測量值目標範圍的作用的該第一控制訊號是否要被產生的一合理決定。 Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a first variable physical parameter by generating a first control signal. The first variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measurement value target range. The method includes the steps of: providing a second variable physical parameter, wherein the second variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range; sensing the second variable physical parameter physical parameters to generate a first sensing signal; under the condition of a trigger event, responding to the first sensing signal to obtaining a first measurement; and determining a physical relationship between the second variable physical parameter and the range of application of the physical parameter by examining a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement and the range of application of the measurement parametric relationship to make a reasonable decision as to whether the first control signal, which serves to indicate the target range of the measurements, is to be generated.

本揭露的另一實施例在於提供一種用於控制一第一可變物理參數的方法。該第一可變物理參數基於由一測量值目標範圍所代表的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化。該方法包含下列步驟:提供一第二可變物理參數,其中該第二可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;感測該第二可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;在一觸發事件發生的條件下,響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值;以及在該第二可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係而被確定的條件下,產生起到指示該測量值目標範圍的作用的一第一控制訊號。 Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a first variable physical parameter. The first variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measurement value target range. The method includes the steps of: providing a second variable physical parameter, wherein the second variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range; sensing the second variable physical parameter a physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; under the condition that a trigger event occurs, a measurement value is obtained in response to the sensing signal; and the second variable physical parameter is currently in the physical parameter application range by checking the Under the condition that a first mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value is determined, a first control signal is generated which functions to indicate the target range of the measurement value.

210:控制裝置 210: Controls

220、4452:讀取器 220, 4452: Reader

230、331:處理單元 230, 331: Processing unit

240、338:輸出單元 240, 338: output unit

240P、240Q、263P、363P、338P、338Q:輸出端 240P, 240Q, 263P, 363P, 338P, 338Q: output terminal

246:通訊介面單元 246: Communication interface unit

250、332:儲存單元 250, 332: storage unit

25Y1:記憶體單元 25Y1: Memory unit

260:第一感測單元 260: The first sensing unit

261、262、3341:感測組件 261, 262, 3341: Sensing components

263、363:多工器 263, 363: Multiplexer

2631、2632、3631、3632:輸入端 2631, 2632, 3631, 3632: Input

263C、363C:控制端 263C, 363C: control terminal

270、337:輸入單元 270, 337: Input unit

2701:觸控螢幕 2701: Touch Screen

275、276、285、286:電使用目標 275, 276, 285, 286: Electricity usage target

280:伺服器 280: Server

290:物理參數形成單元 290: Physical Parameters Forming Units

295:使用者 295:User

297、397:操作單元 297, 397: Operation unit

310:識別媒介 310: Identifying Mediums

330、630:控制目標裝置 330, 630: Control the target device

334:第二感測單元 334: Second Sensing Unit

335、735:功能目標 335, 735: Functional goals

3371、3372、3373、3374、440、445:輸入組件 3371, 3372, 3373, 3374, 440, 445: Input Components

3381、3382、3383、450、455:輸出組件 3381, 3382, 3383, 450, 455: Output components

339、342、539、545:定時器 339, 342, 539, 545: Timer

350:電子標籤 350: Electronic Label

360:條碼媒介 360: Barcode Media

370:生物識別作用媒介 370: Biometric Action Media

410:網路 410: Internet

441:指向裝置 441: Pointing Device

4451:接收組件 4451: Receive component

460:顯示組件 460: Display Components

470:功能開關 470: Function switch

472:訊號產生器 472: Signal Generator

475:狀態改變偵測器 475: State Change Detector

660、661、662:感測器類型 660, 661, 662: Sensor type

801:控制系統 801: Control System

8011、8012、8013、8014、8015、8016、8017、8018、8019、8020、8021、8022、8023、8024、8025、8026、8027、8028、8029、8030、8031、8032、8033、8034、8035、8036、8037、8038、8039、8040、8041、8042、8043、8044、8045、8046、8047、8048、8049、8050、8051、8052、8053、8054、8055、8056:實施結構 8011, 8012, 8013, 8014, 8015, 8016, 8017, 8018, 8019, 8020, 8021, 8022, 8023, 8024, 8025, 8026, 8027, 8028, 8029, 8030, 8031, 8032, 8033, 8034, 8035, 8036, 8037, 8038, 8039, 8040, 8041, 8042, 8043, 8044, 8045, 8046, 8047, 8048, 8049, 8050, 8051, 8052, 8053, 8054, 8055, 8056: Implementation structure

AA11、AA12:資料確定操作 AA11, AA12: Data determination operation

AA1A、AE1A:資料確定 AA1A, AE1A: Confirmation of data

AC1:響應區域 AC1: Response area

AD11、AD12、AF21、AF22、AF23、AF24、AF25、AF26:資料獲取操作 AD11, AD12, AF21, AF22, AF23, AF24, AF25, AF26: Data acquisition operations

AD1A、AF2A、AF2B、AF2C:資料獲取 AD1A, AF2A, AF2B, AF2C: Data Acquisition

AE11:第一資料確定操作 AE11: First Data Confirmation Operation

AE12:第二資料確定操作 AE12: Second Data Confirmation Operation

AF11:第一資料獲取操作 AF11: First data acquisition operation

AF12:第二資料獲取操作 AF12: Second data acquisition operation

AF1A:第一資料獲取 AF1A: First data acquisition

AG11:第三資料獲取操作 AG11: The third data acquisition operation

AG12:第四資料獲取操作 AG12: The fourth data acquisition operation

AG1A:第二資料獲取 AG1A: Secondary data acquisition

AJ11:物理參數應用區 AJ11: Physical parameter application area

AM1L、AM1T、AN11、AS12、AS1T、AX12、AX1T、EC22、EC2T、FF11、FF12、FF2T、FK11、FK12、FM12、FM21:記憶體位址 AM1L, AM1T, AN11, AS12, AS1T, AX12, AX1T, EC22, EC2T, FF11, FF12, FF2T, FK11, FK12, FM12, FM21: Memory address

AP11、AP21、AP22:使用者介面區 AP11, AP21, AP22: User interface area

AT11、AT21、AU11、AU21:物理參數形成區 AT11, AT21, AU11, AU21: Physical parameter formation area

BA11、BA13、BA15、ZQ11:檢查操作 BA11, BA13, BA15, ZQ11: Check operation

BC1T、BD11:計數操作 BC1T, BD11: count operation

BH12、ZH11:指定功能操作 BH12, ZH11: Specified function operation

BJ11:指定實際操作 BJ11: Specify the actual operation

BQ11、BU13、BU15、BU16、JU11、JU21、JU22、JV11、JV12、JV13、JW11、JW12:使用者輸入操作 BQ11, BU13, BU15, BU16, JU11, JU21, JU22, JV11, JV12, JV13, JW11, JW12: User input operation

BS11:第一訊號產生操作 BS11: First Signal Generation Operation

BS21:第二訊號產生操作 BS21: Second Signal Generation Operation

BX11:讀取操作 BX11: read operation

BY11、BY27:訊號產生操作 BY11, BY27: Signal generation operation

CA11:第一資料比較 CA11: First data comparison

CA21:資料比較、第二資料比較 CA21: Data comparison, second data comparison

CC12、CC1L、CC1T:控制碼 CC12, CC1L, CC1T: Control code

CD11:資料比較 CD11: Data Comparison

CG11:控制訊息 CG11: Control message

CK12、CK1T:控制資料碼 CK12, CK1T: Control data code

CM12、CM13、CM14、CM15:控制資訊碼 CM12, CM13, CM14, CM15: Control information code

CN12、CN13、CN14、CN15:控制資料訊息 CN12, CN13, CN14, CN15: Control data message

CU11:識別媒介辨識碼 CU11: Identification medium identification code

DA11、DF11、DX11:碼差異 DA11, DF11, DX11: code difference

DB11:讀取資料 DB11: read data

DC11、DC12、DD11、DD12:額定範圍界限值 DC11, DC12, DD11, DD12: rated range limit value

DC1A、DD1A:額定範圍界限值對 DC1A, DD1A: Rated range limit value pair

DG11、DG12、DJ11、DJ12、DJ13、DJ17、DJ18、DJ21:輸入資料 DG11, DG12, DJ11, DJ12, DJ13, DJ17, DJ18, DJ21: Input data

DM15:第一應用範圍界限值 DM15: The first application range limit value

DM16:第二應用範圍界限值 DM16: Second application range limit value

DM1B、DN1B、DQ1B:候選範圍界限值對 DM1B, DN1B, DQ1B: Candidate range limit value pair

DM1L、DN1L:應用範圍界限值對 DM1L, DN1L: Application range limit value pair

DN15、DN16:應用範圍界限值 DN15, DN16: limit value of application range

DN17、DN18:目標範圍界限值 DN17, DN18: target range limit value

DN1G:特定範圍界限值對 DN1G: specific range limit value pair

DN1T、DQ1T:目標範圍界限值對 DN1T, DQ1T: target range limit value pair

DS11:範圍差異 DS11: Range Differences

DY11:編碼資料 DY11: Coded data

EB11、EH11、EM11:測量值參考範圍碼 EB11, EH11, EM11: Measured value reference range code

EH12:測量值參考範圍碼、測量值候選範圍碼 EH12: Measured value reference range code, measured value candidate range code

EH13、EM13:測量值候選範圍碼 EH13, EM13: Measured value candidate range code

EH14:特定測量值範圍碼、第一特定測量值範圍碼 EH14: specific measurement value range code, first specific measurement value range code

EH17:第二特定測量值範圍碼 EH17: Second specific measurement value range code

EH1L、EM1L:測量值應用範圍碼 EH1L, EM1L: Measured value application range code

EJ11、EJ12、EJ13、ZR17、ZR1KJ、ZR1TR、ZR2A、ZR2B、ZX11、ZX12、ZX17、ZX1H2、ZX1HJ、ZX1HT、ZX1KJ、ZX1TR、ZX21:資料編碼操作 EJ11, EJ12, EJ13, ZR17, ZR1KJ, ZR1TR, ZR2A, ZR2B, ZX11, ZX12, ZX17, ZX1H2, ZX1HJ, ZX1HT, ZX1KJ, ZX1TR, ZX21: Data encoding operation

EL1T:時間值目標範圍碼 EL1T: Time value target range code

EL12:時間值候選範圍碼 EL12: Time value candidate range code

EM12:測量值參考範圍碼、測量值候選範圍碼 EM12: Measured value reference range code, measured value candidate range code

EM14、EM17:特定測量值範圍碼 EM14, EM17: specific measurement value range code

EM1T:測量值目標範圍碼 EM1T: Measured value target range code

EP11:操作情況 EP11: Operational Conditions

EQ11:觸發事件 EQ11: Trigger event

EX11:應用環境 EX11: Application Environment

FA11:物理參數控制功能 FA11: Physical parameter control function

FB11:觸發應用功能 FB11: Trigger application function

FM1L:第一記憶體位址 FM1L: First memory address

FP11、FR11:拘束條件 FP11, FR11: Binding conditions

FP1M:限制條件 FP1M: Restrictions

FQ11:第一感測器規格 FQ11: First Sensor Specifications

FT11、FT21、FW22:定時器規格 FT11, FT21, FW22: Timer Specifications

FU11:第二感測器規格 FU11: Second sensor specification

FV12、FV1L:第二記憶體位址 FV12, FV1L: Second memory address

FY11、FZ11:編碼影像 FY11, FZ11: Encoded images

GA13、GB13:物理參數候選範圍表示 GA13, GB13: Physical parameter candidate range representation

GA1E、GB1E:額定物理參數範圍表示 GA1E, GB1E: Rated physical parameter range representation

GA1L、GB1L:物理參數應用範圍表示 GA1L, GB1L: Physical parameter application range representation

GA1H2、GA1HT:時間候選區間表示 GA1H2, GA1HT: Time candidate interval representation

GA1HJ:時間長度參考範圍表示 GA1HJ: Time length reference range representation

GA1KJ、GB1KJ:時間長度表示 GA1KJ, GB1KJ: time length indication

GA1T:第一物理參數候選範圍表示 GA1T: first physical parameter candidate range representation

GA1T1:物理參數表示 GA1T1: Physical parameter representation

GA1TR、GB1TR:時鐘時間表示 GA1TR, GB1TR: Clock time indication

GAL1:物理參數控制功能規格 GAL1: Physical parameter control function specification

GB12:第二物理參數候選範圍表示 GB12: The second physical parameter candidate range representation

GBL1:觸發應用功能規格 GBL1: Trigger application function specification

GF11:時間控制 GF11: Time Control

GJ11:時間長度值參考範圍 GJ11: Time length value reference range

GK11:電應用目標群組 GK11: Target group for electrical applications

GQ11:第一感測器靈敏度表示 GQ11: First sensor sensitivity indication

GQ1R、GW1R:感測器測量範圍表示 GQ1R, GW1R: Indication of sensor measurement range

GS11、GS19、GY11、GY21:訊號產生控制 GS11, GS19, GY11, GY21: Signal generation control

GT11、GU11:確保操作 GT11, GU11: Ensure operation

GW11:第二感測器靈敏度表示 GW11: Sensitivity representation of the second sensor

HA0T:控制裝置識別符 HA0T: Control device identifier

HA12、HA1T:控制目標裝置識別符 HA12, HA1T: Control target device identifier

HA22、HA2T:功能目標識別符 HA22, HA2T: functional target identifier

HC11:控制碼類型識別符 HC11: Control code type identifier

HE11、HE12、HF11、HF12:感測訊號產生 HE11, HE12, HF11, HF12: Sensing signal generation

HH11、HQ11:指定測量值格式 HH11, HQ11: Specify the measurement value format

HH21、HQ22、HH25:指定計數值格式 HH21, HQ22, HH25: Specify the count value format

HJ11:時間長度參考範圍 HJ11: Time length reference range

HK11:控制資料碼類型識別符 HK11: Control Data Code Type Identifier

HM11:測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符 HM11: Measurement range limit data code type identifier

HR1ET:時間目標區間 HR1ET: Time target interval

HR1E2:時間候選區間 HR1E2: Time candidate interval

HU11:識別媒介識別符 HU11: Identifying Medium Identifier

HZ11、HZ12、HZ22、HZ2T:電使用目標識別符 HZ11, HZ12, HZ22, HZ2T: Electrical use target identifier

JC1A、JD1A、QG1A、QP2A、QU2A:可變物理參數 JC1A, JD1A, QG1A, QP2A, QU2A: Variable physical parameters

JM11:測量值序列 JM11: Sequence of measured values

KA11:第一數學關係 KA11: First Mathematical Relations

KA15:數學關係 KA15: Mathematical Relations

KB11:物理參數關係 KB11: Physical parameter relationship

KA21:第三數學關係 KA21: Third Mathematical Relations

KG11:數值交集關係 KG11: Numerical Intersection Relationship

KJ11:數值關係 KJ11: Numerical relationship

KK21、KK22、KQ11、KV11、KV1W、KV21、KV2W:數學關係 KK21, KK22, KQ11, KV11, KV1W, KV21, KV2W: Mathematical relationships

KY11:第二數學關係 KY11: Second Mathematical Relationship

LA11:第一狀態指示 LA11: First state indication

LA12:第二狀態指示 LA12: Second status indication

LB11、LB12:狀態指示 LB11, LB12: Status indication

LC11:第二實際位置 LC11: Second actual position

LD11:第一實際位置 LD11: First actual position

LF1A:可變時間長度 LF1A: Variable time length

LJ1T:參考時間長度 LJ1T: Reference time length

LN1A:時間長度範圍界限值對 LN1A: Time Length Range Limit Value Pair

LN11、LN12:時間長度範圍界限值 LN11, LN12: Limit value of time length range

LP11、SP11:電訊號 LP11, SP11: electrical signal

LQ11、SQ11:光訊號 LQ11, SQ11: Optical signal

LT1T:應用時間長度 LT1T: Length of application time

LY11:測量資訊 LY11: Measurement Information

MF11:第一科學計算 MF11: First Scientific Computing

MF12:第四科學計算 MF12: Fourth Scientific Computing

MF13:第五科學計算 MF13: Fifth Scientific Computing

MG11:第二科學計算 MG11: Second Scientific Computing

MK11、MK15、MQ13、MQ15、MQ16、MR11、MR15、MR16、MU11、MX11、MZ11:科學計算 MK11, MK15, MQ13, MQ15, MQ16, MR11, MR15, MR16, MU11, MX11, MZ11: Scientific Computing

MQ11:第三科學計算 MQ11: Third Scientific Computing

NA1A、NE1A:資料確定程序 NA1A, NE1A: Data Determination Procedure

NB11、NB12:目標位置號碼 NB11, NB12: target location number

ND1A、NF1A:資料獲取程序 ND1A, NF1A: Data Acquisition Procedures

NP21、NY11:特定計數值 NP21, NY11: specific count value

NR11:時鐘參考時間值 NR11: Clock reference time value

NS11、NT11:總參考範圍數目 NS11, NT11: Total number of reference ranges

NY10:初始計數值 NY10: Initial count value

PA11:合理決定 PA11: Reasonable decision

PB11、PB21、PE11、PY11、PZ11:邏輯決定 PB11, PB21, PE11, PY11, PZ11: Logic decision

PF11、PF12、PF2T、PK11、PK12、PM12、PM21、PV12、XC2T、XC22、YM1L、YM1T、YN11、YS12、YS1T、YX1T:記憶體位置 PF11, PF12, PF2T, PK11, PK12, PM12, PM21, PV12, XC2T, XC22, YM1L, YM1T, YN11, YS12, YS1T, YX1T: Memory location

PH11:第一邏輯決定 PH11: First Logic Decision

PH21:第二邏輯決定 PH21: Second logical decision

PM1L:第一記憶體位置 PM1L: First memory location

PV1L:第二記憶體位置 PV1L: Second memory location

QD1T:指定物理參數 QD1T: Specify physical parameters

QP11、QU11、QU13、QU14:特定物理參數 QP11, QU11, QU13, QU14: specific physical parameters

QP1A:第二可變物理參數 QP1A: Second variable physical parameter

QU1A:第一可變物理參數 QU1A: First variable physical parameter

RA1E、RB1E:感測器測量範圍 RA1E, RB1E: Sensor measurement range

RC1E、RD1E:額定物理參數範圍 RC1E, RD1E: Rated physical parameter range

RC1E1、RD1E1:物理參數參考範圍 RC1E1, RD1E1: Physical parameter reference range

RC1E2:物理參數參考範圍、物理參數候選範圍 RC1E2: Physical parameter reference range, physical parameter candidate range

RC1E3、RD1E3、RD2E2、RK1E2:物理參數候選範圍 RC1E3, RD1E3, RD2E2, RK1E2: Physical parameter candidate range

RC1E4:特定物理參數範圍、第一特定物理參數範圍 RC1E4: specific physical parameter range, first specific physical parameter range

RC1E7:第二特定物理參數範圍 RC1E7: Second specific physical parameter range

RC1EL、RD1EL:物理參數應用範圍 RC1EL, RD1EL: Application range of physical parameters

RC1N、RD1N:額定測量值範圍 RC1N, RD1N: Rated measurement value range

RD1E2:物理參數參考範圍、物理參數候選範圍 RD1E2: Physical parameter reference range, physical parameter candidate range

RD1E4、RD1E5、RD1E7:特定物理參數範圍 RD1E4, RD1E5, RD1E7: specific physical parameter ranges

RD1ET、RK1ET:物理參數目標範圍 RD1ET, RK1ET: target range of physical parameters

RL11:肯定操作報告 RL11: Positive Action Report

RM11、RN11:測量值參考範圍 RM11, RN11: Measured value reference range

RM12:測量值參考範圍、測量值候選範圍 RM12: Measurement value reference range, measurement value candidate range

RM13、RN13:測量值候選範圍 RM13, RN13: Measurement value candidate range

RM17、RN17:特定測量值範圍 RM17, RN17: specific measurement value range

RM1L、RN1L:測量值應用範圍 RM1L, RN1L: Measured value application range

RN12:測量值參考範圍、測量值候選範圍 RN12: Measurement value reference range, measurement value candidate range

RN1T:測量值目標範圍 RN1T: Measured value target range

RQ1T:時間值目標範圍 RQ1T: Time value target range

RQ12:時間值候選範圍 RQ12: Time value candidate range

RV1L:對應測量值範圍 RV1L: Corresponding measurement value range

RW1EL、RY1ET:對應物理參數範圍 RW1EL, RY1ET: Corresponding physical parameter range

SA1:記憶體空間 SA1: memory space

SB11:物理參數訊號 SB11: Physical parameter signal

SC11:第一控制訊號 SC11: The first control signal

SC12:第二控制訊號 SC12: The second control signal

SC13:第三控制訊號 SC13: The third control signal

SC19、SC27、SD11、SD12、SH11、SV11、SV12:控制訊號 SC19, SC27, SD11, SD12, SH11, SV11, SV12: Control signal

SE11:控制回應訊號 SE11: Control response signal

SG11、SG12、SG27:功能訊號 SG11, SG12, SG27: function signal

SK21、SY10、SY11:時鐘時間訊號 SK21, SY10, SY11: Clock time signal

SM11:第一感測訊號 SM11: The first sensing signal

SM111、SM112:感測訊號分量 SM111, SM112: Sensing signal components

SM12:第二感測訊號 SM12: The second sensing signal

SM21、SN11、SN12、SN21:感測訊號 SM21, SN11, SN12, SN21: Sensing signal

SS11、SU11:儲存空間 SS11, SU11: storage space

ST11:觸發訊號 ST11: Trigger signal

SW12、SW13、SW14、SW15:指令訊號 SW12, SW13, SW14, SW15: Command signal

SX11:觸發訊號 SX11: Trigger signal

SZ11、SZ21、SZ22:操作請求訊號 SZ11, SZ21, SZ22: Operation request signal

TD11、TF11:操作時間 TD11, TF11: Operation time

TE12、TG12、TW11、TY11:指定時間 TE12, TG12, TW11, TY11: Specified time

TH1A:時鐘時間 TH1A: Clock time

TJ1T:特定時間 TJ1T: specific time

TK11:控制資料碼類型 TK11: Control data code type

TM11:測量範圍界限資料碼類型 TM11: Measurement range limit data code type

TP11:第二物理參數類型 TP11: Second physical parameter type

TR11:時鐘參考時間 TR11: Clock reference time

TT11:觸發時間 TT11: Trigger time

TT12:啟動時間 TT12: Startup time

TU11:第一物理參數類型 TU11: The first physical parameter type

TU1G:物理參數類型 TU1G: Physical parameter type

TZ1T:結束時間 TZ1T: end time

UA1T:控制應用碼 UA1T: Control application code

UH1T:中斷請求訊號 UH1T: Interrupt request signal

UK11、UK12:目標順序位置 UK11, UK12: target ordinal position

UL11:預設特徵物理參數 UL11: Preset characteristic physical parameters

UM1A、UN1A:可變物理參數範圍碼 UM1A, UN1A: Variable physical parameter range code

UM1L:物理參數應用範圍碼 UM1L: Physical parameter application range code

UN1T、UQ1T:物理參數目標範圍碼 UN1T, UQ1T: Physical parameter target range code

UQ12:物理參數候選範圍碼 UQ12: Physical parameter candidate range code

UW11:特定輸入碼 UW11: specific input code

UX11、UX22、UY11、UY21、UY25:指定位元數目 UX11, UX22, UY11, UY21, UY25: Specify the number of bits

UZ11:訊號狀態改變 UZ11: Signal state changed

VA11、VC11、VK11、VK12:相對值 VA11, VC11, VK11, VK12: Relative value

VL11:特徵物理參數值 VL11: Characteristic physical parameter value

VM11:第一測量值 VM11: First measurement

VM12:第二測量值 VM12: Second measurement

VM21、VN11、VN12、VN21:測量值 VM21, VN11, VN12, VN21: Measured values

WA1L:第二寫入請求訊息 WA1L: Second write request message

WB1L:第一寫入請求訊息 WB1L: The first write request message

WC1T、WD11:寫入請求訊息 WC1T, WD11: write request message

WJ11、WK11、WK12:電應用目標 WJ11, WK11, WK12: Electrical application target

WN1L、WN1T:寫入請求訊息 WN1L, WN1T: Write request message

XA1A:可變物理狀態 XA1A: Mutable Physical State

XA11:非特徵物理參數到達狀態 XA11: Non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state

XA12:實際特徵物理參數到達狀態 XA12: Actual Feature Physical Parameter Arrival Status

XH11:第一特定狀態 XH11: The first specific state

XH12:第二特定狀態 XH12: Second specific state

XJ11、XJ12:特定狀態 XJ11, XJ12: specific state

XK11、XU11:操作參考資料碼 XK11, XU11: Operation reference code

XP11、XR11:特定經驗公式 XP11, XR11: specific experience formula

YB11:電應用目標順序 YB11: Electrical application target sequence

YJ11:選擇工具 YJ11: Selection tool

YQ11:第一感測器靈敏度 YQ11: The first sensor sensitivity

YU11、YU21:預設資料導出規則 YU11, YU21: Default data export rules

YW11:第二感測器靈敏度 YW11: Second sensor sensitivity

ZB11:相對參考範圍碼 ZB11: Relative reference range code

ZD1T1、ZD1T2:預設物理參數目標範圍界限 ZD1T1, ZD1T2: preset physical parameter target range limits

ZL12:特徵物理參數到達 ZL12: Characteristic physical parameters arrive

ZM11、ZS11:感測操作 ZM11, ZS11: Sensing operation

ZR11:第一資料編碼操作 ZR11: First data encoding operation

ZR12:第二資料編碼操作 ZR12: Second data encoding operation

ZR13:第四資料編碼操作 ZR13: Fourth data encoding operation

ZX13:資料編碼操作、第三資料編碼操作 ZX13: Data encoding operation, third data encoding operation

本揭露得藉由下列圖式之詳細說明,俾得更深入之瞭解: This disclosure may be better understood through the detailed description of the following figures:

第1圖:為在本揭露各式各樣實施例中一控制系統的示意圖。 FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a control system in various embodiments of the present disclosure.

第2圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第3圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構 的示意圖。 Figure 3: an implementation structure of the control system shown in Figure 1 schematic diagram.

第4圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第5圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第6圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第7圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第8圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第9圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第10圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第11圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第12圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第13圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第14圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第15圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第16圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第17圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第18圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第19圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第20圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第21圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第22圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第23圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第24圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第25圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第26圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第27圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第28圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結 構的示意圖。 Figure 28: an implementation of the control system shown in Figure 1 Schematic diagram of the structure.

第29圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第30圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第31圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第32圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第33圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第34圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第35圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第36圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第37圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第38圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第39圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第40圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第41圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第42圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第43圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第44圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第45圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第46圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第47圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

請參閱第1圖,其為在本揭露各式各樣實施例中一控制系統801的示意圖。該控制系統801包含一控制目標裝置330和用於控制該控制目標裝置330的一控制裝置210。該控制目標裝置330具有一第一可變物理參數QU1A。該第一可變物理參數QU1A基於由一測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的一物理參數目標範圍RD1ET而被特徵化。用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該控制裝置210包一第一感測單元260和一操作單元297。 Please refer to FIG. 1, which is a schematic diagram of a control system 801 in various embodiments of the present disclosure. The control system 801 includes a control target device 330 and a control device 210 for controlling the control target device 330 . The control target device 330 has a first variable physical parameter QU1A. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by a measurement value target range RN1T. The control device 210 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A includes a first sensing unit 260 and an operating unit 297 .

該第一感測單元260感測一第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生一第一感測訊號SM11。例如,該第二可 變物理參數QP1A基於由一測量值應用範圍RM1L所代表的一物理參數應用範圍RC1EL而被特徵化。該操作單元297耦合於該第一感測單元260。在一觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該操作單元297響應該第一感測訊號SM11來獲得一第一測量值VM11。在該操作單元297藉由檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的一第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該操作單元297產生起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用的一第一控制訊號SC11。 The first sensing unit 260 senses a second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate a first sensing signal SM11. For example, the second can The variable physical parameter QP1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RC1EL represented by a measurement value application range RM1L. The operation unit 297 is coupled to the first sensing unit 260 . When a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the operation unit 297 obtains a first measurement value VM11 in response to the first sensing signal SM11. The operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking a first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L Under certain conditions, the operation unit 297 generates a first control signal SC11 which plays a role of indicating the target range RN1T of the measurement value.

請參閱第2圖。第2圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8011的示意圖。如第2圖所示,該實施結構8011包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。在一些實施例中,該第一感測單元260被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RM1L相關的一第一感測器規格FQ11。例如,該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示一第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11。該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11相關於由該第一感測單元260所執行的一感測訊號產生HE11。該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步依靠一第二感測單元334而被控制。該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值目標範圍RN1T相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。 See Figure 2. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8011 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 2 , the implementation structure 8011 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 . In some embodiments, the first sensing unit 260 is configured to comply with a first sensor specification FQ11 associated with the measurement value application range RM1L. For example, the first sensor specification FQ11 includes a first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing a first sensor sensitivity YQ11. The first sensor sensitivity YQ11 is related to a sensing signal generation HE11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 . The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further controlled by means of a second sensing unit 334 . The second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value target range RN1T.

例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11不同於該第一感測器靈 敏度YQ11。該第一測量值VM11以一指定測量值格式HQ11而被該操作單元297獲得。該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於不同於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數候選範圍RC1E2而被特徵化。該測量值應用範圍RM1L和代表該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的一測量值候選範圍RM12皆基於該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11而被預設,並具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。 For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is different from the first sensor sensitivity Sensitivity YQ11. The first measurement value VM11 is obtained by the operation unit 297 in a specified measurement value format HQ11. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The measurement value application range RM1L and a measurement value candidate range RM12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are both preset in the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11. The measurement value target range RN1T is preset based on the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and has a target range limit value pair DN1T.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關於一可變時間長度LF1A。例如,該可變時間長度LF1A基於一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該參考時間長度LJ1T由一時間長度值CL1T所代表。該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該時間長度值CL1T和一控制碼CC1T,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內足有與該參考時間長度LJ1T匹配的一應用時間長度LT1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T而被預先設定。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is associated with a variable time length LF1A. For example, the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a reference time length LJ1T. The reference time length LJ1T is represented by a time length value CL1T. The first control signal SC11 transmits the target range limit value pair DN1T, the time length value CL1T and a control code CC1T, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET sufficient to match the The reference time length LJ1T matches an application time length LT1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target range RN1T of the measurement value by sending the target range limit value pair DN1T.

該測量值應用範圍RM1L具有一應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DM1L被預設。該操作單元297響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L,並藉由比較該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L來檢查該第一數學關係 KA11。該測量值候選範圍RM12具有一候選範圍界限值對DM1B。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DM1B被預設。該操作單元297響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B。 The measured value application range RM1L has an application range limit value pair DM1L. For example, the application range limit value is preset for DM1L. The operation unit 297 obtains the application range limit value pair DM1L in response to the trigger event EQ11, and checks the first mathematical relationship by comparing the first measurement value VM11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L KA11. The measurement value candidate range RM12 has a candidate range limit value pair DM1B. For example, the candidate range limit value is preset for DM1B. The operation unit 297 obtains the preset candidate range limit value pair DM1B in response to the trigger event EQ11.

在一些實施例中,該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL被配置以對應於在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之外的一對應物理參數範圍RW1EL。在該操作單元297藉由檢查該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該對應物理參數範圍RW1EL的條件下,該操作單元297執行該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該參考範圍界限值對DM1B之間的一資料比較CA21。在該操作單元297基於該資料比較CA21而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的條件下,該操作單元297產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的一第二控制訊號SC12,該第二控制訊號SC12不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL outside the physical parameter application range RC1EL. Under the condition that the operation unit 297 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11, the operation unit 297 executes the first measurement value VM11 and all A data comparison between the reference range limit values obtained for DM1B and CA21. Under the condition that the operation unit 297 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located based on the data comparison CA21, the operation unit 297 generates a parameter for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A A second control signal SC12, the second control signal SC12 is different from the first control signal SC11.

在該操作單元297藉由檢查該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該操作單元297被配置以獲得包含該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該時間長度值CL1T和該控制碼CC1T的一控制資料碼CK1T,基於該控制資料碼CK1T來執行用於產生該第一控制訊號SC11的一訊號產生控制GS11,並執行一確保操作GT11,該確保操作GT11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數應用範圍碼UM1L被記錄。該第一可 變物理參數QU1A和該第二可變物理參數QP1A分別屬於一第一物理參數類型TU11和一第二物理參數類型TP11。例如,該第一物理參數類型TU11相同或不同於該第二物理參數類型TP11。 Under the condition that the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by examining the first mathematical relationship KA11, the operating unit 297 is configured to obtain the target range limit including the The value pair DN1T, the time length value CL1T and a control data code CK1T of the control code CC1T, based on the control data code CK1T to perform a signal generation control GS11 for generating the first control signal SC11, and to perform an ensure operation GT11, the ensuring operation GT11 is used to cause a physical parameter application range code UM1L representing the determined physical parameter application range RC1EL to be recorded. The first can The variable physical parameter QU1A and the second variable physical parameter QP1A belong to a first physical parameter type TU11 and a second physical parameter type TP11, respectively. For example, the first physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the second physical parameter type TP11.

請參閱第3圖、第4圖、第5圖、第6圖和第7圖。第3圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8012的示意圖。第4圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8013的示意圖。第5圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8014的示意圖。第6圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8015的示意圖。第7圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8016的示意圖。如第3圖、第4圖、第5圖、第6圖和第7圖所示,該實施結構8012、該實施結構8013、該實施結構8014、該實施結構8015和該實施結構8016的每一結構包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8012 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8013 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8014 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8015 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8016 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIGS. 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, each of the implementation structure 8012, the implementation structure 8013, the implementation structure 8014, the implementation structure 8015, and the implementation structure 8016 The structure includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 .

請額外參閱第1圖。在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該第二可變物理參數QP1A分別被形成於一第一實際位置LD11和不同於該第一實際位置LD11的一第二實際位置LC11。該操作單元297被配置以執行與該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL相關的一觸發應用功能FB11,並包含耦合於該第一感測單元260的一處理單元230、和耦合於該處理單元230的一輸出單元240。該觸發應用功能FB11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL相關的一觸發應用功能規格GBL1。 Please refer to Figure 1 additionally. In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter QU1A and the second variable physical parameter QP1A are formed at a first actual position LD11 and a second actual position LC11 different from the first actual position LD11, respectively. The operation unit 297 is configured to execute a trigger application function FB11 related to the physical parameter application range RC1EL, and includes a processing unit 230 coupled to the first sensing unit 260 and an output coupled to the processing unit 230 unit 240. The trigger application function FB11 is configured to conform to a trigger application function specification GBL1 related to the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

該第一感測單元260被配置以符合與該測 量值應用範圍RM1L相關的一第一感測器規格FQ11。例如,該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示一第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11。該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11相關於由該第一感測單元260所執行的一感測訊號產生HE11。例如,當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以執行相依於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的該感測訊號產生HE11,該感測訊號產生HE11用於產生該第一感測訊號SM11。 The first sensing unit 260 is configured to conform to the sensing A first sensor specification FQ11 associated with the magnitude application range RM1L. For example, the first sensor specification FQ11 includes a first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing a first sensor sensitivity YQ11. The first sensor sensitivity YQ11 is related to a sensing signal generation HE11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 . For example, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to perform the sensing signal generation HE11 depending on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11, the sensing The signal generating HE11 is used for generating the first sensing signal SM11.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步依靠一第二感測單元334而被控制。該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值目標範圍RN1T相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11不同於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further controlled by means of a second sensing unit 334 . The second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value target range RN1T. For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is different from the first sensor sensitivity YQ11.

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一感測訊號SM11來以一指定測量值格式HQ11獲得該第一測量值VM11。例如,該指定測量值格式HQ11基於一指定位元數目UX11而被特徵化。在該處理單元230確定該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11。該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於一額定物理參數範圍RC1E而被特徵化。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RC1E由一額定測量值範圍RC1N所代表,並包 含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…。 In some embodiments, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11 in a specified measurement value format HQ11 in response to the first sensing signal SM11. For example, the specified measurement value format HQ11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UX11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RC1E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E is represented by a nominal measured value range RC1N and includes It includes the reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, .

該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…包含該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。該觸發應用功能規格GBL1包含該第一感測器規格FQ11、用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RC1E的一額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、和用於表示該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET由一第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T所表示。例如,該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T被預設。 The complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, ... include the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The trigger application function specification GBL1 includes the first sensor specification FQ11, a rated physical parameter range representation GB1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RC1E, and a physical parameter application range for representing the physical parameter application range RC1EL Indicates GB1L. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T. For example, the first physical parameter candidate range indicates that GA1T is preset.

該額定測量值範圍RC1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E的一第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設,具有一額定範圍界限值對DC1A,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…所分別代表的該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DC1A用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The nominal measured value range RC1N is based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and a first data encoding operation ZR11 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E to use the specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset to have a rated range limit value pair DC1A, and includes the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . For example, the nominal range limit value is preset for DC1A with the specified measurement value format HQ11.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…包含該測量值應用範圍RM1L。該測量值應用範圍RM1L由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中的一測量值應用範圍碼EH1L所代表,並具有一應用範圍界限值對DM1L;藉此該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L被配置以指示該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…皆基於 該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。 In some embodiments, the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . comprise the measurement value application range RM1L. The measurement value application range RM1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EH1L included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . and has an application range limit value pair DM1L; whereby the measurement value applies The range code EH1L is configured to indicate the physical parameter application range RC1EL. For example, the complex number of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, ... are all based on The trigger application function specification GBL1 is preset.

該應用範圍界限值對DM1L包含該測量值應用範圍RM1L的一第一應用範圍界限值DM15和相對於該第一應用範圍界限值DM15的一第二應用範圍界限值DM16,並基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L的一第二資料編碼操作ZR12來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RM1L基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第二資料編碼操作ZR12來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The application range limit value pair DM1L includes a first application range limit value DM15 of the measurement value application range RM1L and a second application range limit value DM16 relative to the first application range limit value DM15, and is applied based on the physical parameter The range representation GB1L, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and a second data encoding operation ZR12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GB1L to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11. The measurement value application range RM1L is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the physical parameter application range representation GB1L, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the second data encoding operation ZR12.

該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T的一第三資料編碼操作ZX13而被預設。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一儲存單元250。該儲存單元250儲存所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A和一可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。例如,該測量值目標範圍RN1T具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。 The measured value target range RN1T is predicted based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a third data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T Assume. The control device 210 further includes a storage unit 250 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The storage unit 250 stores the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A and a variable physical parameter range code UM1A. For example, the measured value target range RN1T has a target range limit value pair DN1T.

在一些實施例中,當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A等於選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的一第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14。例如,該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14指示基於基於一感測操作ZM11而被該處理單元230先前確定的一第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4。該第一特定物理參數範 圍RC1E4選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…。由該第一感測單元260所執行的該感測操作ZM11用於感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14被指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。 In some embodiments, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the variable physical parameter range code UM1A is equal to a first specific measurement value range code EH14 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . For example, the first specific measurement value range code EH14 indicates a first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 230 based on a sensing operation ZM11. The first specific physical parameter range The range RC1E4 is selected from the complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . The sensing operation ZM11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 is used to sense the second variable physical parameter QP1A. Before the triggering event EQ11 occurs, the first specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A.

例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230獲得該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14。在該處理單元230於該觸發事件EQ11發生之前基於該感測操作ZM11而確定該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14代表被配置以代表該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4的一特定測量值範圍。該特定測量值範圍基於該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。例如,該第一感測單元260藉由執行該感測操作ZM11來執行相依於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一感測訊號產生以產生一感測訊號。 For example, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the first specific measurement value range code EH14. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 based on the sensing operation ZM11 before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the obtained first specific physical parameter range RC1E4. A specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A. The first specific measurement value range code EH14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4. The specific measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11. For example, the first sensing unit 260 performs a sensing signal generation depending on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11 by performing the sensing operation ZM11 to generate a sensing signal.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230接收該感測訊號,響應該感測訊號來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得一特定測量值,並執行用於檢查該特定測量值和該特定測量值範圍之間的一數學關係的一特定檢查操作。在該處理單元230基於該特定檢查操作而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A處於的該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14指定到該可 變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。該處理單元230響應用於感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A的一特定感測操作來決定該處理單元230是否要使用該儲存單元250以改變該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。例如,該特定感測操作由該第一感測單元260所執行。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal, obtains a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HQ11 in response to the sensing signal, and executes a method for checking the specific measurement value and the specific measurement A specific check operation for a mathematical relationship between ranges of values. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is located based on the specific checking operation, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the obtained The first specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to the available Variable physical parameter range code UM1A. The processing unit 230 determines whether the processing unit 230 is to use the storage unit 250 to change the variable physical parameter range code UM1A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the first sensing unit 260 .

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存單元250獲得一操作參考資料碼XK11,並藉由運行一資料確定程序NE1A來執行使用該操作參考資料碼XK11的一資料確定AE1A以確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍RM1L。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains an operation reference data code XK11 from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ11, and executes it by running a data determination program NE1A Use a data of the operational reference data code XK11 to determine AE1A to determine the measured value selected from the complex different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . ... to select the measured value application range RM1L.

該操作參考資料碼XK11相同於基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設的一可允許參考資料碼。該資料確定程序NE1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被建構。該資料確定AE1A是一第一資料確定操作AE11和一第二資料確定操作AE12的其中之一。在該操作參考資料碼XK11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A而被獲得以相同於該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14的條件下,是該第一資料確定操作AE11的該資料確定AE1A基於所獲得的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。例如,所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L相同或不同於所獲得的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14。 The operation reference data code XK11 is the same as a permissible reference data code preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The data determination program NE1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The data determination AE1A is one of a first data determination operation AE11 and a second data determination operation AE12. Under the condition that the operation reference data code XK11 is obtained by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UM1A stored in the storage unit 250 to be the same as the first specific measurement value range code EH14, the first The data determination AE1A of a data determination operation AE11 determines the measured value application range code EH1L based on the obtained first specific measured value range code EH14. For example, the determined measured value application range code EH1L is the same as or different from the obtained first specific measured value range code EH14.

在該操作參考資料碼XK11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A而被獲得以相同於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的條件下,是該第二資料確定操作AE12的該資料確定AE1A藉由執行使用該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的一第一科學計算MF11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。例如,該第一科學計算MF11基於一特定經驗公式XP11而被執行。該特定經驗公式XP11基於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…而被預先制定。例如,該特定經驗公式XP11基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預先制定。 Under the condition that the operation reference data code XK11 is obtained by accessing the rated range limit value pair DC1A stored in the storage unit 250 to be the same as the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A, is the The data determination AE1A of the second data determination operation AE12 references the range code EH11 from the complex number of different measurements by performing a first scientific calculation MF11 for DC1A using the first measurement VM11 and the obtained nominal range limit value for DC1A , EH12, ... to select the measurement value application range code EH1L to determine the measurement value application range code EH1L. For example, the first scientific calculation MF11 is performed based on a specific empirical formula XP11. The specific empirical formula XP11 is pre-established based on the preset nominal range limit value pair DC1A and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . For example, the specific empirical formula XP11 is formulated in advance based on the trigger application function specification GBL1.

該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L,並基於該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L之間的一第一資料比較CA11來檢查該第一數學關係KA11以做出該第一測量值VM11是否為於所選擇的該測量值應用範圍RM1L之內的一第一邏輯決定PH11。在該第一邏輯決定PH11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。 The processing unit 230 applies a range code EH1L based on the determined measurement value to obtain the pair of application range limit values DM1L, and based on a first measurement value VM11 and the obtained pair of application range limit values DM1L The data is compared CA11 to check the first mathematical relationship KA11 to make a first logical decision PH11 whether the first measured value VM11 is within the selected measured value application range RM1L. Under the condition that the first logical decision PH11 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located.

例如,在該第一應用範圍界限值DM15不同於該第二應用範圍界限值DM16且該第一測量值VM11是於該第一應用範圍界限值DM15和該第二應用範圍界限值 DM16之間的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PH11以成為肯定的。在該第一應用範圍界限值DM15、該第二應用範圍界限值DM16和該第一測量值VM11是相等的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PH11以成為肯定的。 For example, the first application range limit value DM15 is different from the second application range limit value DM16 and the first measurement value VM11 is between the first application range limit value DM15 and the second application range limit value Under the condition between DM16, the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PH11 to be positive by comparing the first measurement value VM11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L. Under the condition that the first application range limit value DM15, the second application range limit value DM16 and the first measurement value VM11 are equal, the processing unit 230 obtains the application by comparing the first measurement value VM11 with the first measurement value VM11. The range limit value makes the first logical decision PH11 positive for DM1L.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210具有該第二可變物理參數QP1A。該第一可變物理參數QU1A存在於該控制目標裝置330中。該觸發事件EQ11是一觸發作用事件、一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件、一狀態改變事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並被應用到該觸發應用功能FB11。在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11要發生的條件下,該控制目標裝置330被配置以執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定功能操作ZH11。例如,該指定功能操作ZH11用於導致該觸發作用事件發生。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 has the second variable physical parameter QP1A. The first variable physical parameter QU1A exists in the control target device 330 . The trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event and an identification medium occurrence event, and is applied to the trigger application function FB11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11, which is the trigger action event, is to occur, the control target device 330 is configured to perform a specified function operation ZH11 related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the specified function operation ZH11 is used to cause the triggering event to occur.

該觸發應用功能FB11相關於一記憶體單元25Y1。該測量值目標範圍RN1T由一測量值目標範圍碼EM1T所代表;藉此該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間具有一第二數學關係KY11。 The trigger application function FB11 is associated with a memory unit 25Y1. The measurement target range RN1T is represented by a measurement target range code EM1T; whereby the measurement target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. There is a second mathematical relationship KY11 between the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.

該記憶體單元25Y1具有一第一記憶體位置PM1L和不同於該第一記憶體位置PM1L的一第二記憶體位 置PV1L,在該第一記憶體位置PM1L儲存該應用範圍界限值對DM1L,並在該第二記憶體位置PV1L儲存一控制資料碼CK1T。例如,該第一記憶體位置PM1L和該第二記憶體位置PV1L皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被識別。該控制資料碼CK1T包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和該控制資料碼CK1T皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被該記憶體單元25Y1儲存。 The memory cell 25Y1 has a first memory location PM1L and a second memory location different from the first memory location PM1L Set PV1L, store the application range limit value pair DM1L in the first memory location PM1L, and store a control data code CK1T in the second memory location PV1L. For example, the first memory location PM1L and the second memory location PV1L are both identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L. The control data code CK1T includes the measured value target range code EM1T. For example, both the application range limit value pair DM1L and the control data code CK1T are stored in the memory unit 25Y1 based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230藉由運行一資料獲取程序NF1A來執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第一資料獲取AF1A以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該資料獲取AF1A是一第一資料獲取操作AF11和一第二資料獲取操作AF12的其中之一。該資料獲取程序NF1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被建構。該第一資料獲取操作AF11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PM1L的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 executes a first data acquisition AF1A using the determined measured value application range code EH1L to obtain the application range limit pair DM1L by running a data acquisition program NF1A. For example, the data acquisition AF1A is one of a first data acquisition operation AF11 and a second data acquisition operation AF12. The data acquisition program NF1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The first data acquisition operation AF11 uses the memory cell 25Y1 based on the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to access the application range limit value pair DM1L stored in the first memory location PM1L to obtain the application Range limit value for DM1L.

該第二資料獲取操作AF12藉由讀取被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A來取得所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A,並藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所取得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的一第二科學計算MG11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DC1A包含該額定測量值範圍RC1N的一額定範圍界限值DC11和相對於 該額定範圍界限值DC11的一額定範圍界限值DC12,並基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The second data acquisition operation AF12 obtains the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A by reading the rated range limit value pair DC1A stored in the storage unit 250, and uses the determined The measured value uses a range code EH1L and a second scientific calculation MG11 of the obtained nominal range limit value pair DC1A to obtain the application range limit value pair DM1L. For example, the nominal range limit value pair DC1A includes a nominal range limit value DC11 of the nominal measurement value range RC1N and a nominal range limit value DC11 relative to A nominal range limit value DC12 of the nominal range limit value DC11 and based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the first data encoding operation ZR11 to use the specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第二資料獲取AG1A以獲得一控制應用碼UA1T。例如,該第二資料獲取AG1A是一第三資料獲取操作AG11和一第四資料獲取操作AG12的其中之一。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the processing unit 230 performs an application range code EH1L using the determined measurement value. A second data acquisition AG1A obtains a control application code UA1T. For example, the second data acquisition AG1A is one of a third data acquisition operation AG11 and a fourth data acquisition operation AG12.

該第三資料獲取操作AG11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PV1L的該控制資料碼CK1T以獲得等於該控制資料碼CK1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。該第四資料獲取操作AG12藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和該第二數學關係KY11的一第三科學計算MQ11來獲得等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。 The third data acquisition operation AG11 applies range code EH1L based on the determined measurement value to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PV1L to obtain a value equal to the control data This control of code CK1T applies code UA1T. The fourth data acquisition operation AG12 obtains a value equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by performing a third scientific calculation MQ11 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the second mathematical relationship KY11 The control application code UA1T.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來在一操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11來執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送 該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。 The processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 within an operation time TD11 to control the output unit 240 based on the obtained control application code UA1T. The output unit 240 performs a first signal generation operation BS11 for the trigger application function FB11 to generate the first control signal SC11 in response to the signal generation control GS11. For example, the first control signal SC11 is transmitted by The measurement value target range code EM1T serves to indicate the measurement value target range RN1T, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…進一步包含不同於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…具有一總參考範圍數目NS11,並進一步包含代表該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的一測量值候選範圍RM12。該觸發應用功能規格GBL1進一步包含用於表示該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的一第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12。 In some embodiments, the complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . further include a physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . have a total reference range number NS11, and further include a measurement value candidate range RM12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2. The trigger application function specification GBL1 further includes a second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2.

該測量值候選範圍RM12由不同於該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一測量值候選範圍碼EH12所代表,具有一候選範圍界限值對DM1B,並被配置以代表該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2;藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EH12被配置以指示該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DM1B基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12的一第四資料編碼操作ZR13來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The measurement candidate range RM12 is represented by a measurement candidate range code EH12 different from the measurement application range code EH1L, has a candidate range limit value pair DM1B, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2; thereby The measured value candidate range code EH12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2. For example, the candidate range limit value pair DM1B is based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11, and a fourth data encoding operation ZR13 for converting the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11.

該測量值候選範圍RM12基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第四資料編碼操作ZR13來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該總參考範圍數目NS11基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11 來獲得該總參考範圍數目NS11。該第一科學計算MF11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NS11。該第二科學計算MG11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NS11。例如,該總參考範圍數目NS11大於或等於2。例如,該總參考範圍數目NS11≧3;該總參考範圍數目NS11≧4;該總參考範圍數目NS11≧5;該總參考範圍數目NS11≧6;且該總參考範圍數目NS11≦255。 The measurement value candidate range RM12 is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZR13. The total reference range number NS11 is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the total reference range number NS11. The first scientific calculation MF11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NS11. The second scientific calculation MG11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NS11. For example, the total reference range number NS11 is greater than or equal to two. For example, the total reference range number NS11≧3; the total reference range number NS11≧4; the total reference range number NS11≧5; the total reference range number NS11≧6; and the total reference range number NS11≦255.

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330接收該第一控制訊號SC11,從所接收的該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,並基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送基於該控制應用碼UA1T而被確定的一控制訊息CG11。該控制訊息CG11包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。例如,該控制訊息CG11包含該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和該控制碼CC1T。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 receives the first control signal SC11, obtains the measurement target range code EM1T from the received first control signal SC11, and based on the obtained measurement target range code EM1T to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys a control message CG11 determined based on the control application code UA1T. The control message CG11 includes the measurement value target range code EM1T. For example, the control message CG11 includes the target range limit value pair DN1T and the control code CC1T.

該測量值應用範圍RM1L是該額定測量值範圍RC1N的一第一部分。該測量值候選範圍RM12是該額定測量值範圍RC1N的一第二部分。該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是分開的或相鄰的。在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是分開的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RM1L和該測量值候選範圍RM12是分開的。在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是相鄰的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RM1L和該測量值候選範圍RM12是相鄰 的。 The measured value application range RM1L is a first part of the nominal measured value range RC1N. The measurement value candidate range RM12 is a second part of the nominal measurement value range RC1N. The physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are separate or adjacent. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are separated, the measurement value application range RM1L and the measurement value candidate range RM12 are separated. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are adjacent, the measurement value application range RM1L and the measurement value candidate range RM12 are adjacent of.

例如,該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L被配置以等於一整數。該額定範圍界限值DC12大於該額定範圍界限值DC11。該額定範圍界限值DC12和該額定範圍界限值DC11之間具有相對於該額定範圍界限值DC11的一相對值VC11。該相對值VC11等於該額定範圍界限值DC12減去該額定範圍界限值DC11的一計算結果。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DM1L基於該額定範圍界限值DC11、該額定範圍界限值DC12、該整數、和該相對值VC11對於該總參考範圍數目NS11的一比率而被預設。該第二科學計算MG11使用該額定範圍界限值DC11、該額定範圍界限值DC12、該整數、該比率和其任意組合的其中之一。 For example, the measured value is configured to be equal to an integer using the range code EH1L. The rated range limit value DC12 is greater than the rated range limit value DC11. There is a relative value VC11 between the rated range limit value DC12 and the rated range limit value DC11 with respect to the rated range limit value DC11. The relative value VC11 is equal to a calculation result of the rated range limit value DC12 minus the rated range limit value DC11. For example, the application range limit value pair DM1L is preset based on the nominal range limit value DC11, the nominal range limit value DC12, the integer, and a ratio of the relative value VC11 to the total reference range number NS11. The second scientific calculation MG11 uses one of the rated range limit value DC11, the rated range limit value DC12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.

在一些實施例中,在該第一邏輯決定PH11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第四科學計算MF12來確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…中選擇該測量值候選範圍RM12。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the first logical decision PH11 is negative, the processing unit 230 determines that the complex number selected from the complex number is selected by performing a fourth scientific calculation MF12 using the determined measurement value to apply the range code EH1L The measurement value candidate range code EH12 of the different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . in order to select the measurement value candidate range RM12 from the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . .

該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12來獲得該候選範圍界限值對DM1B,並基於該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B之間的一第二資料比較CA21來檢查該第一測量值VM11和所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RM12之間的一第三數學關係KA21以做出該第一測量值VM11是否為於所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RM12之內的一第二邏輯決定PH21。在 該第二邏輯決定PH21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。 The processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DM1B based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EH12, and obtains a second range limit value pair DM1B based on the first measurement value VM11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DM1B Data comparison CA21 to check a third mathematical relationship KA21 between the first measurement value VM11 and the selected measurement value candidate range RM12 to determine whether the first measurement value VM11 is in the selected measurement value candidate range A second logic within RM12 determines PH21. exist Under the condition that the second logical decision PH21 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located.

在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一第二訊號產生操作BS21以產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的一第二控制訊號SC12,該第二控制訊號SC12不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to perform a second signal generation for the trigger application function FB11 The BS21 is operated to generate a second control signal SC12 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A, the second control signal SC12 being different from the first control signal SC11.

在該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L且該處理單元230藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PH11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L之間的一碼差異DA11來使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。在該觸發事件EQ11是該第二可變物理參數QP1A從該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4進入該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的該狀態改變事件的條件下,該處理單元230基於該碼差異DA11來確定是該狀態改變事件的該觸發事件EQ11。 After the first specific measurement range code EH14 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the processing unit 230 determines by making the first logical decision PH11 the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in Under the condition of the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 is based on a code between the variable physical parameter range code UM1A equal to the first specific measurement value range code EH14 and the determined measurement value application range code EH1L The difference DA11 is used to use the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is the state change event of the second variable physical parameter QP1A from the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 to the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 determines based on the code difference DA11 is the trigger event EQ11 of the state change event.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元297進一步包含一響應區域AC1、一讀取器220和一輸入單元270。該響應區域AC1用於執行該觸發應用功能FB11。該讀取器 220,耦合於該響應區域AC1。該輸入單元270,耦合於該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11是該識別媒介出現事件且該處理單元230通過該讀取器220而辨識了出現於該響應區域AC1的一識別媒介310的條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SM11來獲得該第一測量值VM11。 In some embodiments, the operation unit 297 further includes a response area AC1 , a reader 220 and an input unit 270 . The response area AC1 is used to execute the trigger application function FB11. the reader 220, which is coupled to the response area AC1. The input unit 270 is coupled to the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is the identification medium occurrence event and the processing unit 230 has identified an identification medium 310 present in the response area AC1 through the reader 220, the processing unit 230 is based on the first sensing The signal SM11 is used to obtain the first measurement value VM11.

當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該輸出單元240顯示一第一狀態指示LA11。例如,該第一狀態指示LA11用於指示該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置於該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4之內的一第一特定狀態XH11。在該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L且該處理單元230藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PH11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230進一步基於該碼差異DA11來導致該輸出單元240將該第一狀態指示LA11改變成一第二狀態指示LA12。例如,該第二狀態指示LA12用於指示該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內的一第二特定狀態XH12。 When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the output unit 240 displays a first state indication LA11. For example, the first state indication LA11 is used to indicate that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is configured in a first specific state XH11 within the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4. After the first specific measurement range code EH14 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the processing unit 230 determines by making the first logical decision PH11 the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in Under the condition of the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 further causes the output unit 240 to change the first state indication LA11 to a second state indication LA12 based on the code difference DA11. For example, the second state indication LA12 is used to indicate that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is configured in a second specific state XH12 within the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

在該輸入單元270於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TW11之內從該控制目標裝置330接收響應該第一控制訊號SC11而被產生的一控制回應訊號SE11的條件下,該處理單元230響應該控制回應訊號SE11來執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定實際操作BJ11。在該操作時間TD11之後,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生一第二感測訊號SM12。例如,在該操作時間TD11之後,該第一感測單元260感測 該第二可變物理參數QP1A以執行相依於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一感測訊號產生HE12,該感測訊號產生HE12用於產生該第二感測訊號SM12。 Under the condition that the input unit 270 receives a control response signal SE11 generated in response to the first control signal SC11 from the control target device 330 within a specified time TW11 after the operation time TD11, the processing unit 230 responds The response signal SE11 should be controlled to perform a specified actual operation BJ11 related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A. After the operation time TD11, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate a second sensing signal SM12. For example, after the operation time TD11, the first sensing unit 260 senses The second variable physical parameter QP1A is used to perform a sensing signal generating HE12 dependent on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11, and the sensing signal generating HE12 is used to generate the second sensing signal SM12.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TE12之內響應該第二感測訊號SM12來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得一第二測量值VM12。該處理單元230於該指定時間TE12之內藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第五科學計算MF13來獲得包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中的一第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17。例如,該第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,並代表包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…中的一特定測量值範圍RM17。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 responds to the second sensing signal SM12 within a specified time TE12 after the operation time TD11 to obtain a second measurement value VM12 in the specified measurement value format HQ11. The processing unit 230 obtains the reference range codes EH11, EH12, . A second specific measurement value range code EH17. For example, the second specific measurement value range code EH17 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L, and represents a specific measurement value range RM17 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . .

該特定測量值範圍RM17代表包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…中的一第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7。該處理單元230基於該第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17來執行用於檢查該第二測量值VM12和該特定測量值範圍RM17之間的一第四數學關係KA13的一檢查操作BA13。 The specific measurement value range RM17 represents a second specific physical parameter range RC1E7 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . The processing unit 230 performs a check operation BA13 for checking a fourth mathematical relationship KA13 between the second measurement value VM12 and the specific measurement value range RM17 based on the second specific measurement value range code EH17.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230於該指定時間TE12之內基於該檢查操作BA13而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的一第三控制訊號SC13,並使用該儲存單元250以將該第二特定測量值範圍 碼EH17指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。例如,該第三控制訊號SC13不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the second specific physical parameter range RC1E7 that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in based on the checking operation BA13 within the specified time TE12, the processing The unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate a third control signal SC13 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A, and uses the storage unit 250 for the second specific measurement value range Code EH17 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A. For example, the third control signal SC13 is different from the first control signal SC11.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測處於一拘束條件FP11的該第二可變物理參數QP1A以提供該第一感測訊號SM11到該處理單元230。例如,該拘束條件FP11是該第二可變物理參數QP1A等於包含於該額定物理參數範圍RC1E中的一特定物理參數QP11。該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SM11來估計該特定物理參數QP11以獲得該第一測量值VM11。由於處於該拘束條件FP11的該第二可變物理參數QP1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內,該處理單元230辨識該第一測量值VM11為於該測量值應用範圍RM1L之內的一可允許值,藉此辨識該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11為一數值交集關係,並藉此確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。 When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A under a constraint condition FP11 to provide the first sensing signal SM11 to the processing unit 230 . For example, the constraint condition FP11 is that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to a specific physical parameter QP11 included in the rated physical parameter range RC1E. The processing unit 230 estimates the specific physical parameter QP11 based on the first sensing signal SM11 to obtain the first measurement value VM11. Since the second variable physical parameter QP1A under the constraint condition FP11 is within the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 identifies the first measurement value VM11 as a variable within the measurement value application range RM1L allowable value, thereby identifying the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L as a numerical intersection relationship, and thereby determining the current state of the second variable physical parameter QP1A Physical parameter application range RC1EL.

在一些實施例中,該第一感測單元260基於與該感測訊號產生HE11相關的該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11而被特徵化,並被配置以符合該第一感測器規格FQ11。該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11、和用於表示一感測器測量範圍RA1E的一感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RC1E被配置以相同於該感測器測量範圍RA1E,或被配置以是該感測器測量範圍RA1E的一部分。該感測器測量範圍RA1E相關於由該第一感測單 元260所執行的一物理參數感測。該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R基於一第一預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第一預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the first sensing unit 260 is characterized based on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11 associated with the sensing signal generation HE11 and is configured to comply with the first sensor specification FQ11. The first sensor specification FQ11 includes the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing the first sensor sensitivity YQ11, and a sensor measurement range representation for representing a sensor measurement range RA1E GQ1R. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E is configured to be the same as the sensor measurement range RA1E, or to be part of the sensor measurement range RA1E. The sensor measurement range RA1E is related to the A physical parameter sensing performed by element 260. The sensor measurement range indicates that the GQ1R is provided based on a first predetermined measurement unit. For example, the first preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.

該額定測量值範圍RC1N和該額定範圍界限值對DC1A皆基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RM1L和該應用範圍界限值對DM1L皆基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第二資料編碼操作ZR12來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The rated measurement value range RC1N and the rated range limit value pair DC1A are both based on the rated physical parameter range representation GB1E, the sensor measurement range representation GQ1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the first data encoding operation ZR11 for use The specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset. The measurement value application range RM1L and the application range limit value pair DM1L are based on the physical parameter application range representation GB1L, the sensor measurement range representation GQ1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the second data encoding operation ZR12 to use The specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset.

該測量值候選範圍RM12和該候選範圍界限值對DM1B皆基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12、該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第四資料編碼操作ZR13來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T和該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12皆基於一第二預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第二預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一,並相同或不同於該第一預設測量單位。 The measurement value candidate range RM12 and the candidate range limit value pair DM1B are both based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12, the sensor measurement range representation GQ1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZR13 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11. The nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E, the physical parameter application range representation GB1L, the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, and the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12 are all provided based on a second predetermined measurement unit. For example, the second predetermined measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit, and is the same as or different from the first predetermined measurement unit.

該第二感測單元334基於與一感測訊號產生相關的該第二感測器靈敏度YW11而被特徵化,並被配置以符合該第二感測器規格FU11。該第二感測器規格FU11 包含用於表示該第二感測器靈敏度YW11的該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11、和用於表示一感測器測量範圍RB1E的一感測器測量範圍表示GW1R。例如,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET被配置以是該感測器測量範圍RB1E的一部分。該感測器測量範圍RB1E相關於由該第二感測單元334所執行的一物理參數感測。該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R基於一第三預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第三預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一。 The second sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the second sensor sensitivity YW11 associated with a sensing signal generation, and is configured to comply with the second sensor specification FU11. The second sensor specification FU11 The second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing the second sensor sensitivity YW11 and a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E are included. For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RB1E. The sensor measurement range RB1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the second sensing unit 334 . The sensor measurement range indicates that the GW1R is provided based on a third predetermined measurement unit. For example, the third preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於該感測器測量範圍RB1E而被特徵化。該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於該感測器測量範圍RA1E而被特徵化。例如,該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12和該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R皆屬於十進制資料類型。該第一測量值VM11、該第二測量值VM12、該額定範圍界限值對DC1A、該應用範圍界限值對DM1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和該候選範圍界限值對DM1B皆屬於該二進制資料類型,並皆適用於電腦處理。該第一感測器規格FQ11、該第二感測器規格FU11和該觸發應用功能規格GBL1皆被預設。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB1E. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RA1E. For example, the sensor measurement range represents GQ1R, the rated physical parameter range represents GB1E, the physical parameter application range represents GB1L, the first physical parameter candidate range represents GA1T, the second physical parameter candidate range represents GB12 and the sensing The measurement range of the GW1R indicates that the GW1R is a decimal data type. The first measurement value VM11, the second measurement value VM12, the rated range limit value pair DC1A, the application range limit value pair DM1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T and the candidate range limit value pair DM1B all belong to the binary data type, and all are suitable for computer processing. The first sensor specification FQ11 , the second sensor specification FU11 and the trigger application function specification GBL1 are all preset.

在一些實施例中,該第一記憶體位置PM1L基於一第一記憶體位址FM1L而被識別。該第一記憶體位址FM1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被預設。該第二記憶體位置PV1L基於一第二記憶體位址FV1L 而被識別。該第二記憶體位址FV1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被預設。 In some embodiments, the first memory location PM1L is identified based on a first memory location FM1L. The first memory address FM1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L. The second memory location PV1L is based on a second memory location FV1L be identified. The second memory address FV1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以取得所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L、所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T,基於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來獲得該第一記憶體位址FM1L,並基於所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L來導致該操作單元297提供包含所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L的一第一寫入請求訊息WB1L。例如,該第一寫入請求訊息WB1L用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第一記憶體位置PM1L儲存所輸送的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset measurement value application range code EH1L, the preset application range limit value pair DM1L and the preset control data code CK1T, Apply range code EH1L based on the obtained measurement value to obtain the first memory address FM1L, and cause the operation unit 297 based on the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L and the obtained first memory address FM1L A first write request message WB1L including the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L and the obtained first memory address FM1L is provided. For example, the first write request message WB1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the delivered pair of application range limit values DM1L at the first memory location PM1L.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來獲得該第二記憶體位址FV1L,並基於所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L來導致該操作單元297提供包含所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L的一第二寫入請求訊息WA1L。例如,該第二寫入請求訊息WA1L用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第二記憶體位置PV1L儲存所輸送的該控制資料碼CK1T。該控制裝置210耦合於一伺服器280。該識別媒介310是一電子標籤350、一條碼媒介360和一生物識別作用媒介370的其中之一。該電子標籤350、該儲存單元250和該伺服器280的其中之一中包含該記憶體單元25Y1。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 applies the range code EH1L to obtain the second memory address FV1L based on the obtained measurement value, and obtains the second memory address FV1L based on the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second The memory address FV1L causes the operation unit 297 to provide a second write request message WA1L including the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FV1L. For example, the second write request message WA1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the delivered control data code CK1T in the second memory location PV1L. The control device 210 is coupled to a server 280 . The identification medium 310 is one of an electronic label 350 , a barcode medium 360 and a biometric identification medium 370 . One of the electronic tag 350 , the storage unit 250 and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1 .

請參閱第1圖、第2圖、第3圖、第4圖、第5圖第6圖、和第7圖。一種用於控制一第一可變物理參數QU1A的方法MT10被揭露。該第一可變物理參數QU1A基於由一測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的一物理參數目標範圍RD1ET而被特徵化。該方法MT10包含下列步驟:提供一第二可變物理參數QP1A,其中該第二可變物理參數QP1A基於由一測量值應用範圍RM1L所代表的一物理參數應用範圍RC1EL而被特徵化;感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生一感測訊號SM11;在一觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,響應該感測訊號SM11來獲得一測量值VM11;以及在該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL藉由檢查該測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的一第一數學關係KA11而被確定的條件下,產生起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用的一第一控制訊號SC11。 Please refer to Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7. A method MT10 for controlling a first variable physical parameter QU1A is disclosed. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by a measurement value target range RN1T. The method MT10 includes the steps of: providing a second variable physical parameter QP1A, wherein the second variable physical parameter QP1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RC1EL represented by a measurement value application range RM1L; sensing The second variable physical parameter QP1A generates a sensing signal SM11; when a trigger event EQ11 occurs, a measurement value VM11 is obtained in response to the sensing signal SM11; and when the second variable physical parameter QP1A is present Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL is determined by examining a first mathematical relationship KA11 between the measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L, it is generated that acts to indicate the measurement value target range RN1T a first control signal SC11.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含一步驟:提供一第一感測單元260。例如,感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A的步驟藉由使用該第一感測單元260而被執行。該第一感測單元260被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RM1L相關的一第一感測器規格FQ11。例如,該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示一第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11。該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11相關於由該第一感測單元260所執行的一感測訊號產生HE11。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further includes a step of providing a first sensing unit 260 . For example, the step of sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A is performed by using the first sensing unit 260 . The first sensing unit 260 is configured to comply with a first sensor specification FQ11 related to the measured value application range RM1L. For example, the first sensor specification FQ11 includes a first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing a first sensor sensitivity YQ11. The first sensor sensitivity YQ11 is related to a sensing signal generation HE11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 .

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步依靠一 第二感測單元334而被控制。該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值目標範圍RN1T相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11不同於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11。該測量值VM11以一指定測量值格式HQ11而被獲得。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further dependent on a The second sensing unit 334 is controlled. The second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value target range RN1T. For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is different from the first sensor sensitivity YQ11. The measurement value VM11 is obtained in a specified measurement value format HQ11.

該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於不同於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數候選範圍RC1E2而被特徵化。該測量值應用範圍RM1L和代表該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的一測量值候選範圍RM12皆基於該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11而被預設,並具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。 The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The measurement value application range RM1L and a measurement value candidate range RM12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are both preset in the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11. The measurement value target range RN1T is preset based on the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and has a target range limit value pair DN1T.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關於一可變時間長度LF1A。例如,該可變時間長度LF1A基於一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該參考時間長度LJ1T由一時間長度值CL1T所代表。該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該時間長度值CL1T和一控制碼CC1T,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內足有與該參考時間長度LJ1T匹配的一應用時間長度LT1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T而被預先設定。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該目標範圍界 限值對DN1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is associated with a variable time length LF1A. For example, the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a reference time length LJ1T. The reference time length LJ1T is represented by a time length value CL1T. The first control signal SC11 transmits the target range limit value pair DN1T, the time length value CL1T and a control code CC1T, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET sufficient to match the The reference time length LJ1T matches an application time length LT1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The first control signal SC11 is transmitted by the target range boundary The limit value acts to DN1T to indicate the target range of this measurement value to RN1T.

該測量值應用範圍RM1L具有一應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DM1L被預設。該測量值候選範圍RM12具有一候選範圍界限值對DM1B。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DM1B被預設。該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L;以及響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B。 The measured value application range RM1L has an application range limit value pair DM1L. For example, the application range limit value is preset for DM1L. The measurement value candidate range RM12 has a candidate range limit value pair DM1B. For example, the candidate range limit value is preset for DM1B. The method MT10 further includes the following steps: responding to the trigger event EQ11, obtaining the application range limit value pair DM1L; and responding to the trigger event EQ11, obtaining the preset candidate range limit value pair DM1B.

在一些實施例中,產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟包含一子步驟:藉由比較該測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L,檢查該第一數學關係KA11。該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該第二可變物理參數QP1A分別屬於一第一物理參數類型TU11和一第二物理參數類型TP11。例如,該第一物理參數類型TU11相同或不同於該第二物理參數類型TP11。該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL被配置以對應於在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之外的一對應物理參數範圍RW1EL。 In some embodiments, the step of generating the first control signal SC11 includes a sub-step of checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 by comparing the measured value VM11 with the obtained pair of application range limit values DM1L. The first variable physical parameter QU1A and the second variable physical parameter QP1A belong to a first physical parameter type TU11 and a second physical parameter type TP11, respectively. For example, the first physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the second physical parameter type TP11. The physical parameter application range RC1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL outside the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該對應物理參數範圍RW1EL藉由檢查該第一數學關係KA11而被確定的條件下,執行該測量值VM11和所獲得的該參考範圍界限值對DM1B之間的一資料比較CA21;以及在該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2基於該資料比較CA21而被確定的條件下,產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的一第二控制訊號SC12,該第二控制訊 號SC12不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 The method MT10 further comprises the steps of: performing the measurement VM11 and the obtained measurement value VM11 under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located is determined by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 a data comparison CA21 between the reference range limit value pair DM1B; and under the condition that the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located is determined based on the data comparison CA21, generating A second control signal SC12 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A, the second control signal The signal SC12 is different from the first control signal SC11.

產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟進一步包含下列子步驟:在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL藉由檢查該第一數學關係KA11而被確定的條件下,獲得包含該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該時間長度值CL1T和該控制碼CC1T的一控制資料碼CK1T;以及基於該控制資料碼CK1T,執行用於產生該第一控制訊號SC11的一訊號產生控制GS11。該方法MT10進一步包含一步驟:在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL藉由檢查該第一數學關係KA11而被確定的條件下,執行一確保操作GT11。該確保操作GT11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數應用範圍碼UM1L被記錄。 The step of generating the first control signal SC11 further includes the following sub-steps: under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL is determined by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11, obtaining the target range limit value pair DN1T, the time The length value CL1T and a control data code CK1T of the control code CC1T; and a signal generation control GS11 for generating the first control signal SC11 is performed based on the control data code CK1T. The method MT10 further includes a step of performing a guarantee operation GT11 under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL is determined by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11. The ensuring operation GT11 is used to cause a physical parameter application range code UM1L representing the determined physical parameter application range RC1EL to be recorded.

在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該第二可變物理參數QP1A分別被形成於一第一實際位置LD11和不同於該第一實際位置LD11的一第二實際位置LC11。該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:提供一第一感測單元260,其中感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A的步驟藉由使用該第一感測單元260而被執行;以及執行與該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL相關的一觸發應用功能FB11。該觸發應用功能FB11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL相關的一觸發應用功能規格GBL1。 In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter QU1A and the second variable physical parameter QP1A are formed at a first actual position LD11 and a second actual position LC11 different from the first actual position LD11, respectively. The method MT10 further includes the steps of: providing a first sensing unit 260, wherein the step of sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A is performed by using the first sensing unit 260; and performing a step related to the physical parameter A trigger application function FB11 related to the application range RC1EL. The trigger application function FB11 is configured to conform to a trigger application function specification GBL1 related to the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

該第一感測單元260被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RM1L相關的一第一感測器規格FQ11。例如,該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示一第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11。該第一感測 器靈敏度YQ11相關於由該第一感測單元260所執行的一感測訊號產生HE11。該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步依靠一第二感測單元334而被控制。該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值目標範圍RN1T相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11不同於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11。 The first sensing unit 260 is configured to comply with a first sensor specification FQ11 related to the measured value application range RM1L. For example, the first sensor specification FQ11 includes a first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing a first sensor sensitivity YQ11. the first sense The sensor sensitivity YQ11 is related to a sensing signal generation HE11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 . The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further controlled by means of a second sensing unit 334 . The second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value target range RN1T. For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is different from the first sensor sensitivity YQ11.

該測量值VM11以一指定測量值格式HQ11而被獲得。例如,該指定測量值格式HQ11基於一指定位元數目UX11而被特徵化。該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於一額定物理參數範圍RC1E而被特徵化。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RC1E由一額定測量值範圍RC1N所代表,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…。 The measurement value VM11 is obtained in a specified measurement value format HQ11. For example, the specified measurement value format HQ11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UX11. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RC1E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E is represented by a nominal measurement value range RC1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . respectively represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, .

在一些實施例中,該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…包含該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。該觸發應用功能規格GBL1包含該第一感測器規格FQ11、用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RC1E的一額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、和用於表示該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET由一第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T所表示。 In some embodiments, the complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . include the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The trigger application function specification GBL1 includes the first sensor specification FQ11, a rated physical parameter range representation GB1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RC1E, and a physical parameter application range for representing the physical parameter application range RC1EL Indicates GB1L. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T.

該額定測量值範圍RC1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用 於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E的一第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設,具有一額定範圍界限值對DC1A,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…所分別代表的該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DC1A用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The nominal measured value range RC1N is based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the A first data encoding operation ZR11 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11, having a nominal range limit value pair DC1A, and including a plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11 , EH12, ... respectively represent the complex number of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, .... For example, the nominal range limit value is preset for DC1A with the specified measurement value format HQ11.

該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…包含該測量值應用範圍RM1L。該測量值應用範圍RM1L由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中的一測量值應用範圍碼EH1L所代表,並具有一應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。 The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . include the measurement value application range RM1L. The measurement value application range RM1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EH1L included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . and has an application range limit value pair DM1L. For example, the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . are all preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1.

該應用範圍界限值對DM1L包含一第一應用範圍界限值DM15和相對於該第一應用範圍界限值DM15的一第二應用範圍界限值DM16,並基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L的一第二資料編碼操作ZR12來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T的一第三資料編碼操作ZX13而被預設。 The application range limit value pair DM1L includes a first application range limit value DM15 and a second application range limit value DM16 relative to the first application range limit value DM15, and based on the physical parameter, the application range represents GB1L, the first application range limit value The sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and a second data encoding operation ZR12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GB1L are preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11. The measured value target range RN1T is predicted based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a third data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T Assume.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:提供一儲存空間SS11;以及在該儲存空間SS11 中儲存所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A和一可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A等於選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的一特定測量值範圍碼EH14。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further includes the following steps: providing a storage space SS11; and storing the storage space SS11 The preset rated range limit value pair DC1A and a variable physical parameter range code UM1A are stored in . When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the variable physical parameter range code UM1A is equal to a specific measurement value range code EH14 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . .

例如,該特定測量值範圍碼EH14指示基於基於一感測操作ZM11而被先前確定的一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4。該特定物理參數範圍RC1E4選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…。由該第一感測單元260所執行的該感測操作ZM11用於感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該特定測量值範圍碼EH14被指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。 For example, the specific measurement value range code EH14 indicates a specific physical parameter range RC1E4 based on a previously determined based on a sensing operation ZM11. The specific physical parameter range RC1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . The sensing operation ZM11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 is used to sense the second variable physical parameter QP1A. Before the triggering event EQ11 occurs, the specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存空間SS11獲得一操作參考資料碼XK11;以及藉由運行一資料確定程序NE1A來執行使用該操作參考資料碼XK11的一資料確定AE1A以確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍RM1L。 The method MT10 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, obtaining an operation reference data code XK11 from the storage space SS11 in response to the trigger event EQ11; and executing a data determination program NE1A by running a data determination program NE1A. Operate a datum of reference material code XK11 to determine AE1A to determine the measured value selected from the complex different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . Select the measured value application range RM1L.

在一些實施例中,該操作參考資料碼XK11相同於基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設的一可允許參考資料碼。該資料確定程序NE1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被建構。該資料確定AE1A是一第一資料確定操作AE11和一第二資料確定操作AE12的其中之一。在該操作參考資料碼XK11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間 SS11中的該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A而被獲得以相同於該特定測量值範圍碼EH14的條件下,是該第一資料確定操作AE11的該資料確定AE1A基於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EH14來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。例如,所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L相同或不同於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EH14。 In some embodiments, the operation reference data code XK11 is the same as a permissible reference data code preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The data determination program NE1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The data determination AE1A is one of a first data determination operation AE11 and a second data determination operation AE12. In the operation reference data code XK11 is stored in the storage space by accessing The variable physical parameter range code UM1A in SS11 is obtained under the same condition as the specific measurement value range code EH14, and the data determination AE1A of the first data determination operation AE11 is based on the obtained specific measurement value range Code EH14 is used to determine this measurement using range code EH1L. For example, the determined measured value application range code EH1L is the same as or different from the obtained specific measured value range code EH14.

在該操作參考資料碼XK11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A而被獲得以相同於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的條件下,是該第二資料確定操作AE12的該資料確定AE1A藉由執行使用該測量值VM11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的一第一科學計算MF11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。例如,該第一科學計算MF11基於一特定經驗公式XP11而被執行。該特定經驗公式XP11基於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…而被預先制定。 Under the condition that the operation reference data code XK11 is obtained by accessing the rated range limit value pair DC1A stored in the storage space SS11 to be the same as the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A, is the The data determination AE1A of the second data determination operation AE12 references range codes EH11, EH12 from the complex number of different measurements by performing a first scientific calculation MF11 for DC1A using the measurement value VM11 and the obtained nominal range limit value for DC1A , ... to select the range code EH1L for the measurement value to determine the range code EH1L for the measurement value. For example, the first scientific calculation MF11 is performed based on a specific empirical formula XP11. The specific empirical formula XP11 is pre-established based on the preset nominal range limit value pair DC1A and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . .

該方法MT10進一步包含一步驟:基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟包含下列子步驟:基於該測量值VM11和所獲得的該參考範圍界限值對DM1A之間的一資料比較CA11,檢查該第一數學關係KA11以做出該測量值VM11是否為於所選擇的該測量值應用範圍RM1L之內的一邏輯決定PH11;以及在該邏輯決定PH11是肯定的條件下,確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處 於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。 The method MT10 further includes a step of applying a range code EH1L based on the determined measurement value, and obtaining the application range limit value pair DM1L. The step of generating the first control signal SC11 includes the following sub-steps: checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 to make the measurement based on a data comparison CA11 between the measured value VM11 and the obtained reference range limit value pair DM1A a logical decision PH11 whether the value VM11 is within the selected measurement value application range RM1L; and if the logical decision PH11 is positive, determine the current position of the second variable physical parameter QP1A This physical parameter applies to the range RC1EL.

在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A存在於一控制目標裝置330中。該觸發事件EQ11是一觸發作用事件、一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件、一狀態改變事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並被應用到該觸發應用功能FB11。該測量值目標範圍RN1T由一測量值目標範圍碼EM1T所代表,並具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。例如,該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間具有一第二數學關係KY11。 In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330 . The trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event and an identification medium occurrence event, and is applied to the trigger application function FB11. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T and has a target range limit value pair DN1T. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. There is a second mathematical relationship KY11 between the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11要發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制目標裝置330來執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定功能操作ZH11,其中該指定功能操作ZH11用於導致該觸發作用事件發生;以及提供相關於該觸發應用功能FB11的一記憶體空間SA1。例如,該記憶體空間SA1具有一第一記憶體位置PM1L和不同於該第一記憶體位置PM1L的一第二記憶體位置PV1L。 The method MT10 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11, which is the trigger action event, is to occur, by using the control target device 330 to perform a specified function operation related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A ZH11, wherein the designated function operation ZH11 is used to cause the trigger action event to occur; and a memory space SA1 related to the trigger application function FB11 is provided. For example, the memory space SA1 has a first memory location PM1L and a second memory location PV1L different from the first memory location PM1L.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在該第一記憶體位置PM1L儲存該參考範圍界限值對DM1A;以及在該第二記憶體位置PV1L儲存一控制資料碼CK1T。例如,該第一記憶體位置PM1L和該第二記憶體位置PV1L皆基於所預設的該測量值參考範圍碼EH1L而被識別。該控制資料碼CK1T包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。 The method MT10 further includes the steps of: storing the reference range limit value pair DM1A in the first memory location PM1L; and storing a control data code CK1T in the second memory location PV1L. For example, the first memory location PM1L and the second memory location PV1L are both identified based on the preset measurement value reference range code EH1L. The control data code CK1T includes the measured value target range code EM1T.

在一些實施例中,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L的步驟包含一子步驟:藉由運行一資料獲取程序NF1A來執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第一資料獲取AF1A以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該資料獲取AF1A是一第一資料獲取操作AF11和一第二資料獲取操作AF12的其中之一。該資料獲取程序NF1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被建構。 In some embodiments, the step of obtaining the application range limit value pair DM1L includes a sub-step of executing a first data acquisition AF1A using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L by running a data acquisition program NF1A to Obtain this application range limit value for the DM1L. For example, the data acquisition AF1A is one of a first data acquisition operation AF11 and a second data acquisition operation AF12. The data acquisition program NF1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GBL1.

該第一資料獲取操作AF11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PM1L的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。該第二資料獲取操作AF12藉由讀取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A來取得該額定範圍界限值對DC1A,並藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所取得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的一第二科學計算MG11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 The first data acquisition operation AF11 uses the memory cell 25Y1 based on the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to access the application range limit value pair DM1L stored in the first memory location PM1L to obtain the application Range limit value for DM1L. The second data acquisition operation AF12 acquires the rated range limit value pair DC1A by reading the rated range limit value pair DC1A stored in the storage space SS11, and uses the determined measurement value application range by executing A second scientific calculation MG11 of the code EH1L and the obtained nominal range limit value pair DC1A to obtain the application range limit value pair DM1L.

在一些實施例中,產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟進一步包含一子步驟:在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL被確定的條件下,執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第二資料獲取AG1A以獲得一控制應用碼UA1T。例如,該第二資料獲取AG1A是一第三資料獲取操作AG11和一第四資料獲取操作AG12的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the step of generating the first control signal SC11 further includes a sub-step of: under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL is determined, executing a second application range code EH1L using the determined measurement value application range code Data acquisition AG1A acquires a control application code UA1T. For example, the second data acquisition AG1A is one of a third data acquisition operation AG11 and a fourth data acquisition operation AG12.

該第三資料獲取操作AG11基於所確定的該測量值參考範圍碼EH1L來存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PV1L的該控制資料碼CK1T以獲得等於該控制資料碼 CK1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。該第四資料獲取操作AG12藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和該第二數學關係KY11的一第三科學計算MQ11來獲得等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。 The third data acquisition operation AG11 accesses the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PV1L based on the determined measured value reference range code EH1L to obtain an equal to the control data code This control application code of CK1T is UA1T. The fourth data acquisition operation AG12 obtains a value equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by performing a third scientific calculation MQ11 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the second mathematical relationship KY11 The control application code UA1T.

產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟進一步包含下列子步驟:基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T,在一操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一訊號產生控制GS11;以及響應該訊號產生控制GS11,執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。 The step of generating the first control signal SC11 further includes the following sub-steps: based on the obtained control application code UA1T, executing a signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 within an operation time TD11; and responding to the The signal generation control GS11 performs a first signal generation operation BS11 for the trigger application function FB11 to generate the first control signal SC11. For example, the first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target range of measurement values RN1T by sending the target range code of measurement values EM1T, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the target range of physical parameters RD1ET Inside.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在該特定測量值範圍碼EH14不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L且該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL藉由做出該邏輯決定PH11而被確定的條件下,基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EH14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A和所確定的該測量值參考範圍碼EH1L之間的一碼差異DA11來將所確定的該測量值參考範圍碼EH1L指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A;以及在該觸發事件EQ11是該第二可變物理參數QP1A從該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4進入該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的該狀態改變事件的條件下,基於該碼差異DA11來確定是該狀態改變事件的該觸發事件EQ11。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further comprises the steps of: by making the logical decision PH11 where the specific measurement range code EH14 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the physical parameter application range RC1EL Under the determined condition, the determined measurement value is determined based on a code difference DA11 between the variable physical parameter range code UM1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EH14 and the determined measurement value reference range code EH1L. The reference range code EH1L is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A; and the trigger event EQ11 is the state change of the second variable physical parameter QP1A from the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 into the physical parameter application range RC1EL Under the condition of the event, the trigger event EQ11 which is the state change event is determined based on the code difference DA11.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,顯示一第一狀態指示LA11,其中該第一狀態指示LA11用於指示該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置於該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4之內的一第一特定狀態XH11;以及在該特定測量值範圍碼EH14不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L且該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PH11而被確定的條件下,基於該碼差異DA11來將該第一狀態指示LA11改變成一第二狀態指示LA12。例如,該第二狀態指示LA12用於指示該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內的一第二特定狀態XH12。 The method MT10 further includes the following steps: when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, displaying a first state indication LA11, wherein the first state indication LA11 is used to indicate that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is configured in the first specific physical a first specific state XH11 within parameter range RC1E4; and where the specific measurement range code EH14 differs from the determined measurement application range code EH1L and the physical parameter application range RC1EL is determined by making the first logic Under the condition that the PH11 is determined, the first state indication LA11 is changed to a second state indication LA12 based on the code difference DA11. For example, the second state indication LA12 is used to indicate that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is configured in a second specific state XH12 within the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

請參閱第1圖、第2圖、第3圖、第4圖、第5圖、第6圖和第7圖。一種用於藉由產生一第一控制訊號SC11而控制一第一可變物理參數QU1A的方法MT12被揭露。該第一可變物理參數QU1A基於由一測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的一物理參數目標範圍RD1ET而被特徵化。該方法MT12包含下列步驟:該控制裝置210提供一第二可變物理參數QP1A,其中該第二可變物理參數QP1A基於由一測量值應用範圍RM1L所代表的一物理參數應用範圍RC1EL而被特徵化;以及該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生一第一感測訊號SM11。 See Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7. A method MT12 for controlling a first variable physical parameter QU1A by generating a first control signal SC11 is disclosed. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by a measurement value target range RN1T. The method MT12 includes the following steps: the control device 210 provides a second variable physical parameter QP1A, wherein the second variable physical parameter QP1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RC1EL represented by a measured value application range RM1L and the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate a first sensing signal SM11.

該方法MT12包含進一步下列步驟:在一觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一感測訊號SM11來獲得一第一測量值VM11;以及該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍 RM1L之間的一第一數學關係KA11,確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A和該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之間的一物理參數關係KB11以做出起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用的該第一控制訊號SC11是否要被產生的一合理決定PA11。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: when a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains a first measurement value VM11 in response to the first sensing signal SM11; and the processing unit 230 checks the first measurement value by checking the first measurement value VM11. Measured value VM11 and the range of application of this measured value A first mathematical relationship KA11 between RM1L, determining a physical parameter relationship KB11 between the second variable physical parameter QP1A and the physical parameter application range RC1EL to make a function of indicating the measurement value target range RN1T A reasonable decision PA11 is whether the first control signal SC11 is to be generated.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:提供一第一感測單元260。例如,感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A的步驟藉由使用該第一感測單元260而被執行。該第一感測單元260被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RM1L相關的一第一感測器規格FQ11。例如,該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示一第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11。該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11相關於由該第一感測單元260所執行的一感測訊號產生HE11。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes a step of providing a first sensing unit 260 . For example, the step of sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A is performed by using the first sensing unit 260 . The first sensing unit 260 is configured to comply with a first sensor specification FQ11 related to the measured value application range RM1L. For example, the first sensor specification FQ11 includes a first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing a first sensor sensitivity YQ11. The first sensor sensitivity YQ11 is related to a sensing signal generation HE11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 .

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步依靠一第二感測單元334而被控制。該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值目標範圍RN1T相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11不同於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11。該第一測量值VM11以一指定測量值格式HQ11而被該處理單元230獲得。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further controlled by means of a second sensing unit 334 . The second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value target range RN1T. For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is different from the first sensor sensitivity YQ11. The first measurement value VM11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 in a specified measurement value format HQ11.

該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於不同於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數候選範圍RC1E2而被特徵化。該測量值應用範圍RM1L和代表該物 理參數候選範圍RC1E2的一測量值候選範圍RM12皆基於該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11而被預設,並具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。 The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RC1EL. This measurement applies to the range RM1L and represents the A measurement value candidate range RM12 of the rational parameter candidate range RC1E2 is all preset in the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11. The measurement value target range RN1T is preset based on the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and has a target range limit value pair DN1T.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關於一可變時間長度LF1A。例如,該可變時間長度LF1A基於一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該參考時間長度LJ1T由一時間長度值CL1T所代表。該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該時間長度值CL1T和一控制碼CC1T,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內足有與該參考時間長度LJ1T匹配的一應用時間長度LT1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T而被預先設定。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is associated with a variable time length LF1A. For example, the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a reference time length LJ1T. The reference time length LJ1T is represented by a time length value CL1T. The first control signal SC11 transmits the target range limit value pair DN1T, the time length value CL1T and a control code CC1T, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET sufficient to match the The reference time length LJ1T matches an application time length LT1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target range RN1T of the measurement value by sending the target range limit value pair DN1T.

該測量值應用範圍RM1L具有一應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,其中該應用範圍界限值對DM1L被預設。該測量值候選範圍RM12具有一候選範圍界限值對DM1B。例如,其中該候選範圍界限值對DM1B被預設。該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L;以及該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B。 The measured value application range RM1L has an application range limit value pair DM1L. For example, where the application range limit value is preset for DM1L. The measurement value candidate range RM12 has a candidate range limit value pair DM1B. For example, where the candidate range limit value pair DM1B is preset. The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains the application range limit value pair DM1L in response to the trigger event EQ11; and the processing unit 230 obtains the preset candidate range limit value pair DM1B in response to the trigger event EQ11 .

在一些實施例中,確定該物理參數關係 KB11的步驟包含一子步驟:該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L之間的一資料比較CA11,檢查該第一數學關係KA11。該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該第二可變物理參數QP1A分別屬於一第一物理參數類型TU11和一第二物理參數類型TP11。例如,該第一物理參數類型TU11相同或不同於該第二物理參數類型TP11。該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL被配置以對應於在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之外的一對應物理參數範圍RW1EL。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter relationship is determined The step of KB11 includes a sub-step: the processing unit 230 checks the first mathematical relationship KA11 based on a data comparison CA11 between the first measured value VM11 and the obtained pair of application range limit values DM1L. The first variable physical parameter QU1A and the second variable physical parameter QP1A belong to a first physical parameter type TU11 and a second physical parameter type TP11, respectively. For example, the first physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the second physical parameter type TP11. The physical parameter application range RC1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL outside the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該對應物理參數範圍RW1EL藉由檢查該第一數學關係KA11而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230執行該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該參考範圍界限值對DM1B之間的一資料比較CA21;以及在該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2基於該資料比較CA21而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的一第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 The method MT12 further comprises the following steps: under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located is determined by the processing unit 230 by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11, the processing unit 230 performing a data comparison CA21 between the first measurement value VM11 and the obtained reference range limit value pair DM1B; and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located based on the data comparison CA21 Under the condition determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate a second control signal SC12 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A. The second control signal SC12 is different from the first control signal SC11.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該合理決定PA11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230獲得包含該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該時間長度值CL1T和該控制碼CC1T的一控制資料碼CK1T;該處理單元230基於該控制資料碼CK1T,執行用於產生該第一控制訊號SC11的一訊 號產生控制GS11;以及在該物理參數關係KB11基於該資料比較CA11而被該處理單元230辨識為一物理參數交集關係以確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230執行一確保操作GT11。該確保操作GT11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數應用範圍碼UM1L被該儲存單元250記錄。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the rational decision PA11 is positive, the processing unit 230 obtains a control data code CK1T including the target range limit value pair DN1T, the time length value CL1T and the control code CC1T; The processing unit 230 executes a signal for generating the first control signal SC11 based on the control data code CK1T and the physical parameter relationship KB11 is identified by the processing unit 230 as a physical parameter intersection relationship based on the data comparison CA11 to determine the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located. condition, the processing unit 230 performs a guarantee operation GT11. The ensuring operation GT11 is used to cause a physical parameter application range code UM1L representing the determined physical parameter application range RC1EL to be recorded by the storage unit 250 .

在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該第二可變物理參數QP1A分別被形成於一第一實際位置LD11和不同於該第一實際位置LD11的一第二實際位置LC11。該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該控制裝置210提供一第一感測單元260,其中感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A的步驟藉由使用該第一感測單元260而被執行;以及該操作單元297執行與該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL相關的一觸發應用功能FB11。該觸發應用功能FB11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL相關的一觸發應用功能規格GBL1。 In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter QU1A and the second variable physical parameter QP1A are formed at a first actual position LD11 and a second actual position LC11 different from the first actual position LD11, respectively. The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the control device 210 provides a first sensing unit 260, wherein the step of sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A is performed by using the first sensing unit 260; and the The operation unit 297 executes a trigger application function FB11 related to the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The trigger application function FB11 is configured to conform to a trigger application function specification GBL1 related to the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

該第一感測單元260被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RM1L相關的一第一感測器規格FQ11。例如,該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示一第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11。該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11相關於由該第一感測單元260所執行的一感測訊號產生HE11。例如,當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以執行相依於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的該感測訊號產生 HE11,該感測訊號產生HE11用於產生該第一感測訊號SM11。 The first sensing unit 260 is configured to comply with a first sensor specification FQ11 related to the measured value application range RM1L. For example, the first sensor specification FQ11 includes a first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing a first sensor sensitivity YQ11. The first sensor sensitivity YQ11 is related to a sensing signal generation HE11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 . For example, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to perform the sensing signal generation depending on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11 HE11, the sensing signal generating HE11 is used for generating the first sensing signal SM11.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步依靠一第二感測單元334而被控制。該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值目標範圍RN1T相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11不同於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further controlled by means of a second sensing unit 334 . The second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value target range RN1T. For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is different from the first sensor sensitivity YQ11.

在一些實施例中,該第一測量值VM11以一指定測量值格式HQ11而被該處理單元230獲得。例如,該指定測量值格式HQ11基於一指定位元數目UX11而被特徵化。該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於一額定物理參數範圍RC1E而被特徵化。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RC1E由一額定測量值範圍RC1N所代表。包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…。 In some embodiments, the first measurement value VM11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 in a specified measurement value format HQ11. For example, the specified measurement value format HQ11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UX11. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RC1E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E is represented by a nominal measurement value range RC1N. Including the complex number of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, … represented by the complex number of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, … respectively.

該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…包含該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。該觸發應用功能規格GBL1包含該第一感測器規格FQ11、用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RC1E的一額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、和用於表示該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET由一第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T所表示。例如,該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T被預設。 The complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, ... include the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The trigger application function specification GBL1 includes the first sensor specification FQ11, a rated physical parameter range representation GB1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RC1E, and a physical parameter application range for representing the physical parameter application range RC1EL Indicates GB1L. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T. For example, the first physical parameter candidate range indicates that GA1T is preset.

該額定測量值範圍RC1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E的一第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設,具有一額定範圍界限值對DC1A,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…所分別代表的該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DC1A用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The nominal measured value range RC1N is based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and a first data encoding operation ZR11 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E to use the specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset to have a rated range limit value pair DC1A, and includes the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . For example, the nominal range limit value is preset for DC1A with the specified measurement value format HQ11.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…包含該測量值應用範圍RM1L。該測量值應用範圍RM1L由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中的一測量值應用範圍碼EH1L所代表,並具有一應用範圍界限值對DM1L;藉此該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L被配置以指示該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。 In some embodiments, the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . comprise the measurement value application range RM1L. The measurement value application range RM1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EH1L included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . and has an application range limit value pair DM1L; whereby the measurement value applies The range code EH1L is configured to indicate the physical parameter application range RC1EL. For example, the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . are all preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1.

該應用範圍界限值對DM1L包含該測量值應用範圍RM1L的一第一應用範圍界限值DM15和相對於該第一應用範圍界限值DM15的一第二應用範圍界限值DM16,並基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L的一第二資料編碼操作ZR12來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The application range limit value pair DM1L includes a first application range limit value DM15 of the measurement value application range RM1L and a second application range limit value DM16 relative to the first application range limit value DM15, and is applied based on the physical parameter The range representation GB1L, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and a second data encoding operation ZR12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GB1L to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11.

該測量值應用範圍RM1L基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該 第二資料編碼操作ZR12來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T的一第三資料編碼操作ZX13而被預設。 The measured value application range RM1L is based on the physical parameter application range representation GB1L, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the The second data encoding operation ZR12 is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11. The measured value target range RN1T is predicted based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a third data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T Assume.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該儲存單元250提供一儲存空間SS11;以及該儲存單元250在該儲存空間SS11中儲存所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A和一可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A等於選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的一第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the storage unit 250 provides a storage space SS11; and the storage unit 250 stores the preset pair of the rated range limit value DC1A and a possible value in the storage space SS11 Variable physical parameter range code UM1A. When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the variable physical parameter range code UM1A is equal to a first specific measurement value range code EH14 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . .

例如,該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14指示基於基於一感測操作ZM11而被該處理單元230先前確定的一第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4。該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…。由該第一感測單元260所執行的該感測操作ZM11用於感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14被指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。 For example, the first specific measurement value range code EH14 indicates a first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 230 based on a sensing operation ZM11. The first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . The sensing operation ZM11 performed by the first sensing unit 260 is used to sense the second variable physical parameter QP1A. Before the triggering event EQ11 occurs, the first specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A.

例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230獲得該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14。在該處理單元230於該觸發事件EQ11發生之前基於該感測操作ZM11而確定該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該 第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14代表被配置以代表該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4的一特定測量值範圍。該特定測量值範圍基於該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。例如,該第一感測單元260藉由執行該感測操作ZM11來執行相依於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一感測訊號產生以產生一感測訊號。 For example, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the first specific measurement value range code EH14. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 based on the sensing operation ZM11 before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the obtained A first specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to this variable physical parameter range code UM1A. The first specific measurement value range code EH14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4. The specific measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11. For example, the first sensing unit 260 performs a sensing signal generation depending on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11 by performing the sensing operation ZM11 to generate a sensing signal.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230接收該感測訊號,響應該感測訊號來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得一特定測量值,並執行用於檢查該特定測量值和該特定測量值範圍之間的一數學關係的一特定檢查操作。在該處理單元230基於該特定檢查操作而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A處於的該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。該處理單元230響應用於感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A的一特定感測操作來決定該處理單元230是否要使用該儲存單元250以改變該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。例如,該特定感測操作由該第一感測單元260所執行。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal, obtains a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HQ11 in response to the sensing signal, and executes a method for checking the specific measurement value and the specific measurement A specific check operation for a mathematical relationship between ranges of values. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is located based on the specific checking operation, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the obtained The first specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A. The processing unit 230 determines whether the processing unit 230 is to use the storage unit 250 to change the variable physical parameter range code UM1A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the first sensing unit 260 .

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存空間SS11獲得一操作參考資料碼XK11;以及該處理單元230藉由運行一資料確定程序NE1A來執行使用該操作參考資料碼XK11的一資 料確定AE1A以確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍RM1L。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains an operation reference data code XK11 from the storage space SS11 in response to the trigger event EQ11; and the processing Unit 230 executes a data using the operation reference data code XK11 by running a data determination program NE1A. The material determines AE1A to determine the measured value application range code EH1L selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EH11, EH12, ... to select the measured value application range RM1L from the complex number of different measured value reference ranges RM11, RM12, ... .

該操作參考資料碼XK11相同於基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設的一可允許參考資料碼。該資料確定程序NE1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被建構。該資料確定AE1A是一第一資料確定操作AE11和一第二資料確定操作AE12的其中之一。在該操作參考資料碼XK11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A而被該處理單元230獲得以相同於該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14的條件下,是該第一資料確定操作AE11的該資料確定AE1A基於所獲得的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。例如,所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L相同或不同於所獲得的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14。 The operation reference data code XK11 is the same as a permissible reference data code preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The data determination program NE1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The data determination AE1A is one of a first data determination operation AE11 and a second data determination operation AE12. Under the condition that the operation reference data code XK11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UM1A stored in the storage space SS11 to be the same as the first specific measurement value range code EH14 , is that the data determination AE1A of the first data determination operation AE11 determines the measurement value application range code EH1L based on the obtained first specific measurement value range code EH14 . For example, the determined measured value application range code EH1L is the same as or different from the obtained first specific measured value range code EH14.

在該操作參考資料碼XK11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A而被該處理單元230獲得以相同於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的條件下,是該第二資料確定操作AE12的該資料確定AE1A藉由執行使用該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的一第一科學計算MF11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。例如,該第一科學計算MF11基於一特定經驗公式XP11而被 執行。該特定經驗公式XP11基於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…而被預先制定。例如,該特定經驗公式XP11基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預先制定。 In the operation reference data code XK11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 by accessing the rated range limit value pair DC1A stored in the storage space SS11 under the same conditions as the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A Next, is the data determination AE1A of the second data determination operation AE12 to differentiate the measurement value from the complex number by performing a first scientific calculation MF11 for DC1A using the first measurement value VM11 and the obtained nominal range limit value for DC1A The measurement value application range code EH1L is selected from the reference range codes EH11, EH12, ... to determine the measurement value application range code EH1L. For example, the first scientific calculation MF11 is calculated based on a specific empirical formula XP11 implement. The specific empirical formula XP11 is pre-established based on the preset nominal range limit value pair DC1A and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . For example, the specific empirical formula XP11 is formulated in advance based on the trigger application function specification GBL1.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。確定該物理參數關係KB11的步驟包含下列子步驟:該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L之間的一第一資料比較CA11,檢查該第一數學關係KA11以做出該第一測量值VM11是否為於所選擇的該測量值應用範圍RM1L之內的一第一邏輯決定PH11;以及在該第一邏輯決定PH11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230藉由辨識該物理參數關係KB11為一物理參數交集關係來做出該合理決定PA11以成為肯定的。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes a step: the processing unit 230 applies a range code EH1L based on the determined measurement value to obtain the applied range limit value pair DM1L. The step of determining the physical parameter relationship KB11 includes the following sub-steps: the processing unit 230 checks the first mathematical comparison CA11 based on a first data comparison CA11 between the first measured value VM11 and the obtained pair of application range limit values DM1L Relation KA11 to make a first logic decision PH11 whether the first measurement value VM11 is within the selected measurement value application range RM1L; and under the condition that the first logic decision PH11 is positive, the processing unit 230 The rational decision PA11 is made positive by identifying the physical parameter relationship KB11 as a physical parameter intersection relationship.

例如,在該第一應用範圍界限值DM15不同於該第二應用範圍界限值DM16且該第一測量值VM11是於該第一應用範圍界限值DM15和該第二應用範圍界限值DM16之間的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PH11以成為肯定的。在該第一應用範圍界限值DM15、該第二應用範圍界限值DM16和該第一測量值VM11是相等的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PH11以成為肯定的。 For example, when the first application range limit value DM15 is different from the second application range limit value DM16 and the first measurement value VM11 is between the first application range limit value DM15 and the second application range limit value DM16 condition, the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PH11 to be positive by comparing the first measured value VM11 with the obtained pair of the application range limit value DM1L. Under the condition that the first application range limit value DM15, the second application range limit value DM16 and the first measurement value VM11 are equal, the processing unit 230 obtains the application by comparing the first measurement value VM11 with the first measurement value VM11. The range limit value makes the first logical decision PH11 positive for DM1L.

在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A存在於一控制目標裝置330中。該觸發事件EQ11是一觸發作用事件、一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件、一狀態改變事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並被應用到該觸發應用功能FB11。該測量值目標範圍RN1T由一測量值目標範圍碼EM1T所代表,並具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T;藉此該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間具有一第二數學關係KY11。 In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330 . The trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event and an identification medium occurrence event, and is applied to the trigger application function FB11. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T and has a target range limit value pair DN1T; whereby the measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. There is a second mathematical relationship KY11 between the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11要發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制目標裝置330來執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定功能操作ZH11,其中該指定功能操作ZH11用於導致該觸發作用事件發生;該操作單元297提供用於執行該觸發應用功能FB11的一響應區域AC1;以及該記憶體單元25Y1提供相關於該觸發應用功能FB11的一記憶體空間SA1。例如,該記憶體空間SA1具有一第一記憶體位置PM1L和不同於該第一記憶體位置PM1L的一第二記憶體位置PV1L。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11, which is the trigger action event, is to occur, by using the control target device 330 to perform a specified function operation related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A ZH11, wherein the designated function operation ZH11 is used to cause the trigger action event to occur; the operation unit 297 provides a response area AC1 for executing the trigger application function FB11; and the memory unit 25Y1 provides information related to the trigger application function FB11 of a memory space SA1. For example, the memory space SA1 has a first memory location PM1L and a second memory location PV1L different from the first memory location PM1L.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該記憶體單元25Y1在該第一記憶體位置PM1L儲存該應用範圍界限值對DM1L;以及該記憶體單元25Y1在該第二記憶體位置PV1L儲存一控制資料碼CK1T。例如,該第一記憶體位 置PM1L和該第二記憶體位置PV1L皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被識別。該控制資料碼CK1T包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和該控制資料碼CK1T皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被儲存。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the memory unit 25Y1 stores the application range limit value pair DM1L at the first memory location PM1L; and the memory unit 25Y1 stores a control data code CK1T at the second memory location PV1L . For example, the first memory bit Both the set PM1L and the second memory location PV1L are identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L. The control data code CK1T includes the measured value target range code EM1T. For example, the application range limit value pair DM1L and the control data code CK1T are both stored based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L.

在一些實施例中,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L的步驟包含一子步驟:該處理單元230藉由運行一資料獲取程序NF1A來執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第一資料獲取AF1A以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該資料獲取AF1A是一第一資料獲取操作AF11和一第二資料獲取操作AF12的其中之一。該資料獲取程序NF1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被建構。該第一資料獲取操作AF11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PM1L的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 In some embodiments, the step of obtaining the application range limit value pair DM1L includes a sub-step: the processing unit 230 executes a first application range code EH1L using the determined measurement value by running a data acquisition program NF1A Data acquisition AF1A to obtain this application range limit value pair DM1L. For example, the data acquisition AF1A is one of a first data acquisition operation AF11 and a second data acquisition operation AF12. The data acquisition program NF1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The first data acquisition operation AF11 uses the memory cell 25Y1 based on the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to access the application range limit value pair DM1L stored in the first memory location PM1L to obtain the application Range limit value for DM1L.

該第二資料獲取操作AF12藉由讀取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A來取得該額定範圍界限值對DC1A,並藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所取得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的一第二科學計算MG11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DC1A包含該額定測量值範圍RC1N的一額定範圍界限值DC11和相對於該額定範圍界限值DC11的一額定範圍界限值DC12,並基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11 和該第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The second data acquisition operation AF12 acquires the rated range limit value pair DC1A by reading the rated range limit value pair DC1A stored in the storage space SS11, and uses the determined measurement value application range by executing A second scientific calculation MG11 of the code EH1L and the obtained nominal range limit value pair DC1A to obtain the application range limit value pair DM1L. For example, the rated range limit value pair DC1A includes a rated range limit value DC11 of the rated measurement value range RC1N and a rated range limit value DC12 relative to the rated range limit value DC11, and based on the rated physical parameter range, GB1E, The first sensor sensitivity indicates GQ11 and the first data encoding operation ZR11 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:在該合理決定PA11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第二資料獲取AG1A以獲得一控制應用碼UA1T。例如,該第二資料獲取AG1A是一第三資料獲取操作AG11和一第四資料獲取操作AG12的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the step of: under the condition that the reasonable determination PA11 is positive, the processing unit 230 executes a second data acquisition AG1A using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to obtain A control application code UA1T. For example, the second data acquisition AG1A is one of a third data acquisition operation AG11 and a fourth data acquisition operation AG12.

該第三資料獲取操作AG11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PV1L的該控制資料碼CK1T以獲得等於該控制資料碼CK1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。該第四資料獲取操作AG12藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和該第二數學關係KY11的一第三科學計算MQ11來獲得等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。 The third data acquisition operation AG11 applies range code EH1L based on the determined measurement value to access the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PV1L to obtain the control application code equal to the control data code CK1T UA1T. The fourth data acquisition operation AG12 obtains a value equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by performing a third scientific calculation MQ11 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the second mathematical relationship KY11 The control application code UA1T.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T,在一操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240;以及該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11,執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: based on the obtained control application code UA1T, the processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 within an operation time TD11 to control the output unit 240; And the output unit 240 responds to the signal generation control GS11 to execute a first signal generation operation BS11 for the trigger application function FB11 to generate the first control signal SC11. For example, the first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target range of measurement values RN1T by sending the target range code of measurement values EM1T, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the target range of physical parameters RD1ET Inside.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…進一步包含不同於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的一物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…具有一總參考範圍數目NS11,並進一步包含代表該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的一測量值候選範圍RM12。該觸發應用功能規格GBL1進一步包含用於表示該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的一第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12。 In some embodiments, the complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . further include a physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . have a total reference range number NS11, and further include a measurement value candidate range RM12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2. The trigger application function specification GBL1 further includes a second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2.

該測量值候選範圍RM12由不同於該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一測量值候選範圍碼EH12所代表,具有一候選範圍界限值對DM1B,並被配置以代表該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2;藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EH12被配置以指示該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DM1B基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12的一第四資料編碼操作ZR13來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The measurement candidate range RM12 is represented by a measurement candidate range code EH12 different from the measurement application range code EH1L, has a candidate range limit value pair DM1B, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2; thereby The measured value candidate range code EH12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2. For example, the candidate range limit value pair DM1B is based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11, and a fourth data encoding operation ZR13 for converting the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11.

該測量值候選範圍RM12基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第四資料編碼操作ZR13來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該總參考範圍數目NS11基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得該總參考範圍數目NS11。該第一科學計算MF11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NS11。該第二科學計算MG11進一步使用所獲 得的該總參考範圍數目NS11。例如,該總參考範圍數目NS11大於或等於2。例如,該總參考範圍數目NS11≧3;該總參考範圍數目NS11≧4;該總參考範圍數目NS11≧5;該總參考範圍數目NS11≧6;且該總參考範圍數目NS11≦255。 The measurement value candidate range RM12 is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12, the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZR13. The total reference range number NS11 is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The method MT12 further includes a step: the processing unit 230 obtains the total reference range number NS11 in response to the trigger event EQ11. The first scientific calculation MF11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NS11. The second scientific computing MG11 further uses the obtained The total reference range number NS11 is obtained. For example, the total reference range number NS11 is greater than or equal to two. For example, the total reference range number NS11≧3; the total reference range number NS11≧4; the total reference range number NS11≧5; the total reference range number NS11≧6; and the total reference range number NS11≦255.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:藉由使用該控制目標裝置330,接收該第一控制訊號SC11;藉由使用該控制目標裝置330,從所接收的該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T;以及藉由使用該控制目標裝置330,基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送基於該控制應用碼UA1T而被確定的一控制訊息CG11。該控制訊息CG11包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。例如,該控制訊息CG11包含該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和該控制碼CC1T。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: by using the control target device 330, receiving the first control signal SC11; by using the control target device 330, obtaining the measurement value target range from the received first control signal SC11 and causing the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET by using the control target device 330 based on the obtained measurement target range code EM1T. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys a control message CG11 determined based on the control application code UA1T. The control message CG11 includes the measurement value target range code EM1T. For example, the control message CG11 includes the target range limit value pair DN1T and the control code CC1T.

該測量值應用範圍RM1L是該額定測量值範圍RC1N的一第一部分。該測量值候選範圍RM12是該額定測量值範圍RC1N的一第二部分。該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是分開的或相鄰的。在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是分開的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RM1L和該測量值候選範圍RM12是分開的。在該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是相鄰的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RM1L和該測量值候選範圍RM12是相鄰的。 The measured value application range RM1L is a first part of the nominal measured value range RC1N. The measurement value candidate range RM12 is a second part of the nominal measurement value range RC1N. The physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are separate or adjacent. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are separated, the measurement value application range RM1L and the measurement value candidate range RM12 are separated. On the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are adjacent, the measurement value application range RM1L and the measurement value candidate range RM12 are adjacent.

例如,該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L被配置以等於一整數。該額定範圍界限值DC12大於該額定範圍界限值DC11。該額定範圍界限值DC12和該額定範圍界限值DC11之間具有相對於該額定範圍界限值DC11的一相對值VC11。該相對值VC11等於該額定範圍界限值DC12減去該額定範圍界限值DC11的一計算結果。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DM1L基於該額定範圍界限值DC11、該額定範圍界限值DC12、該整數、和該相對值VC11對於該總參考範圍數目NS11的一比率而被預設。該第二科學計算MG11使用該額定範圍界限值DC11、該額定範圍界限值DC12、該整數、該比率和其任意組合的其中之一。 For example, the measured value is configured to be equal to an integer using the range code EH1L. The rated range limit value DC12 is greater than the rated range limit value DC11. There is a relative value VC11 between the rated range limit value DC12 and the rated range limit value DC11 with respect to the rated range limit value DC11. The relative value VC11 is equal to a calculation result of the rated range limit value DC12 minus the rated range limit value DC11. For example, the application range limit value pair DM1L is preset based on the nominal range limit value DC11, the nominal range limit value DC12, the integer, and a ratio of the relative value VC11 to the total reference range number NS11. The second scientific calculation MG11 uses one of the rated range limit value DC11, the rated range limit value DC12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該第一邏輯決定PH11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第四科學計算MF12來確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…中選擇該測量值候選範圍RM12;以及該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12,獲得該候選範圍界限值對DM1B。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the step of: under the condition that the first logic decision PH11 is negative, the processing unit 230 applies a fourth science using the determined measurement value to the range code EH1L calculating MF12 to determine the measurement value candidate range code EH12 selected from the complex number of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . to select the measurement value candidate range RM12 from the complex number of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . And the processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DM1B based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EH12.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B之間的一第二資料比較CA21,檢查該第一測量值VM11和所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RM12之間的一第三數學關係KA21以做出該第一測量值VM11是否為於 所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RM12之內的一第二邏輯決定PH21;在該第二邏輯決定PH21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2;以及在該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一第二訊號產生操作BS21以產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的一第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 The method MT12 further comprises the following steps: the processing unit 230 checks the first measured value VM11 and the selected value based on a second data comparison CA21 between the first measured value VM11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DM1B a third mathematical relationship KA21 between the measurement value candidate ranges RM12 to determine whether the first measurement value VM11 is at A second logic decision within the selected measurement value candidate range RM12 determines PH21; under the condition that the second logic decision PH21 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical location in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located parameter candidate range RC1E2; and under the condition that the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located is determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to execute the function for the trigger application A second signal generating operation BS21 of FB11 is used to generate a second control signal SC12 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A. The second control signal SC12 is different from the first control signal SC11.

該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:在該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L且該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PH11而被確定的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L之間的一碼差異DA11來使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。 The method MT12 further comprises the step of: in the first specific measurement value range code EH14 different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the second variable physical parameter QP1A currently in the physical parameter application range RC1EL by Conditioned by making the first logical decision PH11, the processing unit 230 applies the range code EH1L based on the variable physical parameter range code UM1A equal to the first specific measurement value range code EH14 and the determined measurement value A code difference between DA11 is used to use the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measured value application range code EH1L to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A.

該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11是該第二可變物理參數QP1A從該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4進入該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的該狀態改變事件的條件下,該處理單元230基於該碼差異DA11來確定是該狀態改變事件的該觸發事件EQ11。獲得該第一測量值VM11的步驟包含一子步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11 是該識別媒介出現事件且出現於該響應區域AC1的一識別媒介310被該處理單元230辨識了的條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SM11來獲得該第一測量值VM11。 The method MT12 further includes a step: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is the state change event of the second variable physical parameter QP1A from the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 to the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 determines the trigger event EQ11 which is the state change event based on the code difference DA11. The step of obtaining the first measurement value VM11 includes a sub-step: at the trigger event EQ11 When the identification medium appears event and an identification medium 310 in the response area AC1 is identified by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11 based on the first sensing signal SM11.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該輸出單元240顯示一第一狀態指示LA11,其中該第一狀態指示LA11用於指示該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置於該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4之內的一第一特定狀態XH11;以及在該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L且該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PH11而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230基於該碼差異DA11來將該第一狀態指示LA11改變成一第二狀態指示LA12。例如,該第二狀態指示LA12用於指示該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內的一第二特定狀態XH12。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the output unit 240 displays a first state indication LA11, wherein the first state indication LA11 is used to indicate the second variable physical The parameter QP1A is configured in a first specific state XH11 within the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4; and the first specific measured value range code EH14 is different from the determined measured value application range code EH1L and the second The physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in is determined by the processing unit 230 by making the first logical decision PH11, and the processing unit 230 sets the first state based on the code difference DA11 The indication LA11 changes to a second state indication LA12. For example, the second state indication LA12 is used to indicate that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is configured in a second specific state XH12 within the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在響應該第一控制訊號SC11而被該控制目標裝置330產生的一控制回應訊號SE11於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TW11之內從該控制目標裝置330而被該輸入單元270接收的條件下,該處理單元230響應該控制回應訊號SE11來執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定實際操作BJ11;在該操作時間TD11之後,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生一第二感測訊號SM12;以及於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TE12之內,該 處理單元230響應該第二感測訊號SM12來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得一第二測量值VM12。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: a control response signal SE11 generated by the control target device 330 in response to the first control signal SC11 from the control target device 330 within a specified time TW11 after the operation time TD11 Under the condition received by the input unit 270, the processing unit 230 responds to the control response signal SE11 to execute a specified actual operation BJ11 related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A; after the operation time TD11, the first sensor The measuring unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate a second sensing signal SM12; and within a specified time TE12 after the operation time TD11, the The processing unit 230 obtains a second measurement value VM12 in the specified measurement value format HQ11 in response to the second sensing signal SM12.

例如,在該操作時間TD11之後,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以執行相依於該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的一感測訊號產生HE12,該感測訊號產生HE12用於產生該第二感測訊號SM12。該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:該處理單元230於該指定時間TE12之內,藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的一第五科學計算MF13來獲得包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中的一第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17。 For example, after the operation time TD11, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to perform a sensing signal generation HE12 depending on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11, the sensing signal The generating HE12 is used to generate the second sensing signal SM12. The method MT12 further includes a step: the processing unit 230 obtains, within the specified time TE12, a fifth scientific calculation MF13 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to obtain the different measurement values contained in the complex number A second specific measurement value range code EH17 among the reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . .

例如,該第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,並代表包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…中的一特定測量值範圍RM17。該特定測量值範圍RM17代表包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…中的一第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7。 For example, the second specific measurement value range code EH17 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L, and represents a specific measurement value range RM17 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . The specific measurement value range RM17 represents a second specific physical parameter range RC1E7 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . .

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230基於該第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17,執行用於檢查該第二測量值VM12和該特定測量值範圍RM17之間的一第四數學關係KA13的一檢查操作BA13;以及在該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7於該指定時間TE12之內基於該檢查操作BA13而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生用於控制該第一可變 物理參數QU1A的一第三控制訊號SC13,並將該第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。例如,該第三控制訊號SC13不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 executes a procedure for checking between the second measurement value VM12 and the specific measurement value range RM17 based on the second specific measurement value range code EH17 A check operation BA13 of the fourth mathematical relationship KA13; and the second specific physical parameter range RC1E7 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in is processed by the processing unit 230 based on the check operation BA13 within the specified time TE12 Under certain conditions, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate a A third control signal SC13 of the physical parameter QU1A, and assigns the second specific measurement value range code EH17 to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A. For example, the third control signal SC13 is different from the first control signal SC11.

感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A的步驟包含一子步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測處於一拘束條件FP11的該第二可變物理參數QP1A以提供該第一感測訊號SM11到該處理單元230。例如,該拘束條件FP11是該第二可變物理參數QP1A等於包含於該額定物理參數範圍RC1E中的一特定物理參數QP11。獲得該第一測量值VM11的步驟包含一子步驟:該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SM11,估計該特定物理參數QP11以獲得該第一測量值VM11。 The step of sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A includes a sub-step: when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A under a constraint condition FP11 to provide the first sensing signal SM11 to the processing unit 230 . For example, the constraint condition FP11 is that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to a specific physical parameter QP11 included in the rated physical parameter range RC1E. The step of obtaining the first measurement value VM11 includes a sub-step: the processing unit 230 estimates the specific physical parameter QP11 based on the first sensing signal SM11 to obtain the first measurement value VM11.

由於處於該拘束條件FP11的該第二可變物理參數QP1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內,該處理單元230辨識該第一測量值VM11為於該測量值應用範圍RM1L之內的一可允許值,藉此辨識該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11為一數值交集關係,並藉此確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。 Since the second variable physical parameter QP1A under the constraint condition FP11 is within the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 identifies the first measurement value VM11 as a variable within the measurement value application range RM1L allowable value, thereby identifying the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L as a numerical intersection relationship, and thereby determining the current state of the second variable physical parameter QP1A Physical parameter application range RC1EL.

在一些實施例中,該第一感測單元260基於與該感測訊號產生HE11相關的該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11而被特徵化,並被配置以符合該第一感測器規格FQ11。該第一感測器規格FQ11包含用於表示該第一感測器靈敏度YQ11的該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11、和用於表示一感測器測量範圍RA1E的一感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R。例 如,該額定物理參數範圍RC1E被配置以相同於該感測器測量範圍RA1E,或被配置以是該感測器測量範圍RA1E的一部分。該感測器測量範圍RA1E相關於由該第一感測單元260所執行的一物理參數感測。該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R基於一第一預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第一預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the first sensing unit 260 is characterized based on the first sensor sensitivity YQ11 associated with the sensing signal generation HE11 and is configured to comply with the first sensor specification FQ11. The first sensor specification FQ11 includes the first sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 for representing the first sensor sensitivity YQ11, and a sensor measurement range representation for representing a sensor measurement range RA1E GQ1R. example For example, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E is configured to be the same as the sensor measurement range RA1E, or is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RA1E. The sensor measurement range RA1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the first sensing unit 260 . The sensor measurement range indicates that the GQ1R is provided based on a first predetermined measurement unit. For example, the first preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.

該額定測量值範圍RC1N和該額定範圍界限值對DC1A皆基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RM1L和該應用範圍界限值對DM1L皆基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第二資料編碼操作ZR12來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。 The rated measurement value range RC1N and the rated range limit value pair DC1A are both based on the rated physical parameter range representation GB1E, the sensor measurement range representation GQ1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the first data encoding operation ZR11 for use The specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset. The measurement value application range RM1L and the application range limit value pair DM1L are based on the physical parameter application range representation GB1L, the sensor measurement range representation GQ1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the second data encoding operation ZR12 to use The specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset.

該測量值候選範圍RM12和該候選範圍界限值對DM1B皆基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12、該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和該第四資料編碼操作ZR13來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T和該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12皆基於一第二預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第二預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一,並相同或不同於該第一預設測量單位。 The measurement value candidate range RM12 and the candidate range limit value pair DM1B are both based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12, the sensor measurement range representation GQ1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZR13 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11. The nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E, the physical parameter application range representation GB1L, the first physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, and the second physical parameter candidate range representation GB12 are all provided based on a second predetermined measurement unit. For example, the second predetermined measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit, and is the same as or different from the first predetermined measurement unit.

該第二感測單元334基於與一感測訊號產生相關的該第二感測器靈敏度YW11而被特徵化,並被配置以符合該第二感測器規格FU11。該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示該第二感測器靈敏度YW11的該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11、和用於表示一感測器測量範圍RB1E的一感測器測量範圍表示GW1R。例如,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET被配置以是該感測器測量範圍RB1E的一部分。該感測器測量範圍RB1E相關於由該第二感測單元334所執行的一物理參數感測。該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R基於一第三預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第三預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一。 The second sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the second sensor sensitivity YW11 associated with a sensing signal generation, and is configured to comply with the second sensor specification FU11. The second sensor specification FU11 includes the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing the second sensor sensitivity YW11, and a sensor measurement range representation for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E GW1R. For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RB1E. The sensor measurement range RB1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the second sensing unit 334 . The sensor measurement range indicates that the GW1R is provided based on a third predetermined measurement unit. For example, the third preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於該感測器測量範圍RB1E而被特徵化。該第二可變物理參數QP1A進一步基於該感測器測量範圍RA1E而被特徵化。例如,該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GB1L、該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GB12和該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R皆屬於十進制資料類型。該第一測量值VM11、該第二測量值VM12、該額定範圍界限值對DC1A、該應用範圍界限值對DM1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和該候選範圍界限值對DM1B皆屬於該二進制資料類型,並皆適用於電腦處理。該第一感測器規格FQ11、該第二感測器規格FU11和該觸發應用功能規格GBL1皆被預設。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB1E. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RA1E. For example, the sensor measurement range represents GQ1R, the rated physical parameter range represents GB1E, the physical parameter application range represents GB1L, the first physical parameter candidate range represents GA1T, the second physical parameter candidate range represents GB12 and the sensing The measurement range of the GW1R indicates that the GW1R is a decimal data type. The first measurement value VM11, the second measurement value VM12, the rated range limit value pair DC1A, the application range limit value pair DM1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T and the candidate range limit value pair DM1B all belong to the binary data type, and all are suitable for computer processing. The first sensor specification FQ11 , the second sensor specification FU11 and the trigger application function specification GBL1 are all preset.

在一些實施例中,該第一記憶體位置PM1L 基於一第一記憶體位址FM1L而被識別。該第一記憶體位址FM1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被預設。該第二記憶體位置PV1L基於一第二記憶體位址FV1L而被識別。該第二記憶體位址FV1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被預設。 In some embodiments, the first memory location PM1L It is identified based on a first memory address FM1L. The first memory address FM1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L. The second memory location PV1L is identified based on a second memory location FV1L. The second memory address FV1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230取得所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L、所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T;該處理單元230基於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,獲得該第一記憶體位址FM1L;以及在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L,提供包含所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L的一第一寫入請求訊息WB1L。例如,該第一寫入請求訊息WB1L用於在該第一記憶體位置PM1L儲存所輸送的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset application range code EH1L of the measurement value, the preset limit value pair DM1L of the application range and the preset application range code EH1L. control data code CK1T; the processing unit 230 applies the range code EH1L based on the acquired measurement value to obtain the first memory address FM1L; and before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the acquired application range The limit value pair DM1L and the obtained first memory address FM1L provide a first write request message WB1L including the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L and the obtained first memory address FM1L. For example, the first write request message WB1L is used to store the delivered pair of application range limit values DM1L in the first memory location PM1L.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230基於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,獲得該第二記憶體位址FV1L;以及在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L,提供包含所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L的一第二寫入請求訊息WA1L。例如,該第二寫入請求訊息WA1L用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第二記憶體位置PV1L儲 存所輸送的該控制資料碼CK1T。該識別媒介310是一電子標籤350、一條碼媒介360和一生物識別作用媒介370的其中之一。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 applies the range code EH1L based on the acquired measurement value to obtain the second memory address FV1L; and before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the second memory address based on the acquired The control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FV1L provide a second write request message WA1L including the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FV1L. For example, the second write request message WA1L is used to cause the memory cell 25Y1 to store in the second memory location PV1L The transmitted control data code CK1T is stored. The identification medium 310 is one of an electronic label 350 , a barcode medium 360 and a biometric identification medium 370 .

請參閱第8圖,其為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8017的示意圖。如第8圖所示,該實施結構8017包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。在一些實施例中,該處理單元230藉由比較所獲得的該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L來執行用於檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11的一檢查操作BA11。在該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,在該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第二可變物理參數QP1A對應於該第一可變物理參數QU1A。 Please refer to FIG. 8 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8017 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 8 , the implementation structure 8017 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 performs checking of the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range by comparing the obtained first measurement value VM11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L A check operation BA11 of the first mathematical relationship KA11 between RM1L. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines, based on the checking operation BA11, the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate an output for controlling the first variable physical parameter QP1A. The first control signal SC11 of the variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the second variable physical parameter QP1A corresponds to the first variable physical parameter QU1A.

該控制裝置210設置於一應用環境EX11中。該第二可變物理參數QP1A存在於一物理參數形成區AT11中。該控制裝置210和該應用環境EX11的其中之一具有該第二可變物理參數QP1A。例如,該第一感測單元260耦合於具有該第二可變物理參數QP1A的該物理參數形成區AT11。該第一可變物理參數QU1A存在於一物理參數形成區AU11中。例如,在該物理參數形成區AT11位於該應用環境EX11中的條件下,該物理參數形成區AT11鄰接於該控制裝置210。 The control device 210 is installed in an application environment EX11. The second variable physical parameter QP1A exists in a physical parameter forming area AT11. One of the control device 210 and the application environment EX11 has the second variable physical parameter QP1A. For example, the first sensing unit 260 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AT11 having the second variable physical parameter QP1A. The first variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a physical parameter forming area AU11. For example, under the condition that the physical parameter forming area AT11 is located in the application environment EX11 , the physical parameter forming area AT11 is adjacent to the control device 210 .

例如,該物理參數形成區AU11和該物理參數形成區AT11是分開的,並分別被形成於該第一實際位置LD11和該第二實際位置LC11;藉此,該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該第二可變物理參數QP1A分別被形成於該第一實際位置LD11和不同於該第一實際位置LD11的該第二實際位置LC11。例如,該物理參數形成區AT11是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一環境區的其中之一。例如,該物理參數形成區AU11是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一環境區的其中之一。 For example, the physical parameter forming area AU11 and the physical parameter forming area AT11 are separate, and are respectively formed at the first actual position LD11 and the second actual position LC11; thereby, the first variable physical parameter QU1A and The second variable physical parameter QP1A is formed at the first actual position LD11 and the second actual position LC11 different from the first actual position LD11, respectively. For example, the physical parameter forming area AT11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and an environment area. For example, the physical parameter forming area AU11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and an environment area.

該第二可變物理參數QP1A基於對應於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的該對應物理參數範圍RW1EL而被特徵化。該對應物理參數範圍RW1EL由一對應測量值範圍RV1L所代表。該測量值應用範圍RM1L和該對應測量值範圍RV1L的一範圍組合等於該額定測量值範圍RC1N。該對應測量值範圍RV1L基於該對應物理參數範圍RW1EL和該額定測量值範圍RC1N而被預設。 The second variable physical parameter QP1A is characterized based on the corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL corresponding to the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RV1L. A range combination of the measured value application range RM1L and the corresponding measured value range RV1L is equal to the rated measured value range RC1N. The corresponding measured value range RV1L is preset based on the corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL and the nominal measured value range RC1N.

該觸發應用功能FB11相關於該記憶體單元25Y1。在該觸發事件EQ11被應用到該觸發應用功能FB11的條件下,該處理單元230耦合於該記憶體單元25Y1。例如,該儲存單元250包含該記憶體單元25Y1。在該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L之間的該第一資料比較CA11而辨識該第一數學關係KA11為一數值交集關係KG11的條件下,該處理單元230做出該第一邏輯決定PH11以成為肯定的。 The trigger application function FB11 is related to the memory unit 25Y1. The processing unit 230 is coupled to the memory unit 25Y1 under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is applied to the trigger application function FB11. For example, the storage unit 250 includes the memory unit 25Y1. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 identifies the first mathematical relationship KA11 as a numerical intersection relationship KG11 based on the first data comparison CA11 between the first measured value VM11 and the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L, The processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PH11 to be affirmative.

在一些實施例中,在該第一邏輯決定PH11 是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內的一物理參數情況,並藉此辨識該第二可變物理參數QP1A和該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之間的一物理參數關係為該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內的一物理參數交集關係。 In some embodiments, at the first logic decision PH11 In the affirmative condition, the processing unit 230 determines a physical parameter condition of the second variable physical parameter QP1A currently within the physical parameter application range RC1EL, and thereby identifies the second variable physical parameter QP1A and the physical parameter. A physical parameter relationship between parameter application ranges RC1EL is a physical parameter intersection relationship of the second variable physical parameter QP1A currently within the physical parameter application range RC1EL.

在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的該第二資料獲取AG1A以獲得該控制應用碼UA1T,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來導致該輸出單元240執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生用於控制該控制目標裝置330的該第一控制訊號SC11。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 executes the second data acquisition AG1A using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to obtain the control application code UA1T, and based on the obtained control application code UA1T to cause the output unit 240 to execute the first signal generation operation BS11 for the trigger application function FB11 to generate a signal for controlling the control target device 330 the first control signal SC11.

例如,該處理單元230處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得包含該第一測量值VM11的一測量值序列JM11。該處理單元230藉由比較該測量值序列JM11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L來執行用於檢查該測量值序列JM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的一數學關係KA15的一檢查操作BA15。該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BA15來做出該第一邏輯決定PH11。該檢查操作BA15包含該檢查操作BA11。 For example, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SM11 to obtain a measurement value sequence JM11 including the first measurement value VM11. The processing unit 230 performs a check for checking a mathematical relationship KA15 between the measured value sequence JM11 and the measured value application range RM1L by comparing the measured value sequence JM11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L Operate BA15. The processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PH11 based on the checking operation BA15. The check operation BA15 includes the check operation BA11.

在一些實施例中,該應用範圍界限值對DM1L屬於一測量範圍界限資料碼類型TM11。該測量範圍界限資料碼類型TM11由一測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別 符HM11所識別。該控制資料碼CK1T屬於一控制資料碼類型TK11。該控制資料碼類型TK11由一控制資料碼類型識別符HK11所識別。該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11和該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11皆被預設。該第一記憶體位置PM1L基於該第一記憶體位址FM1L而被識別,或由該第一記憶體位址FM1L所識別。該第二記憶體位置PV1L基於該第二記憶體位址FV1L而被識別,或由該第二記憶體位址FV1L所識別。 In some embodiments, the application range limit value pair DM1L belongs to a measurement range limit data code type TM11. The measurement range limit data code type TM11 is identified by a measurement range limit data code type Recognized by the symbol HM11. The control data code CK1T belongs to a control data code type TK11. The control data code type TK11 is identified by a control data code type identifier HK11. Both the measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11 and the control data code type identifier HK11 are preset. The first memory location PM1L is identified based on the first memory address FM1L, or is identified by the first memory address FM1L. The second memory location PV1L is identified based on the second memory address FV1L, or is identified by the second memory address FV1L.

該第一記憶體位址FM1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11而被預設。該第二記憶體位址FV1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11而被預設。該處理單元230被配置以獲得所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11。該第一資料獲取操作AF11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11來獲得該第一記憶體位址FM1L,並基於所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PM1L的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 The first memory address FM1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11. The second memory address FV1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset control data code type identifier HK11. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11. The first data acquisition operation AF11 applies the range code EH1L and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11 based on the determined measurement value to obtain the first memory address FM1L, and based on the obtained first memory address FM1L Memory location FM1L is used to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the application range limit pair DM1L stored in the first memory location PM1L.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…具有該總參考範圍數目NS11。例如,該總參考範圍數目NS11被預設。該儲存單元250儲存該總參考範圍數目NS11和該額定範圍界限值對DC1A。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來執行複數科學計算以獲得 所預設的該總參考範圍數目NS11和所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A,或響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存單元250獲得該總參考範圍數目NS11和該額定範圍界限值對DC1A。 In some embodiments, the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, . . . have the total reference range number NS11. For example, the total reference range number NS11 is preset. The storage unit 250 stores the total reference range number NS11 and the rated range limit value pair DC1A. The processing unit 230 performs complex scientific calculations in response to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain The preset total reference range number NS11 and the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A, or obtain the total reference range number NS11 and the rated range limit value pair DC1A from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ11 .

在該處理單元230獲得該第一測量值VM11的條件下,該第二資料確定操作AE12藉由執行使用所獲得的該第一測量值VM11、所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NS11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A的該第一科學計算MF11來獲得所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L以便檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11。例如,該第一科學計算MF11基於所預設的該總參考範圍數目NS11和所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A而被預先建構。該第二資料獲取操作AF12藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L、所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A和所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NS11的該第二科學計算MG11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11, the second data determination operation AE12 is performed by using the obtained first measurement value VM11, the obtained total reference range number NS11 and the obtained The rated range limit value is used for the first scientific calculation MF11 of DC1A to obtain the preset measurement value application range code EH1L in order to check the first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L KA11. For example, the first scientific calculation MF11 is pre-constructed based on the preset total reference range number NS11 and the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A. The second data acquisition operation AF12 is performed by performing the second scientific calculation MG11 using the determined measured value application range code EH1L, the obtained nominal range limit value pair DC1A and the obtained total reference range number NS11 Obtain this application range limit value for the DM1L.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230被配置以獲得所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11。在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11來獲得該第二記憶體位址FV1L,基於所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PV1L的該控制資料碼 CK1T,並基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來導致該輸出單元240執行該第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control data code type identifier HK11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 applies the range code EH1L and the obtained control data code based on the determined measurement value Type identifier HK11 to obtain the second memory address FV1L, based on the obtained second memory address FV1L to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the control data code stored in the second memory location PV1L CK1T, and causes the output unit 240 to perform the first signal generating operation BS11 to generate the first control signal SC11 based on the accessed control data code CK1T.

例如,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來導致該第二可變物理參數QP1A在該物理參數形成區AT11中形成。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A存在於該物理參數形成區AT11中的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。例如,該物理參數形成區AT11是一使用者介面區。 For example, the processing unit 230 causes the second variable physical parameter QP1A to be formed in the physical parameter forming area AT11 in response to the trigger event EQ11. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A exists in the physical parameter forming area AT11, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. For example, the physical parameter forming area AT11 is a user interface area.

請參閱第9圖。第9圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8018的示意圖。如第9圖所示,該實施結構8018包含一識別媒介310、該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該識別媒介310而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figure 9. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8018 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 9 , the implementation structure 8018 includes an identification medium 310 , the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the identification medium 310 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能FB11是一識別應用功能。該觸發事件EQ11是一識別媒介出現事件。該操作單元297包含該響應區域AC1和該讀取器220。該響應區域AC1用於執行該觸發應用功能FB11。該讀取器220耦合於該響應區域AC1和該處理單元230。在該識別媒介310出現於該響應區域AC1的該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數 QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function FB11 is an identification application function. The trigger event EQ11 is an identification medium occurrence event. The operating unit 297 includes the response area AC1 and the reader 220 . The response area AC1 is used to execute the trigger application function FB11. The reader 220 is coupled to the response area AC1 and the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs when the identification medium 310 appears in the response area AC1, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11.

該處理單元230接收該第一感測訊號SM11,並響應該觸發事件EQ11來處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得該第一測量值VM11。例如,在該處理單元230通過該讀取器220而辨識了出現於該響應區域AC1的該識別媒介310的條件下,該處理單元230處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得該第一測量值VM11。 The processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SM11 and processes the received first sensing signal SM11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the first measurement value VM11. For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 recognizes the identification medium 310 present in the response area AC1 through the reader 220, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SM11 to obtain the first sensing signal SM11. A measurement value VM11.

該識別媒介310由一識別媒介識別符HU11所識別,並是一電子標籤350、一條碼媒介360和一生物識別作用媒介370的其中之一。在該識別媒介310出現於該響應區域AC1的條件下,該讀取器220藉由執行用於該識別應用功能的一讀取操作BX11來讀取該識別媒介310以獲得一讀取資料DB11。該處理單元230基於該讀取資料DB11來確定等於該識別媒介識別符HU11的一識別媒介辨識碼CU11,並藉此辨識該識別媒介310。 The identification medium 310 is identified by an identification medium identifier HU11 and is one of an electronic label 350 , a barcode medium 360 and a biometric identification medium 370 . Under the condition that the identification medium 310 is present in the response area AC1, the reader 220 reads the identification medium 310 by executing a read operation BX11 for the identification application function to obtain a read data DB11. The processing unit 230 determines an identification medium identification code CU11 equal to the identification medium identifier HU11 based on the read data DB11 , and thereby identifies the identification medium 310 .

在該處理單元230獲得該第一測量值VM11的條件下,該處理單元230執行用於檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11的該檢查操作BA11。在該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11。 On the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11, the processing unit 230 performs the checking operation for checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L BA11. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located based on the checking operation BA11.

在一些實施例中,該實施結構8018進一步包含一控制目標裝置630。該控制裝置210由一控制裝置識別符HA0T所識別,並用於控制該控制目標裝置630。該輸 出單元240具有一輸出端240P和一輸出端240Q;藉此該操作單元297具有該輸出端240P和該輸出端240Q。該輸出端240P和該輸出端240Q分別位於不同空間位置。該控制目標裝置330耦合於該輸出端240P,並由一控制目標裝置識別符HA1T所識別。該控制目標裝置630耦合於該輸出端240Q,並由一控制目標裝置識別符HA12所識別。 In some embodiments, the implementation structure 8018 further includes a control target device 630 . The control device 210 is identified by a control device identifier HAOT and used to control the control target device 630 . the lose The output unit 240 has an output terminal 240P and an output terminal 240Q; thereby the operation unit 297 has the output terminal 240P and the output terminal 240Q. The output end 240P and the output end 240Q are located at different spatial positions respectively. The control target device 330 is coupled to the output terminal 240P, and is identified by a control target device identifier HA1T. The control target device 630 is coupled to the output terminal 240Q and identified by a control target device identifier HA12.

例如,該控制裝置識別符HA0T是一控制裝置號碼,並被預設。該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T被配置以指示該輸出端240P,是一第一控制目標裝置號碼,並被預設。該控制目標裝置識別符HA12被配置以指示該輸出端240Q,是一第二控制目標裝置號碼,並被預設。該第一記憶體位置PM1L基於該第一記憶體位址FM1L而被識別。該第一記憶體位址FM1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T而被預設。該第二記憶體位置PV1L基於該第二記憶體位址FV1L而被識別。該第二記憶體位址FV1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12而被預設。 For example, the control device identifier HAOT is a control device number and is preset. The control target device identifier HA1T is configured to indicate that the output terminal 240P is a first control target device number, and is preset. The control target device identifier HA12 is configured to indicate that the output terminal 240Q is a second control target device number and is preset. The first memory location PM1L is identified based on the first memory location FM1L. The first memory address FM1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset control target device identifier HA1T. The second memory location PV1L is identified based on the second memory address FV1L. The second memory address FV1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset control target device identifier HA12.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T。該第一資料獲取操作AF11基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來獲得該第一記憶體位址FM1L,並基於所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PM1L的所預設的該應用範圍界限值對 DM1L。在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來獲得該第二記憶體位址FV1L,並基於所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PV1L的該控制資料碼CK1T。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset control target device identifier HA1T in response to the trigger event EQ11. The first data acquisition operation AF11 applies the range code EH1L to obtain the first memory address FM1L based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the determined measurement value, and based on the obtained first memory address FM1L to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the preset pair of the application range limit values stored in the first memory location PM1L DM1L. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently, the processing unit 230 applies the application based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the determined measurement value. range code EH1L to obtain the second memory address FV1L, and based on the obtained second memory address FV1L to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the control data code stored in the second memory location PV1L CK1T.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。該訊號產生控制GS11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用,並用於導致該處理單元230提供一控制訊號SH11到該輸出單元240。該控制訊號SH11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11和該控制訊號SH11的其中之一來執行使用該輸出端240P的該第一訊號產生操作BS11以向該控制目標裝置330傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。 The processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 to control the output unit 240 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the obtained control data code CK1T. The signal generation control GS11 functions to instruct the output terminal 240P and is used to cause the processing unit 230 to provide a control signal SH11 to the output unit 240 . The control signal SH11 serves to instruct the output end 240P. The output unit 240 performs the first signal generation operation BS11 using the output terminal 240P in response to one of the signal generation control GS11 and the control signal SH11 to transmit the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230被配置以獲得所預設的該控制裝置識別符HA0T。該第一控制訊號SC11包含所獲得的該控制裝置識別符HA0T、所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所獲得的該控制碼CC1T的至少其中之一。在一特定情況中,該處理單元230響應一觸發事件EQ21來獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12,並基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12來執行一訊號產生控制GS19以控制該輸出單元240。該訊號產 生控制GS19起到指示該輸出端240Q的作用。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS19來使用該輸出端240Q以向該控制目標裝置630傳輸一控制訊號SC19。該控制訊號SC19用於控制該控制目標裝置630。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control device identifier HAOT. The first control signal SC11 includes at least one of the obtained control device identifier HA0T, the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the obtained control code CC1T. In a specific case, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset control target device identifier HA12 in response to a trigger event EQ21, and executes a signal generation control GS19 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA12 to control The output unit 240. The signal produces The raw control GS19 functions to instruct the output terminal 240Q. The output unit 240 generates a control GS19 in response to the signal and uses the output terminal 240Q to transmit a control signal SC19 to the control target device 630 . The control signal SC19 is used to control the control target device 630 .

例如,該儲存單元250儲存所預設的該控制裝置識別符HA0T、所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12。該處理單元230被配置以從該儲存單元250獲得所預設的該控制裝置識別符HA0T。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存單元250獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ21來從該儲存單元250獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12。 For example, the storage unit 250 stores the preset control device identifier HA0T, the preset control target device identifier HA1T, and the preset control target device identifier HA12. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control device identifier HAOT from the storage unit 250 . The processing unit 230 obtains the preset control target device identifier HA1T from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ11. The processing unit 230 obtains the preset control target device identifier HA12 from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ21.

例如,該儲存單元250具有一第一應用記憶體位置和一第二應用記憶體位置,在該第一應用記憶體位置儲存該額定範圍界限值對DC1A,並在該第二應用記憶體位置儲存該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。該第一應用記憶體位置由一第一應用記憶體位址所識別,或基於該第一應用記憶體位址而被識別。該第二應用記憶體位置由一第二應用記憶體位址所識別,或基於該第二應用記憶體位址而被識別。該第一應用記憶體位址和該第二應用記憶體位址皆基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T而被預設。 For example, the storage unit 250 has a first application memory location and a second application memory location, the rated range limit value pair DC1A is stored in the first application memory location, and the second application memory location is stored The variable physical parameter range code UM1A. The first application memory location is identified by or based on a first application memory address. The second application memory location is identified by or based on a second application memory address. Both the first application memory address and the second application memory address are preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T.

該第二資料獲取操作AF12基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T來獲得該第一應用記憶體位址,並基於所獲得的該第一應用記憶體位址來使用該儲存單元250以讀取被儲存在該第一應用記憶體位置的該額定 範圍界限值對DC1A以取得所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A。該處理單元230被配置以基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T而獲得該第二應用記憶體位址,並基於所獲得的該第二應用記憶體位址來使用該儲存單元250以存取被儲存在該第二應用記憶體位置的該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。 The second data obtaining operation AF12 obtains the first application memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, and uses the storage unit 250 to read the address based on the obtained first application memory address. the rated value stored in the first application memory location Range limit value pair DC1A to obtain the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the second application memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, and to use the storage unit 250 to access the second application memory address based on the obtained second application memory address The variable physical parameter range code UM1A stored in the second application memory location.

該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET具有一預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1和相對於該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1的一預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2。該目標範圍界限值對DN1T包含該測量值目標範圍RN1T的一目標範圍界限值DN17和相對於該目標範圍界限值DN17的一目標範圍界限值DN18。該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1由該目標範圍界限值DN17所代表。該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2由該目標範圍界限值DN18所代表。 The physical parameter target range RD1ET has a predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and a predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 relative to the predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1. The target range limit value pair DN1T includes a target range limit value DN17 of the measurement value target range RN1T and a target range limit value DN18 relative to the target range limit value DN17. The preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 is represented by the target range limit value DN17. The preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 is represented by the target range limit value DN18.

請參閱第10圖。第10圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8019的示意圖。如第10圖所示,該實施結構8019包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figure 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8019 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 10 , the implementation structure 8019 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is configured to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能FB11是 一訊號輸入應用功能。該觸發事件EQ11是一訊號輸入事件。在該輸入單元270接收一觸發訊號ST11的該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。例如,該觸發訊號ST11由一功能開關470和一訊號產生器472的其中之一所提供。例如,該伺服器280包含該記憶體單元25Y1。該輸入單元270耦合於該功能開關470和該訊號產生器472的至少其中之一。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function FB11 is A signal input application function. The trigger event EQ11 is a signal input event. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs when the input unit 270 receives a trigger signal ST11, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. For example, the trigger signal ST11 is provided by one of a function switch 470 and a signal generator 472 . For example, the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1. The input unit 270 is coupled to at least one of the function switch 470 and the signal generator 472 .

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能FB11是一使用者輸入應用功能。該觸發事件EQ11是一使用者輸入事件。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一電應用目標WJ11。在該輸入單元270接收一使用者輸入操作JU11的該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。該使用者輸入操作JU11用於選擇該電應用目標WJ11。例如,該控制裝置210由一使用者295所使用。該使用者輸入操作JU11由該使用者295所執行。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function FB11 is a user input application function. The trigger event EQ11 is a user input event. The control device 210 further includes an electrical application target WJ11 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11 under the condition that the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU11 triggering event EQ11. The user input operation JU11 is used to select the electrical application target WJ11. For example, the control device 210 is used by a user 295 . The user input operation JU11 is performed by the user 295 .

該電應用目標WJ11是一感測目標和一顯示目標的其中之一。在該電應用目標WJ11是該感測目標的條件下,該輸入單元270包含該電應用目標WJ11。在該電應用目標WJ11是該顯示目標的條件下,該輸出單元240包含該電應用目標WJ11。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JU11來提供一操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來確定該觸發事件EQ11。例如,在該處理單元230確定該觸發事件EQ11的 條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SM11來獲得該第一測量值VM11。 The electrical application target WJ11 is one of a sensing target and a display target. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is the sensing target, the input unit 270 includes the electrical application target WJ11. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is the display target, the output unit 240 includes the electrical application target WJ11. The input unit 270 provides an operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the user inputting the operation JU11 . The processing unit 230 determines the trigger event EQ11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11. For example, the processing unit 230 determines the trigger event EQ11 Under certain conditions, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11 based on the first sensing signal SM11.

請參閱第11圖和第12圖。第11圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8020的示意圖。第12圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8021的示意圖。如第11圖和第12圖所示,該實施結構8020和該實施結構8021的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figures 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8020 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8021 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 , each structure of the implementation structure 8020 and the implementation structure 8021 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is configured to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330包含一操作單元397、耦合於該操作單元397的該第二感測單元334、和耦合於該操作單元397的一功能目標335。該功能目標335受該操作單元397控制,並包含具有該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該物理參數形成區AU11。該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於包含該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一額定物理參數範圍RD1E而被特徵化。該額定物理參數範圍RD1E由一額定測量值範圍RD1N所代表,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…包含該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 includes an operation unit 397 , the second sensing unit 334 coupled to the operation unit 397 , and a function target 335 coupled to the operation unit 397 . The functional object 335 is controlled by the operating unit 397 and includes the physical parameter forming area AU11 having the first variable physical parameter QU1A. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RD1E including the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The rated physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a rated measurement value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . respectively represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... include the physical parameter target range RD1ET and a physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.

該額定測量值範圍RD1N包含該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…,並基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E、該第一感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GB1E的該第一資料編碼操作ZR11來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…包含該測量值目標範圍RN1T和代表該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的一測量值候選範圍RN12。該測量值候選範圍RN12由一測量值候選範圍碼EM12所代表,並具有一候選範圍界限值對DN1B,藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EM12被配置以指示該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該第一可變物理參數QU1A被配置以於一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內。該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。 The rated measurement value range RD1N includes the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . The first data encoding operation ZR11 is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . include the measurement value target range RN1T and a measurement value candidate range RN12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. The measurement candidate range RN12 is represented by a measurement candidate range code EM12 and has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B, whereby the measurement candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within a specific physical parameter range RD1E4. The specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . .

在一些實施例中,由該控制目標裝置330所引起的該觸發作用事件是一狀態改變事件。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一狀態改變偵測器475。例如,該狀態改變偵測器475是一極限偵測器和一邊緣偵測器的其中之一。該極限偵測器是一極限開關。該狀態改變偵測器475被配置以偵測與一預設特徵物理參數UL11相關的一特徵物理參數到達ZL12。該功能目標335包含一物理參數應用區AJ11。該物理參數應用區AJ11具有一可變物理參數QG1A。該可變物理參數QG1A相依於該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並基於該預設特徵物理參數UL11而被特徵化。例如,該物理參數應用區AJ11是一負 載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一環境區的其中之一。該預設特徵物理參數UL11相關於該第一可變物理參數QU1A。 In some embodiments, the triggering event caused by the control target device 330 is a state change event. The control device 210 further includes a state change detector 475 coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the state change detector 475 is one of a limit detector and an edge detector. The limit detector is a limit switch. The state change detector 475 is configured to detect the arrival of a characteristic physical parameter associated with a predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL11 to ZL12. The functional object 335 includes a physical parameter application area AJ11. The physical parameter application area AJ11 has a variable physical parameter QG1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A is dependent on the first variable physical parameter QU1A and is characterized based on the predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL11. For example, the physical parameter application area AJ11 is a negative One of a loading area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and an environmental area. The preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 is related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該操作單元397使該功能目標335執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的該指定功能操作ZH11。該指定功能操作ZH11用於控制該可變物理參數QG1A,並藉由改變該可變物理參數QG1A來導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該可變物理參數QG1A被配置以處於一可變物理狀態XA1A。例如,該操作單元397受該控制裝置210控制以使該功能目標335執行該指定功能操作ZH11。例如,該額定測量值範圍RD1N具有一額定範圍界限值對DD1A。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the operation unit 397 causes the function object 335 to perform the specified function operation ZH11 related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A. The designated function operation ZH11 is used to control the variable physical parameter QG1A, and cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur by changing the variable physical parameter QG1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A is configured to be in a variable physical state XA1A. For example, the operation unit 397 is controlled by the control device 210 to cause the function object 335 to perform the designated function operation ZH11. For example, the nominal measured value range RD1N has a nominal range limit value pair DD1A.

在該可變物理參數QU1A於該觸發事件EQ11之前被配置以於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的條件下,該指定功能操作ZH11導致該可變物理參數QG1A到達該預設特徵物理參數UL11以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12,並藉由形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12來將該可變物理狀態XA1A從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態XA11改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12。該狀態改變偵測器475響應該特徵物理參數到達ZL12特來產生一觸發訊號SX11。例如,該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12基於該預設特徵物理參數UL11而被特徵化。該狀態改變偵測器475響應該可變物理參數QG1A被從該非特徵物理參數到達狀態XA11改變成該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12的一狀態改變事件來產生該觸發訊號SX11。 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 before the trigger event EQ11, the specified function operation ZH11 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the default characteristic physical parameter UL11 to The characteristic physical parameter arrival ZL12 is formed, and the variable physical state XA1A is changed from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA11 to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12 by forming the characteristic physical parameter arrival ZL12. The state change detector 475 generates a trigger signal SX11 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12. For example, the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12 is characterized based on the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11. The state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX11 in response to a state change event in which the variable physical parameter QG1A is changed from the non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA11 to the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270耦合於該狀態改變偵測器475。該觸發事件EQ11是該可變物理參數QG1A進入該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12的該狀態改變事件。該輸入單元270和該處理單元230的其中之一接收該觸發訊號SX11。該處理單元230響應所接收的該觸發訊號SX11來獲得該控制應用碼UA1T,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來在該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該輸入單元270包含一觸控螢幕2701。在該電應用目標WJ11是該感測目標的條件下,該觸控螢幕2701包含該電應用目標WJ11。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 is coupled to the state change detector 475 . The trigger event EQ11 is the state change event of the variable physical parameter QG1A entering the actual characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA12. One of the input unit 270 and the processing unit 230 receives the trigger signal SX11. The processing unit 230 obtains the control application code UA1T in response to the received trigger signal SX11, and executes the signal generation for the trigger application function FB11 within the operation time TD11 based on the obtained control application code UA1T GS11 is controlled to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11. For example, the input unit 270 includes a touch screen 2701 . Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is the sensing target, the touch screen 2701 includes the electrical application target WJ11.

例如,在該狀態改變偵測器475是該極限開關的條件下,該特徵物理參數到達ZL12是等於一可變空間位置的該可變物理參數QG1A到達等於一預設極限位置的該預設特徵物理參數UL11的一極限位置到達。例如,該功能目標335藉由執行基於該第一可變物理參數QU1A而被引起的該指定功能操作ZH11來在該物理參數應用區AJ11中形成該可變物理參數QG1A。在該物理參數應用區AJ11耦合於該狀態改變偵測器475的條件下,該狀態改變偵測器475偵測該特徵物理參數到達ZL12。 For example, under the condition that the state change detector 475 is the limit switch, the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12 is equal to the variable physical parameter QG1A of a variable spatial position reaching the predetermined characteristic equal to a predetermined limit position A limit position of the physical parameter UL11 is reached. For example, the function object 335 forms the variable physical parameter QG1A in the physical parameter application area AJ11 by executing the specified function operation ZH11 caused based on the first variable physical parameter QU1A. Under the condition that the physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the state change detector 475, the state change detector 475 detects that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL12.

例如,該處理單元230響應所接收的該觸發訊號SX11來使用該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得該第一測量值VM11。在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數 應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的該第二資料獲取AG1A以獲得該控制應用碼UA1T,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來導致該輸出單元240產生起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用的該第一控制訊號SC11。 For example, the processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SM11 to obtain the first measurement value VM11 in response to the received trigger signal SX11. The processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measured value VM11 and the measured value application range RM1L Under the condition of the application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 executes the second data acquisition AG1A using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to obtain the control application code UA1T, and causes the control application code UA1T based on the obtained control application code UA1T. The output unit 240 generates the first control signal SC11 for indicating the target range RN1T of the measurement value.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A是一第一可變電性參數、一第一可變力學參數、一第一可變光學參數、一第一可變溫度、一第一可變電壓、一第一可變電流、一第一可變電功率、一第一可變電阻、一第一可變電容、一第一可變電感、一第一可變頻率、一第一時鐘時間、一第一可變時間長度、一第一可變亮度、一第一可變光強度、一第一可變音量、一第一可變資料流量、一第一可變振幅、一第一可變空間位置、一第一可變位移、一第一可變順序位置、一第一可變角度、一第一可變空間長度、一第一可變距離、一第一可變平移速度、一第一可變角速度、一第一可變加速度、一第一可變力、一第一可變壓力和一第一可變機械功率的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is a first variable electrical parameter, a first variable mechanical parameter, a first variable optical parameter, a first variable temperature, a first variable voltage, a first variable current, a first variable electrical power, a first variable resistor, a first variable capacitor, a first variable inductor, a first variable frequency, a first clock time, a first variable time length, a first variable brightness, a first variable light intensity, a first variable volume, a first variable data flow, a first variable amplitude, a first variable Variable space position, a first variable displacement, a first variable sequence position, a first variable angle, a first variable space length, a first variable distance, a first variable translation speed, One of a first variable angular velocity, a first variable acceleration, a first variable force, a first variable pressure, and a first variable mechanical power.

該操作單元397被配置以依靠該第一控制訊號SC11而執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的一物理參數控制功能FA11。該控制目標裝置330是複數應用裝置的其中之一。該物理參數控制功能FA11是複數特定控制功能的其中之一,該複數特定控制功能包含一光控制功能、一力控制功能、一電控制功能、一磁控制功能和其任意組合。該複數應用裝置包含一繼電器、一控制開關裝置、一電動機、一照明裝置、一門、一販賣機、一能量轉換器、 一負載裝置、一定時裝置、一玩具、一電器、一列印裝置、一顯示裝置、一移動裝置、一揚聲器和其任意組合。 The operation unit 397 is configured to execute a physical parameter control function FA11 related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A by means of the first control signal SC11. The control target device 330 is one of a plurality of application devices. The physical parameter control function FA11 is one of a plurality of specific control functions including a light control function, a force control function, an electrical control function, a magnetic control function and any combination thereof. The plurality of application devices include a relay, a control switch device, a motor, a lighting device, a door, a vending machine, an energy converter, A load device, a timing device, a toy, an electrical appliance, a printing device, a display device, a mobile device, a speaker, and any combination thereof.

該功能目標335是複數應用目標的其中之一,並被配置以執行一特定應用功能。該特定應用功能是複數物理參數應用功能的其中之一,該複數物理參數應用功能包含一光使用功能、一力使用功能、一電使用功能、一磁使用功能和其任意組合。該複數應用目標包含一電子組件、一致動器、一電阻器、一電容器、一電感器、一繼電器、一控制開關、一電晶體、一電動機、一照明單元、一能量轉換單元、一負載單元、一定時單元、一列印單元、一顯示目標、一揚聲器和其任意組合。例如,該功能目標335是一物理可實現功能目標。 The functional object 335 is one of a plurality of application objects and is configured to perform a specific application function. The specific application function is one of the complex physical parameter application functions, and the complex physical parameter application function includes a light use function, a force use function, an electricity use function, a magnetism use function and any combination thereof. The multiple application targets include an electronic component, an actuator, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a relay, a control switch, a transistor, a motor, a lighting unit, an energy conversion unit, and a load unit , a timing unit, a printing unit, a display target, a speaker, and any combination thereof. For example, the functional goal 335 is a physically achievable functional goal.

例如,該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該可變物理參數QG1A分別屬於該第一物理參數類型TU11和一物理參數類型TU1G。該第一物理參數類型TU11相同或不同於該物理參數類型TU1G。該預設特徵物理參數UL11屬於該物理參數類型TU1G。該物理參數應用區AJ11耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11。例如,該指定功能操作ZH11用於驅動該物理參數應用區AJ11以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12。例如,該第一物理參數類型TU11不同於一時間類型。 For example, the first variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QG1A belong to the first physical parameter type TU11 and a physical parameter type TU1G, respectively. The first physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the physical parameter type TU1G. The preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 belongs to the physical parameter type TU1G. The physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU11. For example, the specified function operation ZH11 is used to drive the physical parameter application area AJ11 to form the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12. For example, the first physical parameter type TU11 is different from a time type.

該可變物理參數QG1A是一可變電性參數、一可變力學參數、一可變光學參數、一可變溫度、一可變電壓、一可變電流、一可變電功率、一可變電阻、一可變電容、一可變電感、一可變頻率、一時鐘時間、一可 變時間長度、一可變亮度、一可變光強度、一可變音量、一可變資料流量、一可變振幅、一可變空間位置、一可變位移、一可變順序位置、一可變角度、一可變空間長度、一可變距離、一可變平移速度、一可變角速度、一可變加速度、一可變力、一可變壓力和一可變機械功率的其中之一。例如,該第一可變物理參數QU1A相同或不同於該可變物理參數QG1A。 The variable physical parameter QG1A is a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, a variable current, a variable electrical power, a variable resistance, a variable capacitor, a variable inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable Variable time length, a variable brightness, a variable light intensity, a variable volume, a variable data flow, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial position, a variable displacement, a variable sequential position, a variable One of a variable angle, a variable space length, a variable distance, a variable translation velocity, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure, and a variable mechanical power. For example, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the same as or different from the variable physical parameter QG1A.

請參閱第13圖、第14圖、第15圖和第16圖。第13圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8022的示意圖。第14圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8023的示意圖。第15圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8024的示意圖。第16圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8025的示意圖。如第13圖、第14圖、第15圖和第16圖所示,該實施結構8022、該實施結構8023、該實施結構8024和該實施結構8025的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210包含該物理參數形成區AT11、該操作單元297、該第一感測單元260和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。 See Figures 13, 14, 15 and 16. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8022 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8023 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8024 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8025 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 13 , FIG. 14 , FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 , each structure of the implementation structure 8022 , the implementation structure 8023 , the implementation structure 8024 and the implementation structure 8025 includes the control device 210 , the control device The target device 330 and the server 280. The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 includes the physical parameter forming area AT11 , the operation unit 297 , the first sensing unit 260 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 .

在一些實施例中,該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…包含該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL、該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2和一物理參數候選範圍RC1E3。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RM11、RM12、…包 含該測量值應用範圍RM1L、該測量值候選範圍RM12和一測量值候選範圍RM13。該測量值候選範圍RM12由該測量值候選範圍碼EH12所代表,藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EM12被配置以指示該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。 In some embodiments, the complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, . . . include the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2, and a physical parameter candidate range RC1E3. The complex number of different measured value reference ranges RM11, RM12, ... package It includes the measurement value application range RM1L, the measurement value candidate range RM12 and a measurement value candidate range RM13. The measurement candidate range RM12 is represented by the measurement candidate range code EH12, whereby the measurement candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2.

該觸發應用功能規格GBL1包含包含用於表示該物理參數候選範圍RC1E3的一物理參數候選範圍表示GB13。該測量值候選範圍RM13基於該物理參數候選範圍表示GB13、該感測器測量範圍表示GQ1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GQ11和用於轉換該物理參數候選範圍表示GB13的一資料編碼操作ZR17來用該指定測量值格式HQ11而被預設,並由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…中的一測量值候選範圍碼EH13所代表。 The trigger application function specification GBL1 includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GB13 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E3. The measured value candidate range RM13 is used based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GB13, the sensor measurement range representation GQ1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ11 and a data encoding operation ZR17 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GB13 The specified measurement value format HQ11 is preset and represented by a measurement value candidate range code EH13 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11 , EH12 , . . .

該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…分別由複數不同物理參數參考範圍碼所代表。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RC1E的該複數不同物理參數參考範圍碼被配置以分別等於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…。該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL、該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E3是不同的,並分別由該測量值應用範圍RM1L、該測量值候選範圍RM12和該測量值候選範圍RM13所代表。例如,該電子標籤350包含該記憶體單元25Y1。 The complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, ... are respectively represented by complex different physical parameter reference range codes. For example, the complex different physical parameter reference range codes of the rated physical parameter range RC1E are configured to be equal to the complex different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, . . . respectively. The physical parameter application range RC1EL, the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2, and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E3 are different, and are represented by the measurement value application range RM1L, the measurement value candidate range RM12, and the measurement value candidate range RM13, respectively. For example, the electronic tag 350 includes the memory unit 25Y1.

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能規格GBL1用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RC1E和該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RC1E1、RC1E2、…。該額定測量值範圍RC1N、該額定範圍界限值對DC1A、該複數不同測量值參 考範圍RM11、RM12、…、及該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EH11、EH12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。該觸發應用功能FB11選擇自複數不同觸發作用功能。該儲存單元250儲存該觸發應用功能規格GBL1。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function specification GBL1 is used to represent the nominal physical parameter range RC1E and the complex different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1 , RC1E2 , . . . The rated measurement value range RC1N, the rated range limit value pair DC1A, the multiple different measurement value parameters The test ranges RM11, RM12, . . . and the reference range codes EH11, EH12, . The trigger application function FB11 is selected from multiple different trigger functions. The storage unit 250 stores the trigger application function specification GBL1.

該處理單元230根據該觸發應用功能規格GBL1來預先設定該額定範圍界限值對DC1A、該應用範圍界限值對DM1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該候選範圍界限值對DM1B、…。該第一感測訊號SM11包含感測資料。例如,該感測資料屬於該二進制資料類型。該處理單元230基於該感測資料來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得該第一測量值VM11。 The processing unit 230 presets the rated range limit value pair DC1A, the application range limit value pair DM1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T, the candidate range limit value pair DM1B, . . . according to the trigger application function specification GBL1. The first sensing signal SM11 includes sensing data. For example, the sensing data is of the binary data type. The processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11 in the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the sensing data.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元397接收該第一控制訊號SC11。在該操作單元397基於該第一控制訊號SC11來執行一訊號產生操作BY11以導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該操作單元397響應該訊號產生操作BY11來輸出該控制回應訊號SE11。例如,該控制回應訊號SE11輸送一肯定操作報告RL11。該肯定操作報告RL11表示該第一可變物理參數QU1A成功地進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一操作情況EP11。在該處理單元230於該指定時間TW11之內從該控制回應訊號SE11獲得該肯定操作報告RL11的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該肯定操作報告RL11來執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的該指定實際操作BJ11。該操作單元397藉由產生該控制回應訊號SE11來回應該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, the operation unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11. Under the condition that the operation unit 397 performs a signal generation operation BY11 based on the first control signal SC11 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the operation unit 397 responds to the signal generation operation BY11 to output the control response signal SE11. For example, the control response signal SE11 sends a positive operation report RL11. The positive operation report RL11 indicates an operation situation EP11 in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A successfully enters the physical parameter target range RD1ET. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the positive operation report RL11 from the control response signal SE11 within the specified time TW11, the processing unit 230 executes the first variable physical operation based on the obtained positive operation report RL11 The specified actual operation BJ11 is related to the parameter QU1A. The operation unit 397 responds to the first control signal SC11 by generating the control response signal SE11.

在一些實施例中,在該第一邏輯決定PH11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該對應物理參數範圍RW1EL。在該第二邏輯決定PH21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該第二訊號產生操作BS21以產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該第二控制訊號SC12,該第二控制訊號SC12不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the first logical decision PH11 is negative, the processing unit 230 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located. Under the condition that the second logical decision PH21 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to perform the second signal generation for the trigger application function FB11 Operating BS21 to generate the second control signal SC12 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A, the second control signal SC12 being different from the first control signal SC11.

例如,該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2被配置以對應於包含於該額定物理參數範圍RD1E中的該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。在該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2不同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內。例如,該操作單元397從該輸出單元240接收該第二控制訊號SC12。該操作單元397響應該第二控制訊號SC12來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內。該第二控制訊號SC12藉由輸送該測量值候選範圍碼EM12和該候選範圍界限值對DN1B的其中之一來起到指示該測量值候選範圍RN12的作用。 For example, the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 is configured to correspond to the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 contained in the rated physical parameter range RD1E. Under the condition that the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. For example, the operation unit 397 receives the second control signal SC12 from the output unit 240 . The operation unit 397 causes the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 in response to the second control signal SC12. The second control signal SC12 serves to indicate the measurement value candidate range RN12 by sending one of the measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the candidate range limit value pair DN1B.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BA13而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於 的該第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該第三控制訊號SC13,並使用該儲存單元250以將該第二特定測量值範圍碼EH17指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A。例如,該第三控制訊號SC13不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 determines based on the check operation BA13 that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in Under the condition of the second specific physical parameter range RC1E7, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the third control signal SC13 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A, and uses the storage unit 250 to store The second specific measurement value range code EH17 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM1A. For example, the third control signal SC13 is different from the first control signal SC11.

例如,該第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7被配置以對應於包含於複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一特定物理參數範圍RD1E7。在該特定物理參數範圍RD1E7不同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該第三控制訊號SC13用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E7之內。 For example, the second specific physical parameter range RC1E7 is configured to correspond to a specific physical parameter range RD1E7 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . Under the condition that the specific physical parameter range RD1E7 is different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the third control signal SC13 is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the specific physical parameter range RD1E7.

例如,該操作單元397從該輸出單元240接收該第三控制訊號SC13。該操作單元397響應該第三控制訊號SC13來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E7之內。該特定物理參數範圍RD1E7由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中的一特定測量值範圍RN17所代表。該特定測量值範圍RN17由一特定測量值範圍碼EM17所代表,並具有一特定範圍界限值對DN1G,藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EM17被配置以指示該特定物理參數範圍RD1E7。該第三控制訊號SC13藉由輸送該特定測量值範圍碼EM17和該特定範圍界限值對DN1G的其中之一來起到指示該特定測量值範圍RN17的作用。 For example, the operation unit 397 receives the third control signal SC13 from the output unit 240 . The operation unit 397 causes the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the specific physical parameter range RD1E7 in response to the third control signal SC13. The specific physical parameter range RD1E7 is represented by a specific measurement value range RN17 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . The specific measured value range RN17 is represented by a specific measured value range code EM17 and has a specific range limit value pair DN1G, whereby the measured value candidate range code EM17 is configured to indicate the specific physical parameter range RD1E7. The third control signal SC13 serves to indicate the specific measurement value range RN17 by sending one of the specific measurement value range code EM17 and the specific range limit value pair DN1G.

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以取得所預設的該控制目標 裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L、所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11和所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,並基於所取得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所取得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11和所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來取得該第一記憶體位址FM1L。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所取得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L來導致該操作單元297提供該第一寫入請求訊息WB1L。例如,該第一寫入請求訊息WB1L輸送所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L和所取得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L,並用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第一記憶體位置PM1L儲存所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 In some embodiments, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control target The device identifier HA1T, the preset application range limit value pair DM1L, the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11, and the preset measurement value application range code EH1L, and based on the obtained The control target device identifier HA1T, the acquired measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11 and the acquired measurement value apply the range code EH1L to acquire the first memory address FM1L. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 causes the operation unit 297 to provide the first write request message WB1L based on the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L and the obtained first memory address FM1L. For example, the first write request message WB1L conveys the obtained application range limit value pair DM1L and the obtained first memory address FM1L, and is used to cause the memory cell 25Y1 to store in the first memory location PM1L The limits of the application range obtained are for DM1L.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以取得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T、所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11和所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L,並基於所取得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所取得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11和所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來取得該第二記憶體位址FV1L。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所取得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L來導致該操作單元297提供該第二寫入請求訊息WA1L。例如,該第二寫入請求訊息WA1L輸送所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所取得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L,並用於導致該記憶體單元 25Y1在該第二記憶體位置PV1L儲存所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset control data code CK1T, and the preset control data code type identifier HK11 and the preset measured value application range code EH1L, and obtained based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 and the obtained measured value application range code EH1L The second memory address FV1L. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 causes the operation unit 297 to provide the second write request message WA1L based on the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FV1L. For example, the second write request message WA1L conveys the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FV1L, and is used to cause the memory cell 25Y1 stores the acquired control data code CK1T in the second memory location PV1L.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240的其中之一包含耦合於該處理單元230的一使用者介面區AP11。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230依靠該使用者介面區AP11來獲得一輸入資料DG11和一輸入資料DG12,基於該輸入資料DG11來取得所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L,並基於該輸入資料DG12來取得所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T。例如,該處理單元230藉由對該輸入資料DG11執行一資料編碼操作ZR2A來取得所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L,並藉由對該輸入資料DG12執行一資料編碼操作ZR2B來取得所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T。 In some embodiments, one of the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 includes a user interface area AP11 coupled to the processing unit 230 . Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 relies on the user interface area AP11 to obtain an input data DG11 and an input data DG12, and obtains the preset application range limit value pair DM1L based on the input data DG11, And based on the input data DG12, the preset control data code CK1T is obtained. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset limit value pair DM1L of the application range by performing a data encoding operation ZR2A on the input data DG11, and obtains the preset limit value pair DM1L by performing a data encoding operation ZR2B on the input data DG12 The preset control data code CK1T.

該輸入單元270接收用於操作該使用者介面區AP11的一使用者輸入操作BU15,並響應該使用者輸入操作BU15來導致該處理單元230從該輸入單元270獲得該輸入資料DG11。該輸入單元270接收用於操作該使用者介面區AP11的一使用者輸入操作BU16,並響應該使用者輸入操作BU16來導致該處理單元230從該輸入單元270獲得該輸入資料DG12。 The input unit 270 receives a user input operation BU15 for operating the user interface area AP11 , and in response to the user input operation BU15 causes the processing unit 230 to obtain the input data DG11 from the input unit 270 . The input unit 270 receives a user input operation BU16 for operating the user interface area AP11 , and in response to the user input operation BU16 causes the processing unit 230 to obtain the input data DG12 from the input unit 270 .

在一些實施例中,該第一感測單元260和該輸出單元240的其中之一包含耦合於該處理單元230的一電應用目標WK11。該電應用目標WK11基於一目標順序位置UK11而被安排於一電應用目標群組GK11中。例如,該電應用目標群組GK11位於該物理參數形成區AT11中。該 第二可變物理參數QP1A基於該目標順序位置UK11而被特徵化。該電應用目標WK11是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一。在該電應用目標WK11是該顯示目標的條件下,該電應用目標群組GK11是一顯示目標群組。在該電應用目標WK11是該感測目標的條件下,該電應用目標群組GK11是一感測目標群組。該目標順序位置UK11由一目標位置號碼NB11所代表。例如,該第一感測單元260和該輸出單元240的其中之一包含該物理參數形成區AT11。 In some embodiments, one of the first sensing unit 260 and the output unit 240 includes an electrical application target WK11 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The electrical application target WK11 is arranged in an electrical application target group GK11 based on a target sequence position UK11. For example, the electrical application target group GK11 is located in the physical parameter forming area AT11. Should The second variable physical parameter QP1A is characterized based on the target ordinal position UK11. The electrical application target WK11 is one of a display target and a sensing target. Under the condition that the electrical application target WK11 is the display target, the electrical application target group GK11 is a display target group. Under the condition that the electrical application target WK11 is the sensing target, the electrical application target group GK11 is a sensing target group. The target sequential position UK11 is represented by a target position number NB11. For example, one of the first sensing unit 260 and the output unit 240 includes the physical parameter forming area AT11.

該第一感測單元260藉由感測用於選擇該電應用目標WK11的一使用者輸入操作BU13來感測處於一限制條件FP1M的該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生用於獲得該第一測量值VM11的該第一感測訊號SM11。例如,該限制條件FP1M是該第二可變物理參數QP1A等於該目標順序位置UK11。例如,該第一感測單元260接收用於選擇該電應用目標WK11的該使用者輸入操作BU13,並響應該使用者輸入操作BU13來感測處於該限制條件FP1M的該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SM11來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得等於該目標位置號碼NB11的該第一測量值VM11。 The first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A under a restriction condition FP1M by sensing a user input operation BU13 for selecting the electrical application target WK11 to generate the second variable physical parameter QP1A for obtaining the first The first sensing signal SM11 of a measurement value VM11. For example, the constraint FP1M is that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to the target ordinal position UK11. For example, the first sensing unit 260 receives the user input operation BU13 for selecting the electrical application target WK11, and responds to the user input operation BU13 to sense the second variable physical parameter under the restriction condition FP1M QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. The processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11 equal to the target position number NB11 in the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the first sensing signal SM11.

該控制裝置210是一計算裝置、一通訊裝置、一使用者裝置、一移動裝置、一遙控器、一電子裝置、一可攜式裝置、一桌上型裝置、一相對固定裝置、一固定裝置、一智慧電話和其任意組合的其中之一。該電子標籤350是一被動式電子標籤、一主動式電子標籤、一半主動式 電子標籤、一無線電子標籤和一有線電子標籤的其中之一。例如,該控制裝置210通過在該輸出單元240和該操作單元397之間的一實際鏈接而向該控制目標裝置330傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。該實際鏈接是一有線鏈接和一無線鏈接的其中之一。 The control device 210 is a computing device, a communication device, a user device, a mobile device, a remote control, an electronic device, a portable device, a desktop device, a relatively fixed device, a fixed device , one of a smart phone, and any combination thereof. The electronic tag 350 is a passive electronic tag, an active electronic tag, a semi-active electronic tag One of an electronic tag, a wireless electronic tag and a wired electronic tag. For example, the control device 210 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 through a physical link between the output unit 240 and the operation unit 397 . The actual link is one of a wired link and a wireless link.

在一些實施例中,該額定物理參數範圍RC1E包含一特定物理參數QP11,並由該額定測量值範圍RC1N所代表。該第一感測單元260感測處於該拘束條件FP11的該第二可變物理參數QP1A以提供該第一感測訊號SM11到該處理單元230。例如,該拘束條件FP11是該第二可變物理參數QP1A等於該特定物理參數QP11。在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SM11來估計該特定物理參數QP11以獲得該第一測量值VM11。例如,在該特定物理參數QP11等於該目標順序位置UK11的條件下,該拘束條件FP11等於該限制條件FP1M。 In some embodiments, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E includes a specific physical parameter QP11 and is represented by the nominal measured value range RC1N. The first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A under the constraint condition FP11 to provide the first sensing signal SM11 to the processing unit 230 . For example, the constraint condition FP11 is that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to the specific physical parameter QP11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 estimates the specific physical parameter QP11 based on the first sensing signal SM11 to obtain the first measurement value VM11. For example, under the condition that the specific physical parameter QP11 is equal to the target ordinal position UK11, the constraint condition FP11 is equal to the restriction condition FP1M.

該第一控制訊號SC11是一電訊號SP11和一光訊號SQ11的其中之一。該輸出單元240包含一輸出組件450、一顯示組件460和一輸出組件455。該輸出組件450耦合於該處理單元230,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11的條件下,用於輸出該電訊號SP11。例如,該輸出組件450是一傳輸組件。當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該顯示組件460顯示該第一狀態指示LA11。在該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L且該處理單元230藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PH11而 確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於該碼差異DA11來導致該顯示組件460將該第一狀態指示LA11改變成該第二狀態指示LA12。 The first control signal SC11 is one of an electrical signal SP11 and an optical signal SQ11. The output unit 240 includes an output component 450 , a display component 460 and an output component 455 . The output element 450 is coupled to the processing unit 230 and is used for outputting the electrical signal SP11 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11. For example, the output assembly 450 is a transmission assembly. When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the display component 460 displays the first state indication LA11. After the first specific measurement range code EH14 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PH11 The processing unit 230 causes the display component 460 to change the first state indication LA11 to the second state based on the code difference DA11 under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RC1EL Indicates LA12.

該顯示組件460耦合於該處理單元230,用於顯示與該第一測量值VM11相關的一測量資訊LY11,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下,用於輸出該光訊號SQ11。例如,該第一感測單元260和該顯示組件460的其中之一包含該電應用目標群組GK11。該輸出組件455耦合於該處理單元230。例如,該處理單元230被配置以導致該輸出組件455向該控制目標裝置330傳輸一物理參數訊號SB11。該第一可變物理參數QU1A基於該物理參數訊號SB11而被形成。例如,該輸出組件455是一傳輸組件。 The display element 460 is coupled to the processing unit 230 for displaying a measurement information LY11 related to the first measurement value VM11, and for outputting the light under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11 Signal SQ11. For example, one of the first sensing unit 260 and the display element 460 includes the electrical application target group GK11. The output component 455 is coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the output element 455 to transmit a physical parameter signal SB11 to the control target device 330 . The first variable physical parameter QU1A is formed based on the physical parameter signal SB11. For example, the output assembly 455 is a transmission assembly.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210耦合於該伺服器280,並進一步包含耦合於該第一感測單元260的一物理參數形成單元290。例如,在該第二可變物理參數QP1A要由該物理參數形成單元290產生的條件下,該物理參數形成單元290產生該第二可變物理參數QP1A。該輸入單元270包含一輸入組件440和一輸入組件445。該輸入組件440耦合於該處理單元230。例如,該輸入組件440和該顯示組件460的其中之一包含該使用者介面區AP11。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 is coupled to the server 280 and further includes a physical parameter forming unit 290 coupled to the first sensing unit 260 . For example, under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is to be generated by the physical parameter forming unit 290, the physical parameter forming unit 290 generates the second variable physical parameter QP1A. The input unit 270 includes an input element 440 and an input element 445 . The input component 440 is coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, one of the input component 440 and the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP11.

該輸入組件445耦合於該處理單元230,用於接收該控制回應訊號SE11,並包含一接收組件4451和一讀取器4452。該接收組件4451和該讀取器4452皆耦合於 該處理單元230。該控制回應訊號SE11是一電訊號LP11和一光訊號LQ11的其中之一。在該控制回應訊號SE11是該電訊號LP11的條件下,該接收組件4451用於接收該電訊號LP11。在該控制回應訊號SE11是該光訊號LQ11的條件下,該讀取器4452用於接收該光訊號LQ11。例如,該電子標籤350、該儲存單元250和該伺服器280的其中之一中包含該記憶體單元25Y1。 The input element 445 is coupled to the processing unit 230 for receiving the control response signal SE11 , and includes a receiving element 4451 and a reader 4452 . Both the receiving component 4451 and the reader 4452 are coupled to The processing unit 230 . The control response signal SE11 is one of an electrical signal LP11 and an optical signal LQ11. Under the condition that the control response signal SE11 is the electrical signal LP11, the receiving element 4451 is used for receiving the electrical signal LP11. Under the condition that the control response signal SE11 is the optical signal LQ11, the reader 4452 is used for receiving the optical signal LQ11. For example, one of the electronic tag 350 , the storage unit 250 and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1 .

該應用環境EX11、該輸入組件440、該顯示組件460和該物理參數形成單元290的其中之一具有該物理參數形成區AT11。該處理單元230藉由執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的一指定功能操作BH12來導致該物理參數形成區AT11具有該第二可變物理參數QP1A,並藉此導致該第一感測單元260感測處於該拘束條件FP11的該第二可變物理參數QP1A。該電子標籤350、該儲存單元250和該伺服器280的其中之一中包含該記憶體單元25Y1。該第一感測單元260、該儲存單元250、該輸出組件450、該顯示組件460、該輸出組件455、該輸入組件440、該接收組件4451、該讀取器4452和該物理參數形成單元290皆受該處理單元230控制。例如,該第一感測單元260和該顯示組件460的其中之一包含具有該電應用目標群組GK11的該物理參數形成區AT11。 One of the application environment EX11, the input component 440, the display component 460 and the physical parameter forming unit 290 has the physical parameter forming area AT11. The processing unit 230 causes the physical parameter forming area AT11 to have the second variable physical parameter QP1A by executing a designated function operation BH12 for the trigger application function FB11, and thereby causes the first sensing unit 260 to sense the second variable physical parameter QP1A. The second variable physical parameter QP1A under the constraint condition FP11 is measured. One of the electronic tag 350 , the storage unit 250 and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1 . The first sensing unit 260 , the storage unit 250 , the output component 450 , the display component 460 , the output component 455 , the input component 440 , the receiving component 4451 , the reader 4452 and the physical parameter forming unit 290 All are controlled by the processing unit 230 . For example, one of the first sensing unit 260 and the display element 460 includes the physical parameter forming area AT11 having the electrical application target group GK11.

該第二可變物理參數QP1A是一第二可變電性參數、一第二可變力學參數、一第二可變光學參數、一第二可變溫度、一第二可變電壓、一第二可變電流、一第二可變電功率、一第二可變電阻、一第二可變電容、一 第二可變電感、一第二可變頻率、一第二時鐘時間、一第二可變時間長度、一第二可變亮度、一第二可變光強度、一第二可變音量、一第二可變資料流量、一第二可變振幅、一第二可變空間位置、一第二可變位移、一第二可變順序位置、一第二可變角度、一第二可變空間長度、一第二可變距離、一第二可變平移速度、一第二可變角速度、一第二可變加速度、一第二可變力、一第二可變壓力和一第二可變機械功率的其中之一。 The second variable physical parameter QP1A is a second variable electrical parameter, a second variable mechanical parameter, a second variable optical parameter, a second variable temperature, a second variable voltage, a first variable Two variable currents, one second variable electric power, one second variable resistor, one second variable capacitor, one A second variable inductor, a second variable frequency, a second clock time, a second variable time length, a second variable brightness, a second variable light intensity, a second variable volume, a second variable data flow, a second variable amplitude, a second variable spatial position, a second variable displacement, a second variable sequence position, a second variable angle, a second variable Spatial length, a second variable distance, a second variable translation velocity, a second variable angular velocity, a second variable acceleration, a second variable force, a second variable pressure, and a second variable One of the variable mechanical power.

在一些實施例中,該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變電壓的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電壓範圍和一相對低電壓範圍。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變電流的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電流範圍和一相對低電流範圍。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變電阻的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電阻範圍和一相對低電阻範圍。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively high physical parameter range Another of the low physical parameter ranges. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable voltage, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high voltage range and a relatively low voltage range, respectively. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable current, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high current range and a relatively low current range, respectively. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable resistor, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high resistance range and a relatively low resistance range, respectively.

在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變空間位置的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高位置範圍和一相對低位置範圍。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變壓力的條 件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高壓力範圍和一相對低壓力範圍。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變長度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高長度範圍和一相對低長度範圍。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變角速度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高角速度範圍和一相對低角速度範圍。 Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable spatial position, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high position range and a relatively low position range, respectively. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is the bar of the second variable pressure Under these conditions, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high pressure range and a relatively low pressure range, respectively. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable length, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high length range and a relatively low length range, respectively. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable angular velocity, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high angular velocity range and a relatively low angular velocity range, respectively.

例如,該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。例如,該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。例如,該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該物理參數候選範圍RC1E3是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。 For example, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 is one of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another. For example, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the second specific physical parameter range RC1E7 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range of the other. For example, the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E3 is one of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another.

在一些實施例中,在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內的條件下,該第二可變物理參數QP1A處於一第一參考狀態。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是於該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4之內的條件下,該第二可變物理參數QP1A處於一第二參考狀態。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是於該物理參數候 選範圍RC1E2之內的條件下,該第二可變物理參數QP1A處於一第三參考狀態。在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是於該第二特定物理參數範圍RC1E7之內的條件下,該第二可變物理參數QP1A處於一第四參考狀態。該第一參考狀態相同或不同於該第二參考狀態。該第二參考狀態不同於該第三參考狀態。該第一參考狀態不同於該第四參考狀態。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is within the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is in a first reference state. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is within the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is in a second reference state. In the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the physical parameter candidate Under the condition within the selection range RC1E2, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is in a third reference state. Under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is within the second specific physical parameter range RC1E7, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is in a fourth reference state. The first reference state is the same as or different from the second reference state. The second reference state is different from the third reference state. The first reference state is different from the fourth reference state.

例如,該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值應用範圍RM1L基於該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RC1N中。該測量值候選範圍碼EH12是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值候選範圍RM12基於該測量值候選範圍碼EH12而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RC1N中。該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RD1N中。 For example, the measurement value application range code EH1L is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value application range RM1L is arranged in the nominal measured value range RC1N based on the measured value application range code EH1L. The measurement value candidate range code EH12 is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value candidate range RM12 is arranged in the nominal measured value range RC1N based on the measured value candidate range code EH12. The measurement value target range code EM1T is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value target range RN1T is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N based on the measured value target range code EM1T.

例如,該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變電壓。該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL、該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2分別是一第一電壓參考範圍、一第二電壓參考範圍和一第三電壓參考範圍。例如,在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二可變位移的條件下,該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL、該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2分別是一第一位移參考範圍、一第二位移參考範圍和一第三位移參考範圍。例如,在該第二可變物理參數QP1A是該第二時鐘時間的條件下,該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL、該第一 特定物理參數範圍RC1E4和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2分別是一第一時鐘時間參考範圍、一第二時鐘時間參考範圍和一第三時鐘時間參考範圍。 For example, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable voltage. The physical parameter application range RC1EL, the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are a first voltage reference range, a second voltage reference range and a third voltage reference range, respectively. For example, under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable displacement, the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are respectively a first displacement reference range, a second displacement reference range and a third displacement reference range. For example, under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the second clock time, the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the first The specific physical parameter range RC1E4 and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are respectively a first clock time reference range, a second clock time reference range and a third clock time reference range.

例如,該操作單元297包含耦合於該處理單元230的一通訊介面單元246。該處理單元230通過該通訊介面單元246而耦合於該網路410。例如,該通訊介面單元246受該處理單元230控制,並包含耦合於該處理單元230的該輸出組件450和耦合於該處理單元230的該接收組件4451。該處理單元230通過該通訊介面單元246和該網路410而耦合於該伺服器280。 For example, the operation unit 297 includes a communication interface unit 246 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the network 410 through the communication interface unit 246 . For example, the communication interface unit 246 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and includes the output component 450 coupled to the processing unit 230 and the receiving component 4451 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 through the communication interface unit 246 and the network 410 .

請參閱第17圖、第18圖和第19圖。第17圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8026的示意圖。第18圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8027的示意圖。第19圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8028的示意圖。如第17圖、第18圖和第19圖所示,該實施結構8026、該實施結構8027和該實施結構8028的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240,並耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figures 17, 18 and 19. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8026 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8027 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8028 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIGS. 17 , 18 and 19 , each of the implementation structure 8026 , the implementation structure 8027 , and the implementation structure 8028 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 , and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 , and is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能FB11相關於該記憶體單元25Y1。該記憶體單元25Y1儲存該控制 資料碼CK1T。該控制資料碼CK1T是一控制資訊碼CM12、一控制資訊碼CM13、一控制資訊碼CM14和一控制資訊碼CM15的其中之一。該控制訊息CG11是一控制資料訊息CN12、一控制資料訊息CN13、一控制資料訊息CN14和一控制資料訊息CN15的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function FB11 is associated with the memory cell 25Y1. The memory unit 25Y1 stores the control Data code CK1T. The control data code CK1T is one of a control information code CM12, a control information code CM13, a control information code CM14 and a control information code CM15. The control message CG11 is one of a control data message CN12, a control data message CN13, a control data message CN14 and a control data message CN15.

在該控制資料碼CK1T是該控制資訊碼CM12的條件下,該第一控制訊號SC11是輸送該控制資料訊息CN12的一指令訊號SW12。該控制資訊碼CM12和該控制資料訊息CN12皆包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入由該測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 Under the condition that the control data code CK1T is the control information code CM12, the first control signal SC11 is a command signal SW12 for transmitting the control data message CN12. Both the control information code CM12 and the control data message CN12 include the measured value target range code EM1T. The first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target measurement range RN1T by delivering the target range code EM1T of the measurement value, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the target range of measurement values RN1T represented by the first control signal SC11 The target range of this physical parameter is RD1ET.

在該控制資料碼CK1T是該控制資訊碼CM13的條件下,該第一控制訊號SC11是輸送該控制資料訊息CN13的一指令訊號SW13。該控制資訊碼CM13和該控制資料訊息CN13皆包含該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和該控制碼CC1T。例如,該控制資訊碼CM13和該控制資料訊息CN13皆進一步包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入由該測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 Under the condition that the control data code CK1T is the control information code CM13, the first control signal SC11 is a command signal SW13 for transmitting the control data message CN13. Both the control information code CM13 and the control data message CN13 include the target range limit value pair DN1T, the rated range limit value pair DD1A and the control code CC1T. For example, both the control information code CM13 and the control data message CN13 further include the measurement value target range code EM1T. The first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the measurement value target range RN1T by delivering the target range limit pair DN1T, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the measurement value target range RN1T represented by the measurement value target range RN1T The target range of this physical parameter is RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,在該控制資料碼CK1T是 該控制資訊碼CM14的條件下,該第一控制訊號SC11是輸送該控制資料訊息CN14的一指令訊號SW14。該控制資訊碼CM14和該控制資料訊息CN14皆包含一相對參考範圍碼ZB11。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該相對參考範圍碼ZB11來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入由該測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 In some embodiments, the control data code CK1T is Under the condition of the control information code CM14, the first control signal SC11 is a command signal SW14 for transmitting the control data message CN14. Both the control information code CM14 and the control data message CN14 include a relative reference range code ZB11. The first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the measurement value target range RN1T by delivering the relative reference range code ZB11, and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the measurement value target range RN1T represented by the first control signal SC11 The physical parameter target range RD1ET.

例如,該操作單元397包含一定時器339。該定時器339用於測量該可變時間長度LF1A,並被配置以符合一定時器規格FT11。該控制資料碼CK1T和該控制訊息CG11皆進一步包含該時間長度值CL1T。該處理單元230基於該參考時間長度LJ1T和該定時器規格FT11來以一指定計數值格式HH21設定該時間長度值CL1T,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T來導致該輸出單元240執行該第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生輸送該時間長度值CL1T的該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該指定計數值格式HH21基於一指定位元數目UY21而被特徵化。 For example, the operation unit 397 includes a timer 339 . The timer 339 is used to measure the variable time length LF1A and is configured to conform to a timer specification FT11. Both the control data code CK1T and the control message CG11 further include the time length value CL1T. The processing unit 230 sets the time length value CL1T in a specified count value format HH21 based on the reference time length LJ1T and the timer specification FT11, and causes the output unit 240 to execute the first step based on the obtained control data code CK1T A signal generating operation BS11 is used to generate the first control signal SC11 which conveys the time length value CL1T. For example, the specified count value format HH21 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY21.

該觸發應用功能規格GBL1包含一時間長度表示GB1KJ。該時間長度表示GB1KJ用於表示該參考時間長度LJ1T。例如,該時間長度值CL1T基於該時間長度表示GB1KJ、該定時器規格FT11和用於轉換該時間長度表示GB1KJ的一資料編碼操作ZR1KJ來用該指定計數值格式HH21而被預設。該儲存單元250儲存包含該時間長度值CL1T的該控制資料碼CK1T。該處理單元230被配置以從該儲存單元250獲得該控制資料碼CK1T。 The trigger application function specification GBL1 includes a time length representation GB1KJ. The time length representation GB1KJ is used to represent the reference time length LJ1T. For example, the time length value CL1T is preset with the specified count value format HH21 based on the time length representation GB1KJ, the timer specification FT11 and a data encoding operation ZR1KJ for converting the time length representation GB1KJ. The storage unit 250 stores the control data code CK1T including the time length value CL1T. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the control data code CK1T from the storage unit 250 .

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330儲存一物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T。在該控制資料碼CK1T是該控制資訊碼CM15的條件下,該第一控制訊號SC11是輸送該控制資料訊息CN15的一指令訊號SW15。該控制資訊碼CM15和該控制資料訊息CN15皆包含一時間值目標範圍碼EL1T和一時鐘參考時間值NR11。該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T被預設。在該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用,並用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入由該測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 stores a physical parameter target range code UQ1T. Under the condition that the control data code CK1T is the control information code CM15, the first control signal SC11 is a command signal SW15 for transmitting the control data message CN15. Both the control information code CM15 and the control data message CN15 include a time value target range code EL1T and a clock reference time value NR11. The time value target range code EL1T is preset. Under the condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the first control signal SC11 transmits the preset time value target range code EL1T to instruct the measurement The value target range RN1T acts and is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by the measured value target range RN1T.

該操作單元397進一步包含一定時器342。該定時器342用於測量一時鐘時間TH1A,並被配置以符合一定時器規格FT21。該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關於該時鐘時間TH1A。該時鐘時間TH1A基於一時鐘參考時間TR11而被特徵化。該觸發事件EQ11在一觸發時間TT11發生。該觸發時間TT11是一目前時間。該時鐘參考時間值NR11基於該時鐘參考時間TR11和該定時器規格FT21來以一指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。該時鐘參考時間TR11與該觸發時間TT11的一時間差異在一預設時間長度內。該定時器規格FT11和該定時器規格FT21皆被預設。例如,該指定計數值格式HH25基於一指定位元數目UY25而被特徵化。 The operation unit 397 further includes a timer 342 . The timer 342 is used to measure a clock time TH1A and is configured to conform to a timer specification FT21. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH1A. The clock time TH1A is characterized based on a clock reference time TR11. The trigger event EQ11 occurs at a trigger time TT11. The trigger time TT11 is a current time. The clock reference time value NR11 is preset in a specified count value format HH25 based on the clock reference time TR11 and the timer specification FT21. A time difference between the clock reference time TR11 and the trigger time TT11 is within a predetermined time length. Both the timer specification FT11 and the timer specification FT21 are preset. For example, the specified count value format HH25 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY25.

該時鐘時間TH1A基於一時間目標區間 HR1ET而被特徵化。該時間目標區間HR1ET包含該時鐘參考時間TR11,並由一時間值目標範圍RQ1T所代表。該時間值目標範圍RQ1T基於該定時器規格FT21來用該指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T被配置以指示該時間目標區間HR1ET,並基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T代表該第一可變物理參數QU1A被期望在該時間目標區間HR1ET內處於的一物理參數目標範圍RK1ET。該物理參數目標範圍RK1ET選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。 The clock time TH1A is based on a time target interval HR1ET was characterized. The time target interval HR1ET includes the clock reference time TR11 and is represented by a time value target range RQ1T. The time value target range RQ1T is preset with the specified count value format HH25 based on the timer specification FT21. The time value target range code EL1T is configured to indicate the time target interval HR1ET, and is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. The physical parameter target range code UQ1T represents a physical parameter target range RK1ET in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time target interval HR1ET. The physical parameter target range RK1ET is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . .

在一些實施例中,在該第二可變物理參數QP1A相同於該時鐘時間TH1A的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該時鐘時間TH1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11,並作為一定時器。例如,在該第二可變物理參數QP1A相同於該時鐘時間TH1A的條件下,該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L相同於該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來執行該資料確定AE1A以確定相同於該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the same as the clock time TH1A, the first sensing unit 260 senses the clock time TH1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11 as a timer. For example, under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the same as the clock time TH1A, the measured value application range code EH1L is the same as the time value target range code EL1T. The processing unit 230 performs the data determination AE1A in response to the trigger event EQ11 to determine the measured value application range code EH1L that is the same as the time value target range code EL1T.

例如,在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L的該第二資料獲取AG1A以獲得相同於該控制資料碼CK1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。在所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T包含所預設的該時鐘參考時間值NR11和所預設 的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T來導致該輸出單元240執行該第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生輸送所獲得的該時鐘參考時間值NR11和所獲得的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T的該第一控制訊號SC11。 For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 executes the second data using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L Obtain AG1A to obtain the control application code UA1T which is the same as the control data code CK1T. The obtained control data code CK1T includes the preset clock reference time value NR11 and the preset Under the condition of the time value target range code EL1T, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to execute the first signal generation operation BS11 based on the obtained control data code CK1T to generate the clock reference time value obtained by transmitting NR11 and the obtained first control signal SC11 of the time value target range code EL1T.

例如,該物理參數控制功能規格GBL1包含一時鐘時間表示GB1TR。該時鐘時間表示GB1TR用於表示該時鐘參考時間TR11。該時鐘參考時間值NR11基於該時鐘時間表示GB1TR、該定時器規格FT21和用於轉換該時鐘時間表示GB1TR的一資料編碼操作ZR1TR來用該指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。 For example, the physical parameter control function specification GBL1 includes a clock time representation GB1TR. The clock time representation GB1TR is used to represent the clock reference time TR11. The clock reference time value NR11 is preset with the specified count value format HH25 based on the clock time representation GB1TR, the timer specification FT21 and a data encoding operation ZR1TR for converting the clock time representation GB1TR.

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330進一步包含耦合於該操作單元397的一儲存單元332。該儲存單元332具有一記憶體位置YM1T和不同於該記憶體位置YM1T的一記憶體位置YX1T。例如,該記憶體位置YM1T基於一記憶體位址AM1T而被識別。該記憶體位置YX1T基於一記憶體位址AX1T而被識別。該記憶體位址AM1T和該記憶體位址AX1T皆基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被預設。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 further includes a storage unit 332 coupled to the operation unit 397 . The storage unit 332 has a memory location YM1T and a memory location YX1T different from the memory location YM1T. For example, the memory location YM1T is identified based on a memory address AM1T. The memory location YX1T is identified based on a memory address AX1T. Both the memory address AM1T and the memory address AX1T are preset based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230依靠該使用者介面區AP11來從該輸入單元270獲得一輸入資料DJ11,對於該輸入資料DJ11執行一資料編碼操作EJ11以確定所預設的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T,被配置以獲得所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,並基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來取得該記憶體位址 AM1T。例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該輸入單元270接收用於操作該使用者介面區AP11的一使用者輸入操作JV11,並響應該使用者輸入操作JV11來提供該輸入資料DJ11到該處理單元230。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 relies on the user interface area AP11 to obtain an input data DJ11 from the input unit 270, and performs a data encoding operation EJ11 on the input data DJ11 to determine the preset target The range limit value pair DN1T is configured to obtain the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, and obtain the memory address based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T AM1T. For example, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JV11 for operating the user interface area AP11, and provides the input data DJ11 to the processing unit in response to the user input operation JV11 230.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所確定的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和所取得的該記憶體位址AM1T來導致該輸出單元240提供一寫入請求訊息WN1T到該操作單元397。該寫入請求訊息WN1T包含所確定的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和所取得的該記憶體位址AM1T。該操作單元397響應該寫入請求訊息WN1T來導致該儲存單元332在該記憶體位置YM1T儲存該目標範圍界限值對DN1T。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide a write request message WN1T to the operation unit 397 based on the determined target range limit pair DN1T and the acquired memory address AM1T . The write request message WN1T includes the determined target range limit value pair DN1T and the acquired memory address AM1T. The operation unit 397 causes the storage unit 332 to store the target range limit pair DN1T in the memory location YM1T in response to the write request message WN1T.

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230依靠該使用者介面區AP11來從該輸入單元270獲得一輸入資料DJ12,對於該輸入資料DJ12執行一資料編碼操作EJ12以確定所預設的該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來取得該記憶體位址AX1T。例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該輸入單元270接收用於操作該使用者介面區AP11的一使用者輸入操作JV12,並響應該使用者輸入操作JV12來提供該輸入資料DJ12到該處理單元230。 In some embodiments, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 relies on the user interface area AP11 to obtain an input data DJ12 from the input unit 270, and performs a data encoding operation EJ12 on the input data DJ12 to determine The preset control code CC1T is used to obtain the memory address AX1T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T. For example, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JV12 for operating the user interface area AP11, and provides the input data DJ12 to the processing unit in response to the user input operation JV12 230.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所確定的該控制碼CC1T和所取得的該記憶體位址AX1T來導致該輸出單元240提供一寫入請求訊息WC1T到該操作單元397。該寫入請求訊息WC1T包含所確定的該控 制碼CC1T和所取得的該記憶體位址AX1T。該操作單元397響應該寫入請求訊息WC1T來導致該儲存單元332在該記憶體位置YX1T儲存該控制碼CC1T。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide a write request message WC1T to the operation unit 397 based on the determined control code CC1T and the acquired memory address AX1T. The write request message WC1T contains the determined The system code CC1T and the obtained memory address AX1T. The operation unit 397 causes the storage unit 332 to store the control code CC1T in the memory location YX1T in response to the write request message WC1T.

該儲存單元332進一步具有一記憶體位置YN11。例如,該記憶體位置YN11基於一記憶體位址AN11而被識別。該記憶體位址AN11被預設。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230依靠該使用者介面區AP11來從該輸入單元270獲得一輸入資料DJ13,對於該輸入資料DJ13執行一資料編碼操作EJ13以確定所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並被配置以取得所預設的該記憶體位址AN11。例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該輸入單元270接收用於操作該使用者介面區AP11的一使用者輸入操作JV13,並響應該使用者輸入操作JV13來提供該輸入資料DJ13到該處理單元230。 The storage unit 332 further has a memory location YN11. For example, the memory location YN11 is identified based on a memory address AN11. The memory address AN11 is preset. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 relies on the user interface area AP11 to obtain an input data DJ13 from the input unit 270, and performs a data encoding operation EJ13 for the input data DJ13 to determine the preset rating The range limit value is paired with DD1A, and is configured to obtain the preset memory address AN11. For example, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JV13 for operating the user interface area AP11, and provides the input data DJ13 to the processing unit in response to the user input operation JV13 230.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所確定的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和所取得的該記憶體位址AN11來導致該輸出單元240提供該寫入請求訊息WD11到該操作單元397。該寫入請求訊息WD11包含所確定的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和所取得的該記憶體位址AN11。該操作單元397響應該寫入請求訊息WD11來導致該儲存單元332在該記憶體位置YN11儲存該額定範圍界限值對DD1A。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide the write request message WD11 to the operation unit 397 based on the determined pair of rated range limit values DD1A and the acquired memory address AN11 . The write request message WD11 includes the determined nominal range limit value pair DD1A and the acquired memory address AN11. The operation unit 397 causes the storage unit 332 to store the nominal range limit pair DD1A in the memory location YN11 in response to the write request message WD11.

請參閱第20圖和第21圖。第20圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8029的示意圖。第21圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施 結構8030的示意圖。如第20圖和第21圖所示,該實施結構8029和該實施結構8030的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。 See Figures 20 and 21. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8029 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 21 is an implementation of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 Schematic diagram of structure 8030. As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 , each structure of the implementation structure 8029 and the implementation structure 8030 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 .

在一些實施例中,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。在該處理單元230藉由執行該訊號產生控制GS11來導致該輸出單元240於該操作時間TD11之內產生該第一控制訊號SC11之後,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第二感測訊號SM12。例如,該第一感測單元260是一時間感測單元、一電性參數感測單元、一力學參數感測單元、一光學參數感測單元、一溫度感測單元、一濕度感測單元、一運動感測單元和一磁性參數感測單元的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. For example, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. After the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 within the operation time TD11 by executing the signal generation control GS11, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical The parameter QP1A is used to generate the second sensing signal SM12. For example, the first sensing unit 260 is a time sensing unit, an electrical parameter sensing unit, a mechanical parameter sensing unit, an optical parameter sensing unit, a temperature sensing unit, a humidity sensing unit, One of a motion sensing unit and a magnetic parameter sensing unit.

例如,該第一感測單元260包含耦合於該處理單元230的一感測組件261,並使用該感測組件261以產生該第一感測訊號SM11和該第二感測訊號SM12。該感測組件261屬於一感測器類型661,並是第一複數應用感測器的其中之一。該第一複數應用感測器包含一第一電壓感測器、一第一電流感測器、一第一電阻感測器、一第一電容 感測器、一第一電感感測器、一第一加速度計、一第一陀螺儀、一第一壓力轉能器、一第一應變規、一第一定時器、一第一光偵測器、一第一溫度感測器和一第一濕度感測器。例如,該感測組件261產生一感測訊號分量SM111。該第一第一感測訊號SM11包含該感測訊號分量SM111。例如,該控制資料碼CK1T進一步包含該時間長度值CL1T。該時間長度值CL1T基於該參考時間長度LJ1T而被預設。 For example, the first sensing unit 260 includes a sensing element 261 coupled to the processing unit 230, and uses the sensing element 261 to generate the first sensing signal SM11 and the second sensing signal SM12. The sensing element 261 is of a sensor type 661 and is one of the first plurality of application sensors. The first complex application sensor includes a first voltage sensor, a first current sensor, a first resistance sensor, and a first capacitor sensor, a first inductive sensor, a first accelerometer, a first gyroscope, a first pressure transducer, a first strain gauge, a first timer, a first light detection device, a first temperature sensor and a first humidity sensor. For example, the sensing element 261 generates a sensing signal component SM111. The first first sensing signal SM11 includes the sensing signal component SM111. For example, the control data code CK1T further includes the time length value CL1T. The time length value CL1T is preset based on the reference time length LJ1T.

該第一感測單元260進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一感測組件262,並使用該感測組件262以產生該第一感測訊號SM11和該第二感測訊號SM12。該感測組件262屬於一感測器類型662,並是第二複數應用感測器的其中之一。該感測器類型662不同於或獨立於該感測器類型661。該第二複數應用感測器包含一第二電壓感測器、一第二電流感測器、一第二電阻感測器、一第二電容感測器、一第二電感感測器、一第二加速度計、一第二陀螺儀、一第二壓力轉能器、一第二應變規、一第二定時器、一第二光偵測器、一第二溫度感測器和一第二濕度感測器。 The first sensing unit 260 further includes a sensing element 262 coupled to the processing unit 230, and uses the sensing element 262 to generate the first sensing signal SM11 and the second sensing signal SM12. The sensing element 262 is of a sensor type 662 and is one of the second plurality of application sensors. The sensor type 662 is different from or independent of the sensor type 661 . The second complex application sensor includes a second voltage sensor, a second current sensor, a second resistance sensor, a second capacitance sensor, a second inductance sensor, a second a second accelerometer, a second gyroscope, a second pressure transducer, a second strain gauge, a second timer, a second photodetector, a second temperature sensor, and a second Humidity sensor.

例如,該感測組件262產生一感測訊號分量SM112。該第一感測訊號SM11進一步包含該感測訊號分量SM112。例如,該第一感測單元260屬於一感測器類型660。該感測器類型660相關於該感測器類型661和該感測器類型662。例如,該第一感測單元260、該感測組件260和該感測組件262分別是一電功率感測單元、一電壓感測器和一電流感測器。例如,該第一感測單元260、該感測組件 260和該感測組件262分別是一慣性測量單元、一加速度計和一陀螺儀。 For example, the sensing element 262 generates a sensing signal component SM112. The first sensing signal SM11 further includes the sensing signal component SM112. For example, the first sensing unit 260 is of a sensor type 660 . The sensor type 660 is related to the sensor type 661 and the sensor type 662 . For example, the first sensing unit 260 , the sensing element 260 and the sensing element 262 are an electric power sensing unit, a voltage sensor and a current sensor, respectively. For example, the first sensing unit 260, the sensing component 260 and the sensing component 262 are an inertial measurement unit, an accelerometer and a gyroscope, respectively.

在一些實施例中,該第二可變物理參數QP1A相依於一可變物理參數JC1A和不同於該可變物理參數JC1A的一可變物理參數JD1A。例如,該第二可變物理參數QP1A、該可變物理參數JC1A和該可變物理參數JD1A分別是一可變電功率、一可變電壓和一可變電流,並分別屬於一第一物理參數類型、一第二物理參數類型和一第三物理參數類型。該第二物理參數類型和該第三物理參數類型是不同的或獨立的。該第一物理參數類型相依於該第二物理參數類型和該第三物理參數類型。該感測組件261感測該可變物理參數JC1A以產生該感測訊號分量SM111。該感測組件262感測該可變物理參數JD1A以產生該感測訊號分量SM112。 In some embodiments, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is dependent on a variable physical parameter JC1A and a variable physical parameter JD1A different from the variable physical parameter JC1A. For example, the second variable physical parameter QP1A, the variable physical parameter JC1A and the variable physical parameter JD1A are a variable electric power, a variable voltage and a variable current, respectively, and belong to a first physical parameter respectively type, a second physical parameter type, and a third physical parameter type. The second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type are different or independent. The first physical parameter type depends on the second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type. The sensing element 261 senses the variable physical parameter JC1A to generate the sensing signal component SM111. The sensing element 262 senses the variable physical parameter JD1A to generate the sensing signal component SM112.

該處理單元230接收該感測訊號分量SM111和該感測訊號分量SM112。在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該感測訊號分量SM111和該感測訊號分量SM112來獲得該第一測量值VM11。例如,該處理單元230響應該感測訊號分量SM111來獲得一測量值VM111,響應該感測訊號分量SM112來獲得一測量值VM112,並藉由執行使用該測量值VM111和該測量值VM112的一科學計算MX11來獲得該第一測量值VM11。該科學計算MX11基於該第一物理參數類型、該第二物理參數類型和該第三物理參數類型而被預先制定。 The processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal component SM111 and the sensing signal component SM112. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11 in response to the sensing signal component SM111 and the sensing signal component SM112. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains a measurement value VM111 in response to the sensing signal component SM111, obtains a measurement value VM112 in response to the sensing signal component SM112, and executes a measurement using the measurement value VM111 and the measurement value VM112 by executing a MX11 is scientifically calculated to obtain the first measurement value VM11. The scientific computing MX11 is predetermined based on the first physical parameter type, the second physical parameter type, and the third physical parameter type.

該可變物理參數JC1A和該可變物理參數 JD1A的每一物理參數是一可變電性參數、一可變力學參數、一可變光學參數、一可變溫度、一可變電壓、一可變電流、一可變電功率、一可變電阻、一可變電容、一可變電感、一可變頻率、一時鐘時間、一可變時間長度、一可變亮度、一可變光強度、一可變音量、一可變資料流量、一可變振幅、一可變空間位置、一可變順序位置、一可變角度、一可變空間長度、一可變距離、一可變平移速度、一可變角速度、一可變加速度、一可變力、一可變壓力和一可變機械功率的其中之一。 The variable physical parameter JC1A and the variable physical parameter Each physical parameter of JD1A is a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, a variable current, a variable electrical power, a variable Resistor, a variable capacitor, a variable inductor, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable time length, a variable brightness, a variable light intensity, a variable volume, a variable data flow, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial position, a variable sequential position, a variable angle, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, a variable translation velocity, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable One of variable force, a variable pressure, and a variable mechanical power.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VM11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B之間的該第二資料比較CA21來檢查該第一測量值VM11和所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RM12之間的該第三數學關係KA21以做出該第一測量值VM11是否為於所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RM12之內的該第二邏輯決定PH21。在該第二邏輯決定PH21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 checks the first measured value VM11 and the selected one based on the second data comparison CA21 between the first measured value VM11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DM1B The third mathematical relationship KA21 between the measurement value candidate ranges RM12 is used to make the second logical decision PH21 whether the first measurement value VM11 is within the selected measurement value candidate range RM12. Under the condition that the second logical decision PH21 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located.

例如,在該處理單元230辨識該第三數學關係KA21為一數值交集關係條件下,該處理單元230做出該第二邏輯決定PH21以成為肯定的。例如,在該第二邏輯決定PH21是肯定的條件下,處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前於該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2之內的一物理參數情況,並藉此辨識該第二可變物理參數QP1A和該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2之間的一物理參數關係為該第 二可變物理參數QP1A目前於該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2之內的一物理參數交集關係。 For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 recognizes the third mathematical relation KA21 as a numerical intersection relation, the processing unit 230 makes the second logical decision PH21 to be affirmative. For example, under the condition that the second logical decision PH21 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines a physical parameter condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently within the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2, and thereby identifies the second variable physical parameter QP1A. A physical parameter relationship between the variable physical parameter QP1A and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 is the The two variable physical parameters QP1A are currently in a physical parameter intersection relationship within the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2.

在一些實施例中,該記憶體單元25Y1進一步具有一記憶體位置PM12和不同於該記憶體位置PM12的一記憶體位置PV12,在該記憶體位置PM12儲存該候選範圍界限值對DM1B,並在該記憶體位置PV12儲存一控制資料碼CK12。例如,該記憶體位置PM12和該記憶體位置PV12皆基於所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12而被識別。該記憶體位置PM12由一記憶體位址FM12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FM12而被識別。該記憶體位置PV12由一記憶體位址FV12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FV12而被識別。該記憶體位址FM12和該記憶體位址FV12皆基於所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12而被預設。 In some embodiments, the memory cell 25Y1 further has a memory location PM12 and a memory location PV12 different from the memory location PM12 where the candidate range limit value pair DM1B is stored, and in the memory location PM12 The memory location PV12 stores a control data code CK12. For example, the memory location PM12 and the memory location PV12 are both identified based on the preset measurement value candidate range code EH12. The memory location PM12 is identified by or based on a memory address FM12. The memory location PV12 is identified by or based on a memory address FV12. Both the memory address FM12 and the memory address FV12 are preset based on the preset measurement value candidate range code EH12.

例如,該候選範圍界限值對DM1B和該控制資料碼CK12分別屬於該測量範圍界限資料碼類型TM11和該控制資料碼類型TK11。該記憶體位址FM12基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11而被預設。該記憶體位址FV12基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12和和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11而被預設。 For example, the candidate range limit value pair DM1B and the control data code CK12 belong to the measurement range limit data code type TM11 and the control data code type TK11, respectively. The memory address FM12 is preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value candidate range code EH12 and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11. The memory address FV12 is preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value candidate range code EH12, and the preset control data code type identifier HK11.

該控制資料碼CK12基於該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2而被預設。該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所獲得的該測量值候選範圍碼 EH12和所獲得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11來獲得該記憶體位址FM12,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FM12來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PM12的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B以獲得該候選範圍界限值對DM1B。 The control data code CK12 is preset based on the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2. The processing unit 230 is based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the obtained measurement value candidate range code EH12 and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11 to obtain the memory address FM12, and based on the obtained memory address FM12 to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the memory location stored in the memory location The candidate range limit value pair DM1B of PM12 is obtained to obtain the candidate range limit value pair DM1B.

在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數候選範圍RC1E2的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所獲得的該測量值候選範圍碼EH12和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11來獲得該記憶體位址FV12,基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FV12來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PV12的該控制資料碼CK12,並基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所存取的該控制資料碼CK12來導致該輸出單元240執行使用該輸出端240的該第二訊號產生操作BS21以產生用於控制該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該第二控制訊號SC12,該第二控制訊號SC12不同於該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the processing unit 230 is based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the obtained measurement value candidate The range code EH12 and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 to obtain the memory address FV12, based on the obtained memory address FV12 to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the memory location PV12 stored in the memory the control data code CK12, and based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the accessed control data code CK12 to cause the output unit 240 to perform the second signal generation operation BS21 using the output terminal 240 to The second control signal SC12 for controlling the first variable physical parameter QU1A is generated, and the second control signal SC12 is different from the first control signal SC11. For example, the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.

請參閱第22圖。第22圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8031的示意圖。如第22圖所示,該實施結構8031包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數 QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。例如,該第一感測單元260相同於該狀態改變偵測器475。 See Figure 22. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8031 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 22 , the implementation structure 8031 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used to control the first variable physical parameter existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 QU1A, and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 . For example, the first sensing unit 260 is the same as the state change detector 475 .

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270和該處理單元230皆耦合於該狀態改變偵測器475。該觸發事件EQ11是該可變物理參數QG1A進入該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12的該狀態改變事件。該可變物理參數QG1A被導致以到達該預設特徵物理參數UL11以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12。該狀態改變偵測器475藉由偵測該特徵物理參數到達ZL12來產生該觸發訊號SX11。該預設特徵物理參數UL11由一特徵物理參數值VL11所代表。 In some embodiments, both the input unit 270 and the processing unit 230 are coupled to the state change detector 475 . The trigger event EQ11 is the state change event of the variable physical parameter QG1A entering the actual characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA12. The variable physical parameter QG1A is caused to reach the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 to form the characteristic physical parameter to ZL12. The state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX11 by detecting that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL12. The preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 is represented by a characteristic physical parameter value VL11.

該儲存單元250具有一記憶體位置PM21,並在該記憶體位置PM21儲存相關於該狀態改變偵測器475的該特徵物理參數值VL11。該記憶體位置PM21由一記憶體位址FM21所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FM21而被識別。該記憶體位址FM21基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T而被預設。該輸入單元270和該處理單元230的其中之一接收該觸發訊號SX11。該處理單元230響應所接收的該觸發訊號SX11來使用所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T以獲得該記憶體位址FM21,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FM21來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PM21的該特徵物理參數值VL11以獲得該特徵物理參數值VL11。該處理單元230藉由執行使用所獲得的該特徵物理參數值VL11的一科學計算MQ13來獲得等於所預設的該測量值目 標範圍碼EM1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。 The storage unit 250 has a memory location PM21, and stores the characteristic physical parameter value VL11 related to the state change detector 475 in the memory location PM21. The memory location PM21 is identified by a memory address FM21, or is identified based on the memory address FM21. The memory address FM21 is preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T. One of the input unit 270 and the processing unit 230 receives the trigger signal SX11. The processing unit 230 uses the obtained control target device identifier HA1T to obtain the memory address FM21 in response to the received trigger signal SX11, and accesses the memory address FM21 stored in the memory based on the obtained memory address FM21 The characteristic physical parameter value VL11 of the body position PM21 is obtained to obtain the characteristic physical parameter value VL11. The processing unit 230 obtains an object equal to the preset measurement value by performing a scientific calculation MQ13 using the obtained characteristic physical parameter value VL11 The control application code UA1T of the standard range code EM1T.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來在該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。該訊號產生控制GS11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用,並用於導致該處理單元230提供該控制訊號SH11到該輸出單元240。該控制訊號SH11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11和該控制訊號SH11的其中之一來執行使用該輸出端240P的該第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生輸送該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該科學計算MQ13基於一特定經驗公式而被執行。該特定經驗公式基於所預設的該特徵物理參數值VL11而被預先制定。 The processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 within the operation time TD11 to control the output based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the obtained control application code UA1T unit 240. The signal generation control GS11 functions to instruct the output terminal 240P and is used to cause the processing unit 230 to provide the control signal SH11 to the output unit 240 . The control signal SH11 serves to instruct the output end 240P. The output unit 240 is responsive to one of the signal generation control GS11 and the control signal SH11 to execute the first signal generation operation BS11 using the output terminal 240P to generate the first control signal delivering the measured value target range code EM1T SC11. For example, the scientific computing MQ13 is performed based on a specific empirical formula. The specific empirical formula is predetermined based on the preset characteristic physical parameter value VL11.

該觸發應用功能FB11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL相關的該觸發應用功能規格GBL1,並包含一特徵物理參數表示。該觸發應用功能規格GBL1被預先制定。該特徵物理參數表示用於表示該預設特徵物理參數UL11。該特徵物理參數值VL11基於該特徵物理參數表示和用於轉換該特徵物理參數表示的一資料編碼操作而被預設。例如,該特定經驗公式基於所預設的該特徵物理參數值VL11和該觸發應用功能規格GBL1的至少其中之一而被預先制定。 The trigger application function FB11 is configured to conform to the trigger application function specification GBL1 related to the physical parameter application range RC1EL and includes a characteristic physical parameter representation. The trigger application function specification GBL1 is pre-established. The characteristic physical parameter representation is used to represent the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11. The characteristic physical parameter value VL11 is preset based on the characteristic physical parameter representation and a data encoding operation for converting the characteristic physical parameter representation. For example, the specific empirical formula is predetermined based on at least one of the preset characteristic physical parameter value VL11 and the trigger application function specification GBL1.

請參閱第23圖。第23圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8032的示意圖。如第23 圖所示,該實施結構8032包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。例如,該第一感測單元260相同於該狀態改變偵測器475。 See Figure 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8032 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . as in the 23rd As shown in the figure, the implementation structure 8032 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is configured to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 . For example, the first sensing unit 260 is the same as the state change detector 475 .

在一些實施例中,該第二可變物理參數QP1A相同於該可變物理參數QG1A。相同於該可變物理參數QG1A的該第二可變物理參數QP1A位於該應用環境EX11中。該狀態改變偵測器475耦合於該處理單元230。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的條件下,該指定功能操作ZH11導致該可變物理參數QG1A到達該預設特徵物理參數UL11以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12,並藉由形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12來將該可變物理狀態XA1A從該非特徵物理參數到達狀態XA11改變成該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12。例如,該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12基於該預設特徵物理參數UL11而被特徵化。 In some embodiments, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is the same as the variable physical parameter QG1A. The second variable physical parameter QP1A identical to the variable physical parameter QG1A is located in the application environment EX11. The state change detector 475 is coupled to the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is within the specific physical parameter range RD1E4, the specified function operation ZH11 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 to form the characteristic physical parameter to ZL12 , and by forming the characteristic physical parameter arrival ZL12 to change the variable physical state XA1A from the non-characterized physical parameter arrival state XA11 to the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12. For example, the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12 is characterized based on the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11.

該狀態改變偵測器475感測該可變物理參數QG1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11,並響應該特徵物理參數到達ZL12來導致該第一感測訊號SM11具有一訊號狀態改變UZ11。例如,該訊號狀態改變UZ11導致該第二可變物理參數QP1A從該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4進入 該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL。該觸發事件EQ11是該可變物理參數QG1A進入該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12的該狀態改變事件。例如,在該物理參數形成區AT11位於該應用環境EX11中的條件下,該物理參數形成區AT11鄰接於該控制裝置210。 The state change detector 475 senses the variable physical parameter QG1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11, and causes the first sensing signal SM11 to have a signal state change UZ11 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12. For example, the signal state change UZ11 causes the second variable physical parameter QP1A to enter from the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4 This physical parameter applies to the range RC1EL. The trigger event EQ11 is the state change event of the variable physical parameter QG1A entering the actual characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA12. For example, under the condition that the physical parameter forming area AT11 is located in the application environment EX11 , the physical parameter forming area AT11 is adjacent to the control device 210 .

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一感測訊號SM11來獲得該第一測量值VM11。在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用的該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VM11 in response to the first sensing signal SM11. The processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L Under certain conditions, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 that functions to indicate the target range RN1T of the measurement value.

例如,在該可變物理參數QG1A處於該非特徵物理參數到達狀態XA11的條件下,該第二可變物理參數QP1A於該第一特定物理參數範圍RC1E4之內。在該可變物理參數QG1A處於該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12的條件下,該第二可變物理參數QP1A於該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL之內。所預設的該第一特定測量值範圍碼EH14和所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L分別用於指示該非特徵物理參數到達狀態XA11和該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12。例如,在該物理參數應用區AJ11位於該應用環境EX11中的條件下,該物理參數應用區AJ11鄰接於該控制裝置210。 For example, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QG1A is in the non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA11, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is within the first specific physical parameter range RC1E4. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QG1A is in the actual characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA12, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is within the physical parameter application range RC1EL. The preset first specific measurement value range code EH14 and the preset measurement value application range code EH1L are respectively used to indicate the non-feature physical parameter arrival state XA11 and the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12. For example, under the condition that the physical parameter application area AJ11 is located in the application environment EX11 , the physical parameter application area AJ11 is adjacent to the control device 210 .

請參閱第24圖、第25圖、第26圖和第27 圖。第24圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8033的示意圖。第25圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8034的示意圖。第26圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8035的示意圖。第27圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8036的示意圖。如第24圖、第25圖、第26圖和第27圖所示,該實施結構8033、該實施結構8034、該實施結構8035和該實施結構8036的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figures 24, 25, 26 and 27 picture. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8033 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8034 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8035 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8036 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Fig. 24, Fig. 25, Fig. 26 and Fig. 27, each structure of the implementation structure 8033, the implementation structure 8034, the implementation structure 8035 and the implementation structure 8036 includes the control device 210, the control device The target device 330 and the server 280. The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is configured to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A由一可變目前狀態所特徵化,或處於該可變目前狀態。該輸入單元270包含一電使用目標275和相關於該電使用目標275的一電使用目標276。該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276皆耦合於該處理單元230。該電使用目標275由一電使用目標識別符HZ11所識別。該電使用目標276由一電使用目標識別符HZ12所識別。該電使用目標識別符HZ11和該電使用目標識別符HZ12皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。 In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized by, or is in, a variable current state. The input unit 270 includes an electricity usage target 275 and an electricity usage target 276 associated with the electricity usage target 275 . Both the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 are coupled to the processing unit 230 . The electricity usage target 275 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ11. The electricity usage target 276 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ12. The electrical usage target identifier HZ11 and the electrical usage target identifier HZ12 are both preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1.

該儲存單元250具有一記憶體位置PK11和不同於該記憶體位置PK11的一記憶體位置PK12。該儲存 單元250在該記憶體位置PK11儲存代表一預設增量的一相對值VK11,並在該記憶體位置PK12儲存代表一預設減量的一相對值VK12。例如,該電應用目標WJ11是該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276的其中之一。該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276分別位於不同空間位置。 The storage unit 250 has a memory location PK11 and a memory location PK12 different from the memory location PK11. the storage The unit 250 stores a relative value VK11 representing a predetermined increment in the memory location PK11, and stores a relative value VK12 representing a predetermined decrement in the memory location PK12. For example, the electricity application target WJ11 is one of the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 . The electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 are located at different spatial positions, respectively.

該記憶體位置PK11由一記憶體位址FK11所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FK11而被識別。該記憶體位置PK12由一記憶體位址FK12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FK12而被識別。該記憶體位址FK11基於該電使用目標識別符HZ11而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標275相關於該相對值VK11。該記憶體位址FK12基於該電使用目標識別符HZ12而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標276相關於該相對值VK12。 The memory location PK11 is identified by a memory address FK11 or is identified based on the memory address FK11. The memory location PK12 is identified by or based on a memory address FK12. The memory address FK11 is preset based on the electrical usage target identifier HZ11; thereby, the electrical usage target 275 is related to the relative value VK11. The memory address FK12 is preset based on the electrical usage target identifier HZ12; thereby, the electrical usage target 276 is related to the relative value VK12.

例如,該電使用目標識別符HZ11和該相對值VK11之間具有一數學關係KV1W;藉此,該電使用目標275相關於該相對值VK11。該電使用目標識別符HZ12和該相對值VK12之間具有一數學關係KV2W;藉此,該電使用目標276相關於該相對值VK12。該電使用目標275用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有一第一物理量改變以改變該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。該電使用目標276用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有與該第一物理量改變相反的一第二物理量改變以改變該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。 For example, there is a mathematical relationship KV1W between the electrical usage target identifier HZ11 and the relative value VK11 ; thereby, the electrical usage target 275 is related to the relative value VK11 . There is a mathematical relationship KV2W between the electrical usage target identifier HZ12 and the relative value VK12; thereby, the electrical usage target 276 is related to the relative value VK12. The electrical usage target 275 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a first physical quantity change to change the variable current state of the first variable physical parameter QU1A. The electrical usage target 276 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a second physical quantity change opposite the first physical quantity change to change the variable current state of the first variable physical parameter QU1A.

在一些實施例中,該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276的其中之一而發生, 並導致該處理單元230接收該操作請求訊號SZ11。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標275而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ11,並基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ11來獲得該相對值VK11。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標276而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ12,並基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12來獲得該相對值VK12。 In some embodiments, the trigger event EQ11 occurs by virtue of one of the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276, And cause the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SZ11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage target 275, the processing unit 230 obtains the electricity usage target identifier HZ11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11, and based on the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ11 The relative value VK11 is obtained. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage target 276, the processing unit 230 obtains the electricity usage target identifier HZ12 in response to the operation request signal SZ11, and based on the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ12 The relative value VK12 is obtained.

該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270接收一使用者輸入操作JU11的一使用者輸入事件。該輸入單元270響應是該使用者輸入事件的該觸發事件EQ11來提供一操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標275而發生的條件下,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標275來提供一輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標276而發生的條件下,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標276來提供一輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。該操作請求訊號SZ11是該輸入訊號SM17和該輸入訊號SM18的其中之一。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來使用該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得該第一測量值VM11。 The trigger event EQ11 is a user input event in which the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU11. The input unit 270 provides an operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ11 which is the user input event. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the power usage target 275 , the input unit 270 provides an input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230 depending on the power usage target 275 . Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage target 276 , the input unit 270 supplies an input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230 depending on the electricity usage target 276 . The operation request signal SZ11 is one of the input signal SM17 and the input signal SM18. The processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SM11 to obtain the first measurement value VM11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11.

該使用者輸入操作JU11是一使用者輸入操作JW11和一使用者輸入操作JW12的其中之一。在一第一特定情況中,該使用者輸入操作JU11是該使用者輸入操作JW11。在一第二特定情況中,該使用者輸入操作JU11是該使用者輸入操作JW12。該儲存單元250儲存該相對值VK11 和不同於該相對值VK11的該相對值VK12。例如,該相對值VK11正比於1,或等於1。該相對值VK12正比於(-1),或等於(-1)。 The user input operation JU11 is one of a user input operation JW11 and a user input operation JW12. In a first specific case, the user input operation JU11 is the user input operation JW11. In a second specific case, the user input operation JU11 is the user input operation JW12. The storage unit 250 stores the relative value VK11 and the relative value VK12 which is different from the relative value VK11. For example, the relative value VK11 is proportional to 1, or equal to 1. The relative value VK12 is proportional to (-1), or equal to (-1).

在一些實施例中,在該第一特定情況中,該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標275的該使用者輸入操作JW11以導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JW11來產生作為該操作請求訊號SZ11的該輸入訊號SM17。在該電使用目標275接收該使用者輸入操作JW11之前,該第二可變物理參數QP1A於該特定物理參數範圍RC1E4之內。例如,該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標275的該使用者輸入操作JW11的該使用者輸入事件。 In some embodiments, in the first specific case, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JW11 for selecting the electricity usage target 275 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur. The input unit 270 generates the input signal SM17 as the operation request signal SZ11 in response to the user input operation JW11. Before the electrical usage target 275 receives the user input operation JW11, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is within the specific physical parameter range RC1E4. For example, the trigger event EQ11 is the user input event in which the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JW11 for selecting the electricity usage target 275 .

在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。該處理單元230接收該輸入訊號SM17,響應該輸入訊號SM17來使用該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得等於該第一測量值VM11的一測量值VM17,並響應該輸入訊號SM17來執行一資料獲取AF2A以獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ11。例如,當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。 Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. The processing unit 230 receives the input signal SM17, uses the first sensing signal SM11 to obtain a measurement value VM17 equal to the first measurement value VM11 in response to the input signal SM17, and executes a data acquisition in response to the input signal SM17 AF2A to obtain this electricity uses the target identifier HZ11. For example, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11.

在該處理單元230藉由檢查該測量值VM17和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的 該電使用目標識別符HZ11來獲得該相對值VK11。例如,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ11來獲得該記憶體位址FK11,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FK11來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PK11的該相對值VK11以獲得該相對值VK11。例如,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ11和該數學關係KV1W的一科學計算MR15來獲得該相對值VK11。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the measurement value VM17 and the measurement value application range RM1L , the processing unit 230 is based on the obtained The electricity uses the target identifier HZ11 to obtain the relative value VK11. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FK11 based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ11, and accesses the relative value stored in the memory location PK11 based on the obtained memory address FK11 VK11 to obtain the relative value VK11. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK11 by performing a scientific calculation MR15 using the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ11 and the mathematical relationship KV1W.

在一些實施例中,所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL由所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L所指示。在該第一特定情況中,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該相對值VK11的一科學計算MQ15來獲得等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。例如,該科學計算MQ15包含使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該相對值VK11的一第一算術運算。 In some embodiments, the determined physical parameter application range RC1EL is indicated by the determined measurement value application range code EH1L. In the first specific case, the processing unit 230 obtains the target equal to the preset measurement value by performing a scientific calculation MQ15 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the obtained relative value VK11 The control application code UA1T of the range code EM1T. For example, the scientific calculation MQ15 includes a first arithmetic operation using the determined measurement value to apply the range code EH1L and the obtained relative value VK11.

在該第一特定情況中,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來在該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生輸送該相對參考範圍碼ZB11和該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的其中之一的該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該相對參考範圍碼ZB11和該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的其中之一來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。 In the first specific case, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 within the operation time TD11 based on the obtained control application code UA1T to cause the output unit 240 to generate The first control signal SC11 of one of the relative reference range code ZB11 and the measured value target range code EM1T is sent. For example, the first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target range of the measurement value RN1T by sending one of the relative reference range code ZB11 and the target range code of the measurement value EM1T.

該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET被配置以對應於一對應物理參數範圍RY1ET。該額定物理參數範圍RD1E 等於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET的一範圍組合,並包含該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET具有一第一特定物理參數範圍界限和相對於該第一特定物理參數範圍界限的一第二特定物理參數範圍界限。在該第一特定情況中,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有該第一物理量改變以改變該可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。 The physical parameter target range RD1ET is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET. The rated physical parameters range RD1E It is equal to a range combination of the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, and includes the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. The physical parameter target range RD1ET has a first specific physical parameter range limit and a second specific physical parameter range limit relative to the first specific physical parameter range limit. In the first specific case, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the first physical quantity change to change the possibility of the variable physical parameter QU1A change to the current state.

例如,在該第一特定情況中,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A從該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET通過該第一特定物理參數範圍界限以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該第一特定物理參數範圍界限是該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1和該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2的其中之一。例如,在該第一特定情況中,該第一物理量改變是一第一物理增量和一第一物理減量的其中之一。 For example, in the first specific case, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 causes the first variable physical parameter QU1A to pass through the first specific physical parameter from the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in response to the first control signal SC11 Parameter range bounds to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The first specific physical parameter range limit is one of the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2. For example, in the first specific case, the first physical quantity change is one of a first physical increment and a first physical decrement.

在一些實施例中,在該第二特定情況中,該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標276的該使用者輸入操作JW12以導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JW12來產生作為該操作請求訊號SZ11的該輸入訊號SM18。在該電使用目標276接收該使用者輸入操作JW12之前,該第二可變物理參數QP1A於該特定物理參數範圍RC1E4之內。例如,該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標276的該使 用者輸入操作JW12的該使用者輸入事件。 In some embodiments, in the second specific situation, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JW12 for selecting the electricity usage target 276 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur. The input unit 270 generates the input signal SM18 as the operation request signal SZ11 in response to the user input operation JW12. Before the electrical usage target 276 receives the user input operation JW12, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is within the specific physical parameter range RC1E4. For example, the trigger event EQ11 is that the input unit 270 receives the command for selecting the electricity usage target 276 The user input event of the user input operation JW12.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。該處理單元230接收該輸入訊號SM18,響應該輸入訊號SM18來使用該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得等於該第一測量值VM11的一測量值VM18,並響應該輸入訊號SM18來執行一資料獲取AF2B以獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ12。 Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. The processing unit 230 receives the input signal SM18, uses the first sensing signal SM11 to obtain a measurement value VM18 equal to the first measurement value VM11 in response to the input signal SM18, and executes a data acquisition in response to the input signal SM18 AF2B to obtain this electricity uses the target identifier HZ12.

在該處理單元230藉由檢查該測量值VM18和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12來獲得該相對值VK12。例如,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12來獲得該記憶體位址FK12,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FK12來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PK12的該相對值VK12以獲得該相對值VK12。例如,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12和該數學關係KV2W的一科學計算MR16來獲得該相對值VK12。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by examining the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the measurement value VM18 and the measurement value application range RM1L , the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK12 based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ12. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FK12 based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ12, and accesses the relative value stored in the memory location PK12 based on the obtained memory address FK12 VK12 to obtain the relative value VK12. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK12 by performing a scientific calculation MR16 using the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ12 and the mathematical relationship KV2W.

在一些實施例中,所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL由所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L所指示。在該第二特定情況中,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該相對值VK12的一科學計算MQ16來獲得等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該控制應用碼UA1T。例如,該科學計算 MQ16包含使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該相對值VK12的一第二算術運算。 In some embodiments, the determined physical parameter application range RC1EL is indicated by the determined measurement value application range code EH1L. In the second specific case, the processing unit 230 obtains a target equal to the preset measurement value by performing a scientific calculation MQ16 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the obtained relative value VK12 The control application code UA1T of the range code EM1T. For example, the scientific computing MQ16 includes a second arithmetic operation using the determined measurement value to apply the range code EH1L and the obtained relative value VK12.

在該第二特定情況中,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來在該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生輸送該相對參考範圍碼ZB11和該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的其中之一的該第一控制訊號SC11。在該第二特定情況中,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有與該第一物理量改變相反的該第二物理量改變以改變該可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。 In the second specific case, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 within the operation time TD11 based on the obtained control application code UA1T to cause the output unit 240 to generate The first control signal SC11 of one of the relative reference range code ZB11 and the measured value target range code EM1T is sent. In the second specific case, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the second physical quantity change opposite to the first physical quantity change to change the The variable current state of the variable physical parameter QU1A.

例如,在該第二特定情況中,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A從該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET通過該第二特定物理參數範圍界限以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該第二特定物理參數範圍界限是該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1和該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2的其中另一。例如,在該第二特定情況中,該第二物理量改變是一第二物理增量和一第二物理減量的其中之一。例如,在該第二特定情況中的該相對參考範圍碼ZB11不同於在該第一特定情況中的該相對參考範圍碼ZB11。 For example, in the second specific case, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to pass through the second specific physical parameter from the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET Parameter range bounds to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The second specific physical parameter range limit is the other of the predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2. For example, in the second specific case, the second physical quantity change is one of a second physical increment and a second physical decrement. For example, the relative reference range code ZB11 in the second specific case is different from the relative reference range code ZB11 in the first specific case.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230於該第一特定情況中獲得該相對值VK11的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該相對值VK11來執行該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例 如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送等於該相對值VK11該相對參考範圍碼ZB11。該相對值VK11被配置以等於一正整數。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK11 in the first specific situation, the processing unit 230 performs the signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained relative value VK11 to cause the output The unit 240 generates the first control signal SC11. example For example, the first control signal SC11 sends the relative reference range code ZB11 equal to the relative value VK11. The relative value VK11 is configured to be equal to a positive integer.

例如,在該處理單元230於該第二特定情況中獲得該相對值VK12的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該相對值VK12來執行該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送等於該相對值VK12該相對參考範圍碼ZB11。該相對值VK12被配置以等於一負整數。 For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK12 in the second specific situation, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained relative value VK12 to cause the output unit 240 to generate the relative value VK12 The first control signal SC11. For example, the first control signal SC11 delivers the relative reference range code ZB11 equal to the relative value VK12. The relative value VK12 is configured to be equal to a negative integer.

在一些實施例中,該儲存單元250進一步具有一記憶體位置PF11和不同於該記憶體位置PF11的一記憶體位置PF12。該儲存單元250在該記憶體位置PF11儲存所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ11,並在該記憶體位置PF12儲存所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ12。該記憶體位置PF11由一記憶體位址FF11所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FF11而被識別。該記憶體位置PF12由一記憶體位址FF12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FF12而被識別。 In some embodiments, the storage unit 250 further has a memory location PF11 and a memory location PF12 different from the memory location PF11. The storage unit 250 stores the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ11 in the memory location PF11 , and stores the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ12 in the memory location PF12 . The memory location PF11 is identified by a memory address FF11 or is identified based on the memory address FF11. The memory location PF12 is identified by or based on a memory address FF12.

該記憶體位址FF11和該記憶體位址FF12皆被預設。該電使用目標275通過該處理單元230而耦合於該記憶體位置PF11。該電使用目標276通過該處理單元230而耦合於該記憶體位置PF12。例如,該輸入訊號SM17輸送一輸入資料DJ17。該輸入訊號SM18輸送一輸入資料DJ18。 Both the memory address FF11 and the memory address FF12 are preset. The electrical usage target 275 is coupled to the memory location PF11 through the processing unit 230 . The electrical usage target 276 is coupled to the memory location PF12 through the processing unit 230 . For example, the input signal SM17 sends an input data DJ17. The input signal SM18 delivers an input data DJ18.

在該第一特定情況中,該資料獲取AF2A是一資料獲取操作AF21和一資料獲取操作AF22的其中之一。該資料獲取操作AF21藉由使用所預設的該記憶體位址 FF11來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PF11的該電使用目標識別符HZ11以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ11。該資料獲取操作AF22基於一預設資料導出規則YU11來處理該輸入資料DJ17以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ11。 In the first specific case, the data acquisition AF2A is one of a data acquisition operation AF21 and a data acquisition operation AF22. The data acquisition operation AF21 is performed by using the preset memory address FF11 to access the electrical usage target identifier HZ11 stored in the memory location PF11 to obtain the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ11. The data acquisition operation AF22 processes the input data DJ17 based on a predetermined data derivation rule YU11 to obtain the predetermined electrical usage target identifier HZ11.

在該第二特定情況中,該資料獲取AF2B是一資料獲取操作AF23和一資料獲取操作AF24的其中之一。該資料獲取操作AF23藉由使用所預設的該記憶體位址FF12來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PF12的該電使用目標識別符HZ12以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ12。該資料獲取操作AF24基於該預設資料導出規則YU11來處理該輸入資料DJ18以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ12。 In the second specific case, the data acquisition AF2B is one of a data acquisition operation AF23 and a data acquisition operation AF24. The data acquisition operation AF23 uses the preset memory address FF12 to access the power usage target identifier HZ12 stored in the memory location PF12 to obtain the preset power usage target identifier HZ12. The data acquisition operation AF24 processes the input data DJ18 based on the preset data derivation rule YU11 to obtain the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ12.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210由該使用者295所使用,並包含耦合於該處理單元230的一使用者介面區AP21。該使用者介面區AP21具有該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276,或者該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276皆位於該使用者介面區AP21中。該輸入單元270包含該輸入組件440。該輸出單元240包含該顯示組件460。例如,該輸入組件440和該顯示組件460的其中之一包含該使用者介面區AP21。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 is used by the user 295 and includes a user interface area AP21 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The user interface area AP21 has the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276, or both the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 are located in the user interface area AP21. The input unit 270 includes the input component 440 . The output unit 240 includes the display component 460 . For example, one of the input component 440 and the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP21.

例如,該使用者輸入操作JW11由該使用者295所執行。該電使用目標275是一第一感測目標和一第一顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標275是該第一感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標275。在 該電使用目標275是該第一顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標275。例如,該第一感測目標是一第一按鈕目標。該第一顯示目標是一第一圖符目標。 For example, the user input operation JW11 is performed by the user 295 . The electrical usage target 275 is one of a first sensing target and a first display target. The input component 440 includes the electrical usage target 275 under the condition that the electrical usage target 275 is the first sensing target. exist Provided that the electricity usage target 275 is the first display target, the display component 460 includes the electricity usage target 275 . For example, the first sensing target is a first button target. The first display object is a first icon object.

例如,該使用者輸入操作JW12由該使用者295所執行。該電使用目標276是一第二感測目標和一第二顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標276是該第二感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標276。在該電使用目標276是該第二顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標276。例如,該第二感測目標是一第二按鈕目標。該第二顯示目標是一第二圖符目標。 For example, the user input operation JW12 is performed by the user 295 . The electrical usage target 276 is one of a second sensing target and a second display target. The input component 440 includes the electrical usage target 276 under the condition that the electrical usage target 276 is the second sensing target. The display component 460 includes the electricity usage target 276 provided that the electricity usage target 276 is the second display target. For example, the second sensing target is a second button target. The second display object is a second icon object.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標275來提供該輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標276來提供該輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。例如,在該電使用目標275被配置以存在於該輸入組件440的條件下,該電使用目標275接收該使用者輸入操作JW11來導致該輸入組件440提供該輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 relies on the electrical usage target 275 to provide the input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230 . The input unit 270 relies on the electrical usage target 276 to provide the input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230 . For example, under the condition that the electricity usage target 275 is configured to exist in the input element 440 , the electricity usage target 275 receives the user input operation JW11 to cause the input element 440 to provide the input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230 .

例如,該輸入單元270進一步包含一指向裝置441。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以導致該顯示組件460顯示一選擇工具YJ11、該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276。該指向裝置441用於控制該選擇工具YJ11。在該電使用目標275被配置以存在於該顯示組件460的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電使用目標275的該使用者輸入操作JW11來導致該指向裝置441提供該輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。例如,該 使用者輸入操作JW11被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電使用目標275。例如,該選擇工具YJ11是一游標。 For example, the input unit 270 further includes a pointing device 441 . Before the triggering event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the display component 460 to display a selection tool YJ11 , the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 . The pointing device 441 is used to control the selection tool YJ11. Under the condition that the electricity usage target 275 is configured to exist in the display assembly 460, the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JW11 for selecting the electricity usage target 275 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230. For example, this User input operation JW11 is configured to select the electricity usage target 275 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11. For example, the selection tool YJ11 is a cursor.

例如,在該電使用目標276被配置以存在於該輸入組件440的條件下,該電使用目標276接收該使用者輸入操作JW12來導致該輸入組件440提供該輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。在該電使用目標276被配置以存在於該顯示組件460的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電使用目標276的該使用者輸入操作JW12來導致該指向裝置441提供該輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。例如,該使用者輸入操作JW12被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電使用目標276。 For example, under the condition that the electricity usage target 276 is configured to exist in the input element 440 , the electricity usage target 276 receives the user input operation JW12 to cause the input element 440 to provide the input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the electricity usage target 276 is configured to exist in the display assembly 460, the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JW12 for selecting the electricity usage target 276 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230. For example, the user input operation JW12 is configured to select the electricity usage target 276 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11.

請參閱第28圖和第29圖。第28圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8037的示意圖。第29圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8038的示意圖。如第28圖和第29圖所示,該實施結構8037和該實施結構8038的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figures 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8037 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8038 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 , each structure of the implementation structure 8037 and the implementation structure 8038 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is configured to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210包含該使用者介面區AP21和相關於該使用者介面區AP21的一使用 者介面區AP22。該使用者介面區AP21和該使用者介面區AP22皆耦合於該處理單元230。該使用者介面區AP22具有耦合於該處理單元230的一電應用目標WK11和耦合於該處理單元230的一電應用目標WK12。該電應用目標WK11和該電應用目標WK12分別位於不同空間位置,並皆屬於該電應用目標群組GK11。該使用者介面區AP22包含該物理參數形成區AT11。例如,該電應用目標群組GK11位於該物理參數形成區AT11中。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 includes the user interface area AP21 and a usage associated with the user interface area AP21 User interface area AP22. Both the user interface area AP21 and the user interface area AP22 are coupled to the processing unit 230 . The user interface area AP22 has an electrical application target WK11 coupled to the processing unit 230 and an electrical application target WK12 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The electrical application target WK11 and the electrical application target WK12 are located at different spatial positions, and both belong to the electrical application target group GK11 . The user interface area AP22 includes the physical parameter forming area AT11. For example, the electrical application target group GK11 is located in the physical parameter forming area AT11.

該電應用目標WK11基於該目標順序位置UK11而被安排於該電應用目標群組GK11中。該電應用目標WK12基於與該目標順序位置UK11不同的一目標順序位置UK12而被安排於該電應用目標群組GK11中。該第二可變物理參數QP1A基於該目標順序位置UK11和該目標順序位置UK12而被特徵化。該目標順序位置UK11由該目標位置號碼NB11所代表。該目標順序位置UK12由不同於該目標位置號碼NB11的一目標位置號碼NB12所代表。 The electrical application target WK11 is arranged in the electrical application target group GK11 based on the target order position UK11. The electrical application target WK12 is arranged in the electrical application target group GK11 based on a target order position UK12 different from the target order position UK11. The second variable physical parameter QP1A is characterized based on the target ordinal position UK11 and the target ordinal position UK12. The target ordinal position UK11 is represented by the target position number NB11. The target sequential position UK12 is represented by a target position number NB12 different from the target position number NB11.

該目標位置號碼NB11和該目標位置號碼NB12皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。例如,該電應用目標群組GK11由複數電應用目標WK11、WK12、…所組成。該複數電應用目標WK11、WK12、…根據一電應用目標順序YB11而被排列,並分別基於複數目標順序位置UK11、UK12、…而被排列於該電應用目標群組GK11中。該第二可變物理參數QP1A等於與該電應用目標順序YB11相關的一可變順序位置。例如,該第二可變物理參數QP1A在一特定時間等於該複數目標順序位置 UK11、UK12、…的其中之一。 Both the target location number NB11 and the target location number NB12 are preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. For example, the electrical application target group GK11 is composed of a plurality of electrical application targets WK11 , WK12 , . . . The plurality of electrical application targets WK11, WK12, . . . are arranged according to an electrical application target order YB11, and are respectively arranged in the electrical application target group GK11 based on the plurality of target order positions UK11, UK12, . The second variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to a variable sequence position associated with the electrical application target sequence YB11. For example, the second variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to the complex target ordinal position at a specific time One of UK11, UK12, ….

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260藉由感測用於選擇該電應用目標WK11的該使用者輸入操作BU13來感測處於該限制條件FP1M的該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生用於獲得該第一測量值VM11的該第一感測訊號SM11。例如,該限制條件FP1M是該第二可變物理參數QP1A等於該目標順序位置UK11。例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260接收用於選擇該電應用目標WK11的該使用者輸入操作BU13,並響應該使用者輸入操作BU13來感測處於該限制條件FP1M的該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。例如,該輸入單元270包含該第一感測單元260。例如,該第一感測單元260位於該使用者介面區AP22中。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the restriction condition FP1M by sensing the user input operation BU13 for selecting the electrical application target WK11 of the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11 for obtaining the first measurement value VM11. For example, the constraint FP1M is that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to the target ordinal position UK11. For example, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 receives the user input operation BU13 for selecting the electrical application target WK11, and responds to the user input operation BU13 to sense that the restriction is in the limit The second variable physical parameter QP1A of the condition FP1M is used to generate the first sensing signal SM11. For example, the input unit 270 includes the first sensing unit 260 . For example, the first sensing unit 260 is located in the user interface area AP22.

例如,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來執行與一指定時間TD01相關的一時間控制GF11。在該第一感測單元260於該指定時間TD01之內接收該使用者輸入操作BU13的條件下,該處理單元230於該指定時間TD01之內接收該第一感測訊號SM11,並基於該第一感測訊號SM11來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得等於該目標位置號碼NB11的該第一測量值VM11。例如,該操作單元297包含耦合於該處理單元230的一定時器539。該定時器539受該處理單元230控制。該時間控制GF11用於控制該定時器539。 For example, the processing unit 230 executes a time control GF11 related to a specified time TD01 in response to the trigger event EQ11. Under the condition that the first sensing unit 260 receives the user input operation BU13 within the specified time TD01, the processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SM11 within the specified time TD01, and based on the first sensing signal SM11 A sensing signal SM11 is used to obtain the first measurement value VM11 equal to the target position number NB11 in the specified measurement value format HQ11. For example, the operation unit 297 includes a timer 539 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The timer 539 is controlled by the processing unit 230 . The time control GF11 is used to control the timer 539 .

在該第一感測單元260於該指定時間TD01 之內未能接收該使用者輸入操作BU13的一特定條件下,該處理單元230禁止執行該檢查操作BA11。例如,該指定時間TD01具有一結束時間點。在該處理單元230通過該定時器539響應該結束時間點而確定該特定條件的條件下,該處理單元230禁止執行該檢查操作BA11。 At the designated time TD01 of the first sensing unit 260 Under a specific condition that the user input operation BU13 is not received, the processing unit 230 prohibits the execution of the checking operation BA11. For example, the designated time TD01 has an end time point. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the specific condition through the timer 539 in response to the end time point, the processing unit 230 prohibits the execution of the checking operation BA11.

例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260於一指定時間TD01之內接收該使用者輸入操作BU13。在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230接收該第一感測訊號SM11,並於該指定時間TD01之內基於該第一感測訊號SM11來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得等於該目標位置號碼NB11的該第一測量值VM11。 For example, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 receives the user input operation BU13 within a specified time TD01. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SM11, and within the specified time TD01 based on the first sensing signal SM11, obtains a value equal to the specified measurement value format HQ11 This first measurement value VM11 of the target position number NB11.

在一些實施例中,該使用者介面區AP21具有耦合於該處理單元230的該電應用目標WJ11。該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270接收該使用者輸入操作JU11的該使用者輸入事件。在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。該使用者輸入操作JU11用於選擇該電應用目標WJ11。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JU11和該使用者輸入事件的其中之一來提供該操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。 In some embodiments, the user interface area AP21 has the electrical application target WJ11 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The trigger event EQ11 is the user input event in which the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JU11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. The user input operation JU11 is used to select the electrical application target WJ11. The input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 in response to one of the user input operation JU11 and the user input event.

該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來導致該第一感測單元260感測用於選擇該電應用目標WK11的該使用者輸入操作BU13,並藉由偵測處於該限制條件FP1M的該第二可變物理參數QP1A來產生該第一感測 訊號SM11。例如,該使用者輸入操作BU13和該使用者輸入操作JU11皆由該使用者295所執行。例如,該電應用目標WJ11用於選擇該控制目標裝置330以進行控制。 The processing unit 230 causes the first sensing unit 260 to sense the user input operation BU13 for selecting the electrical application target WK11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11, and by detecting the first operation BU13 under the restriction condition FP1M Two variable physical parameters QP1A to generate the first sensing Signal SM11. For example, both the user input operation BU13 and the user input operation JU11 are performed by the user 295 . For example, the electrical application target WJ11 is used to select the control target device 330 for control.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270包含該輸入組件440。該輸出單元240包含該顯示組件460。例如,該輸入組件440包含該使用者介面區AP21和該使用者介面區AP22。例如,該顯示組件460包含該使用者介面區AP21和該使用者介面區AP22。例如,該輸入組件440包含該使用者介面區AP21;且該顯示組件460包含該使用者介面區AP22。例如,該輸入組件440包含該使用者介面區AP22;且該顯示組件460包含該使用者介面區AP21。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 includes the input component 440 . The output unit 240 includes the display component 460 . For example, the input component 440 includes the user interface area AP21 and the user interface area AP22. For example, the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP21 and the user interface area AP22. For example, the input element 440 includes the user interface area AP21; and the display element 460 includes the user interface area AP22. For example, the input element 440 includes the user interface area AP22; and the display element 460 includes the user interface area AP21.

例如,該電應用目標WJ11是一感測目標和一顯示目標的其中之一。在該電應用目標WJ11是該感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電應用目標WJ11。在該電應用目標WJ11是該顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電應用目標WJ11。在該電應用目標WJ11被配置以存在於該輸入組件440的條件下,該電應用目標WJ11接收該使用者輸入操作JU11來導致該輸入組件440提供該操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。 For example, the electrical application target WJ11 is one of a sensing target and a display target. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is the sensing target, the input component 440 includes the electrical application target WJ11. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is the display target, the display component 460 includes the electrical application target WJ11. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is configured to exist in the input element 440 , the electrical application target WJ11 receives the user input operation JU11 to cause the input element 440 to provide the operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 .

例如,該輸入單元270進一步包含該指向裝置441。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以導致該顯示組件460顯示該選擇工具YJ11和該電應用目標WJ11。該指向裝置441用於控制該選擇工具YJ11。例如,在該電應用目標WJ11被配置以存在於該顯示組件460的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電應用目標 WJ11的該使用者輸入操作JU11來導致該指向裝置441提供該操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。該使用者輸入操作JU11被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電應用目標WJ11。 For example, the input unit 270 further includes the pointing device 441 . Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the display component 460 to display the selection tool YJ11 and the electrical application target WJ11. The pointing device 441 is used to control the selection tool YJ11. For example, under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is configured to exist in the display assembly 460, the pointing device 441 receives a request for selecting the electrical application target The user of WJ11 inputs operation JU11 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 . The user input operation JU11 is configured to select the electrical application target WJ11 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11.

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以導致該電應用目標WJ11、該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276的至少其中之一出現於該使用者介面區AP21中,並被配置以導致該電應用目標群組GK11出現於該使用者介面區AP22中。在該電應用目標WJ11出現於該使用者介面區AP21中且該電應用目標群組GK11出現於該使用者介面區AP22中的條件下,該輸入單元270接收該使用者輸入操作JU11的該觸發事件EQ11發生。 In some embodiments, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause at least one of the electrical application target WJ11, the electrical usage target 275 and the electrical usage target 276 to appear on the user interface area AP21, and is configured to cause the electrical application target group GK11 to appear in the user interface area AP22. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 appears in the user interface area AP21 and the electrical application target group GK11 appears in the user interface area AP22, the input unit 270 receives the trigger of the user input operation JU11 Event EQ11 occurs.

例如,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來導致該電應用目標群組GK11出現於該使用者介面區AP22中。該輸入單元270響應該觸發事件EQ11來提供該操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來導致該電應用目標群組GK11出現於該使用者介面區AP22中。在該電應用目標群組GK11出現於該使用者介面區AP22中的條件下,該第一感測單元260於該指定時間TD01之內接收該使用者輸入操作BU13,並響應該使用者輸入操作BU13來提供該第一感測訊號SM11到該處理單元230。例如,在該輸入組件440包含該第一感測單元260的條件下,該第一感測單元260包含該電應用目標群組GK11。 For example, the processing unit 230 causes the electrical application target group GK11 to appear in the user interface area AP22 in response to the trigger event EQ11. The input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ11. The processing unit 230 causes the electrical application target group GK11 to appear in the user interface area AP22 in response to the operation request signal SZ11. Under the condition that the electrical application target group GK11 appears in the user interface area AP22, the first sensing unit 260 receives the user input operation BU13 within the specified time TD01, and responds to the user input operation The BU13 provides the first sensing signal SM11 to the processing unit 230 . For example, under the condition that the input element 440 includes the first sensing unit 260, the first sensing unit 260 includes the electrical application target group GK11.

在一些實施例中,在該輸入組件440包含該第一感測單元260且該第一感測單元260包含該電應用目標群組GK11的條件下,屬於該電應用目標群組GK11的該電應用目標WK11接收該使用者輸入操作BU13來導致該第一感測單元260提供該第一感測訊號SM11到該處理單元230。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the input element 440 includes the first sensing unit 260 and the first sensing unit 260 includes the electrical application target group GK11, the electrical appliances belonging to the electrical application target group GK11 The application target WK11 receives the user input operation BU13 to cause the first sensing unit 260 to provide the first sensing signal SM11 to the processing unit 230 .

例如,在該指向裝置441包含該第一感測單元260且該顯示組件460受該處理單元230控制以顯示該電應用目標群組GK11的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電應用目標WK11的該使用者輸入操作BU13來導致該第一感測單元260提供該第一感測訊號SM11到該處理單元230。例如,該處理單元230被配置以導致該顯示組件460顯示該選擇工具YJ11和該電應用目標群組GK11。該指向裝置441用於控制該選擇工具YJ11。該使用者輸入操作BU13被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電應用目標WK11。 For example, under the condition that the pointing device 441 includes the first sensing unit 260 and the display element 460 is controlled by the processing unit 230 to display the electrical application target group GK11, the pointing device 441 receives a message for selecting the electrical application The user of the target WK11 inputs the operation BU13 to cause the first sensing unit 260 to provide the first sensing signal SM11 to the processing unit 230 . For example, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the display component 460 to display the selection tool YJ11 and the electrical application target group GK11. The pointing device 441 is used to control the selection tool YJ11. The user input operation BU13 is configured to select the electrical application target WK11 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11.

請參閱第30圖、第31圖、第32圖和第33圖。第30圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8039的示意圖。第31圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8040的示意圖。第32圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8041的示意圖。第33圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8042的示意圖。如第30圖、第31圖、第32圖和第33圖所示,該實施結構8039、該實施結構8040、該實施結構8041和該實施結構8042的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控 制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figures 30, 31, 32, and 33. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8039 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8040 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8041 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8042 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Fig. 30, Fig. 31, Fig. 32 and Fig. 33, each structure of the implementation structure 8039, the implementation structure 8040, the implementation structure 8041 and the implementation structure 8042 includes the control device 210, the control device 210 and the control device 210. The target device 330 and the server 280 are controlled. The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is configured to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該功能目標335、該第二感測單元334、一功能目標735和一多工器363。該操作單元397具有一輸出端338P和一輸出端338Q。該輸出端338P和該輸出端338Q分別位於不同空間位置。該功能目標335、該第二感測單元334、該功能目標735和該多工器363皆耦合於該操作單元397。該輸出端338P耦合於該功能目標335。該功能目標735包含一物理參數形成區AU21,並耦合於該輸出端338Q。該物理參數形成區AU21具有一可變物理參數QU2A。例如,該功能目標735是一物理可實現功能目標,並具有相似於該功能目標335的一功能結構。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 includes the operation unit 397 , the function target 335 , the second sensing unit 334 , a function target 735 and a multiplexer 363 . The operation unit 397 has an output terminal 338P and an output terminal 338Q. The output end 338P and the output end 338Q are located at different spatial positions, respectively. The functional object 335 , the second sensing unit 334 , the functional object 735 and the multiplexer 363 are all coupled to the operation unit 397 . The output 338P is coupled to the functional object 335 . The functional object 735 includes a physical parameter forming area AU21 and is coupled to the output terminal 338Q. The physical parameter forming area AU21 has a variable physical parameter QU2A. For example, the functional object 735 is a physically achievable functional object and has a functional structure similar to the functional object 335 .

該第二感測單元334用於通過該多工器363而感測複數實際物理參數的其中之一。該複數實際物理參數包含該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該可變物理參數QU2A。該控制裝置210用於控制該可變物理參數QU2A。該多工器363具有一輸入端3631、一輸入端3632、一控制端363C和一輸出端363P。 The second sensing unit 334 is used for sensing one of the complex actual physical parameters through the multiplexer 363 . The complex actual physical parameter includes the first variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QU2A. The control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A. The multiplexer 363 has an input terminal 3631, an input terminal 3632, a control terminal 363C and an output terminal 363P.

該控制端363C耦合於該操作單元397。該輸入端3631耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11。該輸入端3632 耦合於該物理參數形成區AU21。該輸出端363P耦合於該第二感測單元334。例如,該可變物理參數QU1A和該可變物理參數QU2A分別是一第三可變電性參數和一第四可變電性參數。例如,該第三可變電性參數和該第四可變電性參數分別是一第三可變電壓和一第四可變電壓。該輸入端3631和該輸出端363P之間具有一第一功能關係。該第一功能關係等於一第一導通關係和一第一關斷關係的其中之一。 The control terminal 363C is coupled to the operation unit 397 . The input terminal 3631 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU11. The input 3632 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU21. The output terminal 363P is coupled to the second sensing unit 334 . For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QU2A are a third variable electrical parameter and a fourth variable electrical parameter, respectively. For example, the third variable electrical parameter and the fourth variable electrical parameter are a third variable voltage and a fourth variable voltage, respectively. There is a first functional relationship between the input end 3631 and the output end 363P. The first functional relationship is equal to one of a first on relationship and a first off relationship.

該輸入端3632和該輸出端363P之間具有一第二功能關係。該第二功能關係等於一第二導通關係和一第二關斷關係的其中之一。在該第一功能關係等於該第一導通關係的條件下,該第二感測單元334用於通過該輸出端363P和該輸入端3631來感測該可變物理參數QU1A,並通過該輸出端363P和該輸入端3631而耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11。在該第二功能關係等於該第二導通關係的條件下,該第二感測單元334用於通過該輸出端363P和該輸入端3632來感測該可變物理參數QU2A,並通過該輸出端363P和該輸入端3632而耦合於該物理參數形成區AU21。例如,該多工器363受該操作單元397控制,並是一類比多工器。 There is a second functional relationship between the input end 3632 and the output end 363P. The second functional relationship is equal to one of a second on relationship and a second off relationship. Under the condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first conduction relationship, the second sensing unit 334 is used for sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output terminal 363P and the input terminal 3631, and through the output terminal 363P and the input terminal 3631 are coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU11. Under the condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second conduction relationship, the second sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU2A through the output terminal 363P and the input terminal 3632, and use the output terminal to sense the variable physical parameter QU2A. 363P and the input terminal 3632 are coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU21. For example, the multiplexer 363 is controlled by the operation unit 397 and is a one-to-one multiplexer.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210和該應用環境EX11的其中之一具有一物理參數形成區AT21。該物理參數形成區AT21具有一可變物理參數QP2A。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一多工器263。該多工器263具有一輸入端2631、一輸入端2632、一控制 端263C和一輸出端263P。該控制端263C耦合於該處理單元230。 In some embodiments, one of the control device 210 and the application environment EX11 has a physical parameter forming area AT21. The physical parameter forming area AT21 has a variable physical parameter QP2A. The control device 210 further includes a multiplexer 263 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The multiplexer 263 has an input end 2631, an input end 2632, a control terminal 263C and an output terminal 263P. The control terminal 263C is coupled to the processing unit 230 .

該輸入端2631耦合於該物理參數形成區AT11。該輸入端2632耦合於該物理參數形成區AT21。該輸出端263P耦合於該第一感測單元260。例如,該第二可變物理參數QP1A和該可變物理參數QP2A分別是一第五可變電性參數和一第六可變電性參數。例如,該第五可變電性參數和該第六可變電性參數分別是一第五可變電壓和一第六可變電壓。該輸入端2631和該輸出端263P之間具有一第三功能關係。該第三功能關係等於一第三導通關係和一第三關斷關係的其中之一。 The input terminal 2631 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AT11. The input terminal 2632 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AT21. The output terminal 263P is coupled to the first sensing unit 260 . For example, the second variable physical parameter QP1A and the variable physical parameter QP2A are a fifth variable electrical parameter and a sixth variable electrical parameter, respectively. For example, the fifth variable electrical parameter and the sixth variable electrical parameter are a fifth variable voltage and a sixth variable voltage, respectively. There is a third functional relationship between the input terminal 2631 and the output terminal 263P. The third functional relationship is equal to one of a third on relationship and a third off relationship.

該輸入端2632和該輸出端263P之間具有一第四功能關係。該第四功能關係等於一第四導通關係和一第四關斷關係的其中之一。在該第三功能關係等於該第三導通關係的條件下,該第一感測單元260用於通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2631來感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A,並通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2631而耦合於該物理參數形成區AT11。在該第四功能關係等於該第四導通關係的條件下,該第一感測單元260用於通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2632來感測該可變物理參數QP2A,並通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2632而耦合於該物理參數形成區AT21。例如,該多工器263受該處理單元230控制,並是一類比多工器。 There is a fourth functional relationship between the input end 2632 and the output end 263P. The fourth functional relationship is equal to one of a fourth on relationship and a fourth off relationship. Under the condition that the third functional relationship is equal to the third conduction relationship, the first sensing unit 260 is used for sensing the second variable physical parameter QP1A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631, and through the The output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631 are coupled to the physical parameter forming area AT11. Under the condition that the fourth functional relationship is equal to the fourth conduction relationship, the first sensing unit 260 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QP2A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2632, and use the output terminal to sense the variable physical parameter QP2A. 263P and the input terminal 2632 are coupled to the physical parameter forming area AT21. For example, the multiplexer 263 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is a one-to-one multiplexer.

在一些實施例中,該功能目標335由一功能目標識別符HA2T所識別。該功能目標735由一功能目標 識別符HA22所識別。該功能目標335和該功能目標735分別位於不同空間位置,並皆耦合於該操作單元397。該功能目標識別符HA2T和該功能目標識別符HA22皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。為了控制該功能目標335,該控制訊號SC11進一步輸送該功能目標識別符HA2T。該操作單元397從該控制裝置210接收該控制訊號SC11。該操作單元397響應該控制訊號SC11來選擇該功能目標335以進行控制。例如,該功能目標識別符HA2T被配置以指示該輸出端338P,並是一第一功能目標號碼。該功能目標識別符HA22被配置以指示該輸出端338Q,並是一第二功能目標號碼。 In some embodiments, the functional object 335 is identified by a functional object identifier HA2T. The functional object 735 consists of a functional object Identified by the identifier HA22. The functional object 335 and the functional object 735 are located in different spatial positions, and both are coupled to the operation unit 397 . Both the function target identifier HA2T and the function target identifier HA22 are preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. In order to control the functional object 335, the control signal SC11 further transmits the functional object identifier HA2T. The operation unit 397 receives the control signal SC11 from the control device 210 . The operation unit 397 selects the function object 335 for control in response to the control signal SC11. For example, the functional object identifier HA2T is configured to indicate the output 338P and is a first functional object number. The functional object identifier HA22 is configured to indicate the output 338Q and is a second functional object number.

該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一電使用目標285、和耦合於該處理單元230的一電使用目標286。該電使用目標285由一電使用目標識別符HZ2T所識別。該電使用目標286由一電使用目標識別符HZ22所識別。該電使用目標識別符HZ2T和該電使用目標識別符HZ22皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GBL1而被預設。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標285而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來選擇該功能目標335以進行控制。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標286而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來選擇該功能目標735以進行控制。 The control device 210 further includes an electricity usage target 285 coupled to the processing unit 230 , and an electricity usage target 286 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The electricity usage target 285 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ2T. The electricity usage target 286 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ22. Both the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T and the electrical usage target identifier HZ22 are preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL1. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electrical usage target 285, the processing unit 230 selects the function target 335 for control in response to the trigger event EQ11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs by virtue of the electrical usage target 286, the processing unit 230 selects the function target 735 for control in response to the trigger event EQ11.

在一些實施例中,該儲存單元250具有一記憶體位置XC2T和一記憶體位置XC22,在該記憶體位置XC2T儲存該功能目標識別符HA2T,並在該記憶體位置 XC22儲存該功能目標識別符HA22。該記憶體位置XC2T由一記憶體位址EC2T所識別,或基於該記憶體位址EC2T而被識別。該記憶體位址EC2T基於該電使用目標識別符HZ2T而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標285相關於該功能目標識別符HA2T。例如,該電使用目標識別符HZ2T和該功能目標識別符HA2T之間具有一數學關係KK21;藉此,該電使用目標285相關於該功能目標識別符HA2T。 In some embodiments, the storage unit 250 has a memory location XC2T and a memory location XC22, where the functional target identifier HA2T is stored in the memory location XC2T, and in the memory location The XC22 stores the functional object identifier HA22. The memory location XC2T is identified by or based on a memory address EC2T. The memory address EC2T is preset based on the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T; thereby, the electrical usage target 285 is associated with the functional target identifier HA2T. For example, there is a mathematical relationship KK21 between the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T and the functional target identifier HA2T; thereby, the electrical usage target 285 is related to the functional target identifier HA2T.

該記憶體位置XC22由一記憶體位址EC22所識別,或基於該記憶體位址EC22而被識別。該記憶體位址EC22基於該電使用目標識別符HZ22而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標286相關於該功能目標識別符HA22。例如,該電使用目標識別符HZ22和該功能目標識別符HA22之間具有一數學關係KK22;藉此,該電使用目標286相關於該功能目標識別符HA22。 The memory location XC22 is identified by or based on a memory address EC22. The memory address EC22 is preset based on the electrical usage target identifier HZ22; thereby, the electrical usage target 286 is associated with the functional target identifier HA22. For example, there is a mathematical relationship KK22 between the electrical usage target identifier HZ22 and the functional target identifier HA22; thereby, the electrical usage target 286 is related to the functional target identifier HA22.

在一些實施例中,該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標285而發生,並導致該處理單元230接收一操作請求訊號SZ21。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標285而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來獲得該第一測量值VM11和該電使用目標識別符HZ2T,並基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T來獲得該功能目標識別符HA2T。該處理單元230基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來導致該輸出單元240向該操作單元397傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11、該第二控制訊號SC12和該第三控制訊號SC13的至少其中之一。 In some embodiments, the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the power usage target 285 and causes the processing unit 230 to receive an operation request signal SZ21. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage target 285, the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ21 to obtain the first measurement value VM11 and the electricity usage target identifier HZ2T, and based on the obtained Electric uses the target identifier HZ2T to obtain the functional target identifier HA2T. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to transmit at least one of the first control signal SC11 , the second control signal SC12 and the third control signal SC13 to the operation unit 397 based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T one.

例如,該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270 接收一使用者輸入操作JU21的一使用者輸入事件。該輸入單元270響應是該使用者輸入事件的該觸發事件EQ11來提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標285而發生的條件下,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標285來提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元230。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來提供一控制訊號SV11到該控制端263C。例如,該控制訊號SV11是一選擇控制訊號,並起到指示該輸入端2631的作用。該多工器263響應該控制訊號SV11來導致該輸入端2631和該輸出端263P之間的該第三功能關係等於該第三導通關係。 For example, the trigger event EQ11 is the input unit 270 A user input event of a user input operation JU21 is received. The input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ11 which is the user input event. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs by means of the electricity usage target 285 , the input unit 270 supplies the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230 by means of the electricity usage target 285 . The processing unit 230 provides a control signal SV11 to the control terminal 263C in response to the operation request signal SZ21. For example, the control signal SV11 is a selection control signal, and plays a role of instructing the input terminal 2631 . The multiplexer 263 causes the third functional relationship between the input end 2631 and the output end 263P to be equal to the third conduction relationship in response to the control signal SV11.

在該第三功能關係等於該第三導通關係的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該第二可變物理參數QP1A以產生該第一感測訊號SM11。該處理單元230從該第一感測單元260接收該第一感測訊號SM11,並基於所接收的該第一感測訊號SM11來以該指定測量值格式HQ11獲得該第一測量值VM11。例如,該電使用目標285和該電使用目標286被配置以分別對應於該功能目標335和該功能目標735,皆耦合於該處理單元230,並分別位於不同空間位置。 Under the condition that the third functional relationship is equal to the third conduction relationship, the first sensing unit 260 senses the second variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the first sensing signal SM11. The processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SM11 from the first sensing unit 260, and obtains the first measurement value VM11 in the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the received first sensing signal SM11. For example, the electricity usage target 285 and the electricity usage target 286 are configured to correspond to the functional target 335 and the functional target 735, respectively, are coupled to the processing unit 230, and are located at different spatial positions, respectively.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標285的該使用者輸入操作JU21以導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JU21來產生該操作請求訊號SZ21。該處理單元230接收該操作請求訊號SZ21,響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來使用 該第一感測訊號SM11以獲得該第一測量值VM11,並響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來執行一資料獲取AF2C以獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JU21 for selecting the electricity usage target 285 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur. The input unit 270 generates the operation request signal SZ21 in response to the user inputting the operation JU21. The processing unit 230 receives the operation request signal SZ21, and uses the operation request signal SZ21 in response to the operation request signal SZ21. The first sensing signal SM11 obtains the first measurement value VM11, and in response to the operation request signal SZ21, executes a data acquisition AF2C to obtain the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T.

例如,該儲存單元250包含該儲存空間SS11。該儲存空間SS11具有所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A、該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A、該電使用目標識別符HZ2T、該電使用目標識別符HZ22、該功能目標識別符HA2T、該電使用目標識別符HZ11、該電使用目標識別符HZ12、該相對值VK11和該相對值VK12。 For example, the storage unit 250 includes the storage space SS11. The storage space SS11 has the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A, the variable physical parameter range code UM1A, the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T, the electrical usage target identifier HZ22, the functional target identifier HA2T, the The electrical usage target identifier HZ11, the electrical usage target identifier HZ12, the relative value VK11, and the relative value VK12.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230被配置以基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T來獲得該記憶體位址EC2T,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址EC2T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置XC2T的該功能目標識別符HA2T以獲得該功能目標識別符HA2T。在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T和所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11,並導致該輸出單元240向該操作單元397傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the memory address EC2T based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ2T, and to access the memory address stored in the memory based on the obtained memory address EC2T The functional target identifier HA2T of the body location XC2T is obtained to obtain the functional target identifier HA2T. The processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L Under the condition, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T and the accessed control data code CK1T to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11, and causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11. The output unit 240 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the operation unit 397 .

例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該功能目標識別符HA2T。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該功能目標識別符HA2T和該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號 SC11獲得該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和該功能目標識別符HA2T。在一第三特定情況中,該操作單元397基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來執行使用該輸出端338P的該訊號產生操作BY11以向該功能目標335傳輸一功能訊號SG11。該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A處於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the functional target identifier HA2T. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the functional target identifier HA2T and the measured value target range code EM1T. The operation unit 397 is responsive to the first control signal SC11 to SC11 obtains the measurement value target range code EM1T and the functional target identifier HA2T. In a third specific case, the operation unit 397 performs the signal generation operation BY11 using the output 338P to send the function to the function based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the obtained function target identifier HA2T. The target 335 transmits a function signal SG11. The functional target 335 is responsive to the functional signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,在該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該功能目標識別符HA2T和該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該功能目標識別符HA2T和該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,並基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來提供一控制訊號SD11到該控制端363C。例如,該控制訊號SD11是一選擇控制訊號,並起到指示該輸入端3631的作用。該多工器363響應該控制訊號SD11來導致該輸入端3631和該輸出端363P之間的該第一功能關係等於該第一導通關係。在該第一功能關係等於該第一導通關係的條件下,該第二感測單元334感測該第一可變物理參數QU1A以產生一感測訊號SN11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the first control signal SC11 transmits the function target identifier HA2T and the measured value target range code EM1T, the operation unit 397 responds to the first control signal SC11 to obtain the data from the first control signal SC11 obtains the functional target identifier HA2T and the measured value target range code EM1T, and provides a control signal SD11 to the control terminal 363C based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T. For example, the control signal SD11 is a selection control signal, and plays the role of indicating the input terminal 3631 . The multiplexer 363 causes the first functional relationship between the input end 3631 and the output end 363P to be equal to the first conduction relationship in response to the control signal SD11. Under the condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first conduction relationship, the second sensing unit 334 senses the first variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a sensing signal SN11.

該操作單元397從該感測單元334接收該感測訊號SN11,並基於所接收的該感測訊號SN11來獲得一測量值VN11。在該第三特定情況中,該操作單元397基於所獲得的該測量值VN11、所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來執行使用該輸出端338P的該訊號產生操作BY11以向該功能目標335傳 輸該功能訊號SG11。 The operating unit 397 receives the sensing signal SN11 from the sensing unit 334, and obtains a measurement value VN11 based on the received sensing signal SN11. In the third specific case, the operation unit 397 performs the operation using the output 338P based on the obtained measurement value VN11, the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the obtained functional target identifier HA2T Signal generation operation BY11 to transmit to the function target 335 Input the function signal SG11.

在一些實施例中,該儲存空間SS11進一步具有一記憶體位置PF2T。該儲存單元250在該記憶體位置PF2T儲存所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。該記憶體位置PF2T由一記憶體位址FF2T所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FF2T而被識別。該記憶體位址FF2T被預設。該電使用目標285通過該處理單元230而耦合於該記憶體位置PF2T。例如,該操作請求訊號SZ21輸送一輸入資料DJ21。 In some embodiments, the storage space SS11 further has a memory location PF2T. The storage unit 250 stores the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ2T in the memory location PF2T. The memory location PF2T is identified by or based on a memory address FF2T. The memory address FF2T is preset. The electrical usage target 285 is coupled to the memory location PF2T through the processing unit 230 . For example, the operation request signal SZ21 transmits an input data DJ21.

該資料獲取AF2C是一資料獲取操作AF25和一資料獲取操作AF26的其中之一。該資料獲取操作AF25藉由使用所預設的該記憶體位址PF2T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PF2T的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。該資料獲取操作AF26基於一預設資料導出規則YU21來處理該輸入資料DJ21以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。 The data acquisition AF2C is one of a data acquisition operation AF25 and a data acquisition operation AF26. The data acquisition operation AF25 accesses the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T stored in the memory location PF2T by using the preset memory address PF2T to obtain the predetermined electrical usage target identifier HZ2T. The data acquisition operation AF26 processes the input data DJ21 based on a predetermined data derivation rule YU21 to obtain the predetermined electrical usage target identifier HZ2T.

在一些實施例中,在該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標286的一使用者輸入操作JU22的一觸發事件發生的條件下,該輸入單元270導致該處理單元230接收一操作請求訊號SZ22。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ22來獲得一測量值VM21和該電使用目標識別符HZ22,並基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ22來獲得該功能目標識別符HA22。該處理單元230基於所獲得的該測量值VM21和所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA22來導致該輸出單元240向該操作單元397傳輸一控制訊號SC27。該控制訊號SC27用於控制該可變物理參數QU2A,並輸送該 功能目標識別符HA22。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 causes the processing unit 230 to receive an operation request signal under the condition that a trigger event occurs when the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU22 for selecting the electricity usage target 286 SZ22. The processing unit 230 obtains a measurement value VM21 and the electrical usage target identifier HZ22 in response to the operation request signal SZ22, and obtains the functional target identifier HA22 based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ22. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to transmit a control signal SC27 to the operating unit 397 based on the obtained measurement value VM21 and the obtained functional target identifier HA22. The control signal SC27 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A and transmit the Functional Object Identifier HA22.

例如,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ22來提供一控制訊號SV12到該控制端263C。例如,該控制訊號SV12是一選擇控制訊號,起到指示該輸入端2632的作用,並不同於該控制訊號SV11。該多工器263響應該控制訊號SV12來導致該輸入端2632和該輸出端263P之間的該第四功能關係等於該第四導通關係。在該第四功能關係等於該第四導通關係的條件下,該第一感測單元260感測該可變物理參數QP2A以產生一感測訊號SM21。該處理單元230從該第一感測單元260接收該感測訊號SM21,並基於所接收的該感測訊號SM21來獲得該測量值VM21。 For example, the processing unit 230 provides a control signal SV12 to the control terminal 263C in response to the operation request signal SZ22. For example, the control signal SV12 is a selection control signal, which plays the role of instructing the input terminal 2632, and is different from the control signal SV11. The multiplexer 263 causes the fourth functional relationship between the input terminal 2632 and the output terminal 263P to be equal to the fourth conduction relationship in response to the control signal SV12. Under the condition that the fourth functional relationship is equal to the fourth conduction relationship, the first sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP2A to generate a sensing signal SM21. The processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal SM21 from the first sensing unit 260, and obtains the measurement value VM21 based on the received sensing signal SM21.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元397響應該控制訊號SC27來從該控制訊號SC27獲得該功能目標識別符HA22,並基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA22來提供一控制訊號SD12到該控制端363C。例如,該控制訊號SD12是一選擇控制訊號,並起到指示該輸入端3632的作用。該多工器363響應該控制訊號SD12來導致該輸入端3632和該輸出端363P之間的該第二功能關係等於該第二導通關係。在該第二功能關係等於該第二導通關係的條件下,該第二感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU2A以產生一感測訊號SN21。 In some embodiments, the operating unit 397 obtains the function target identifier HA22 from the control signal SC27 in response to the control signal SC27, and provides a control signal SD12 to the control terminal based on the obtained function target identifier HA22 363C. For example, the control signal SD12 is a selection control signal, and plays the role of instructing the input terminal 3632 . The multiplexer 363 causes the second functional relationship between the input end 3632 and the output end 363P to be equal to the second conduction relationship in response to the control signal SD12. Under the condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second conduction relationship, the second sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU2A to generate a sensing signal SN21.

該操作單元397從該第二感測單元334接收該感測訊號SN21,並基於所接收的該感測訊號SN21來獲得一測量值VN21。該操作單元397基於所獲得的該測量值VN21和所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA22來執行使用該輸 出端338Q的一訊號產生操作BY27以向該功能目標735傳輸一功能訊號SG27。該功能訊號SG27用於控制該可變物理參數QU2A。 The operating unit 397 receives the sensing signal SN21 from the second sensing unit 334, and obtains a measurement value VN21 based on the received sensing signal SN21. The operation unit 397 executes the use of the input based on the obtained measurement value VN21 and the obtained functional target identifier HA22 A signal at the output 338Q generates operation BY27 to transmit a function signal SG27 to the function target 735 . The function signal SG27 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A.

在一些實施例中,該使用者介面區AP21具有該電使用目標285和該電使用目標286。該使用者輸入操作JU21由該使用者295所執行。該電使用目標285是一第三感測目標和一第三顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標285是該第三感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標285。在該電使用目標285是該第三顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標285。例如,該第三感測目標是一第三按鈕目標。該第三顯示目標是一第三圖符目標。 In some embodiments, the user interface area AP21 has the electricity usage target 285 and the electricity usage target 286 . The user input operation JU21 is performed by the user 295 . The electrical usage target 285 is one of a third sensing target and a third display target. The input component 440 includes the electrical usage target 285 under the condition that the electrical usage target 285 is the third sensing target. The display component 460 includes the electricity usage target 285 under the condition that the electricity usage target 285 is the third display target. For example, the third sensing target is a third button target. The third display object is a third icon object.

該電使用目標286是一第四感測目標和一第四顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標286是該第四感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標286。在該電使用目標286是該第四顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標286。例如,該第四感測目標是一第四按鈕目標。該第三顯示目標是一第四圖符目標。 The electrical usage target 286 is one of a fourth sensing target and a fourth display target. The input component 440 includes the electrical usage target 286 under the condition that the electrical usage target 286 is the fourth sensing target. The display component 460 includes the electricity usage target 286 provided that the electricity usage target 286 is the fourth display target. For example, the fourth sensing target is a fourth button target. The third display object is a fourth icon object.

例如,在該電使用目標285被配置以存在於該輸入組件440的條件下,該電使用目標285接收該使用者輸入操作JU21來導致該輸入組件440提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元230。在該電使用目標285被配置以存在於該顯示組件460的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電使用目標285的該使用者輸入操作JU21來導致該指向裝置441提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元 230。例如,該使用者輸入操作JU21被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電使用目標285。例如,該選擇工具YJ11是一游標。 For example, under the condition that the electricity usage object 285 is configured to exist in the input element 440 , the electricity usage object 285 receives the user input operation JU21 to cause the input element 440 to provide the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230 . The pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JU21 for selecting the electricity usage target 285 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the operation request signal under the condition that the electricity usage target 285 is configured to exist in the display element 460 SZ21 to the processing unit 230. For example, the user input operation JU21 is configured to select the electricity usage target 285 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11. For example, the selection tool YJ11 is a cursor.

在一些實施例中,所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A、該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A、該相對值VK11和該相對值VK12皆進一步基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T而被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中。該處理單元230進一步基於該功能目標識別符HA2T來使用該儲存單元250以存取所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DC1A、該可變物理參數範圍碼UM1A、該相對值VK11和該相對值VK12的其中任一。 In some embodiments, the preset rated range limit value pair DC1A, the variable physical parameter range code UM1A, the relative value VK11 and the relative value VK12 are all further based on the preset functional target identifier HA2T. are stored in the storage space SS11. The processing unit 230 further uses the storage unit 250 to access the preset nominal range limit value pair DC1A, the variable physical parameter range code UM1A, the relative value VK11 and the relative value based on the functional target identifier HA2T Any of VK12.

所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L、所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T、所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B和所預設的控制資料碼CK12皆進一步基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T而被儲存在該記憶體空間SA1中。該處理單元230進一步基於該功能目標識別符HA2T來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L、所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T、所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DM1B和所預設的控制資料碼CK12的其中任一。 The preset application range limit value pair DM1L, the preset control data code CK1T, the preset candidate range limit value pair DM1B and the preset control data code CK12 are further based on the preset The functional object identifier HA2T is stored in the memory space SA1. The processing unit 230 further uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the preset application range limit value pair DM1L, the preset control data code CK1T, and the preset candidate based on the functional target identifier HA2T The range limit value is any one of DM1B and the preset control data code CK12.

例如,該第一記憶體位址FM1L基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11而被預設。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得該功能目標識別符HA2T。該第一資料獲取操作AF11基於所 獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HM11來獲得該第一記憶體位址FM1L,並基於所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PM1L的所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DM1L。 For example, the first memory address FM1L is predicted based on the preset function target identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EH1L, and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11 Assume. The processing unit 230 obtains the functional target identifier HA2T in response to the trigger event EQ11. The first data acquisition operation AF11 is based on the The obtained function target identifier HA2T, the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HM11 to obtain the first memory address FM1L, and based on the obtained first memory address FM1L A memory location FM1L is used to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the preset pair of application range limit values DM1L stored in the first memory location PM1L.

例如,該第二記憶體位址FV1L基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11而被預設。在該處理單元230確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11來獲得該第二記憶體位址FV1L,並基於所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FV1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PV1L的該控制資料碼CK1T。 For example, the second memory address FV1L is preset based on the preset function target identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset control data code type identifier HK11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL to which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently, the processing unit 230 determines the measurement value application range based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T and the determined measurement value application range. code EH1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 to obtain the second memory address FV1L, and based on the obtained second memory address FV1L to use the memory cell 25Y1 to access the memory cells 25Y1 stored in the The control data code CK1T of the second memory location PV1L.

請參閱第34圖。第34圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8043的示意圖。如第34圖所示,該實施結構8043包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該第一可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該第一感測單元260。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280。 See Figure 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8043 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 34 , the implementation structure 8043 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is configured to control the first variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by means of the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the first sensing unit 260 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 .

在一些實施例中,該操作單元297包含耦合於該處理單元230的一定時器545、和耦合於該處理單元230的該電應用目標WJ11。該定時器545用於測量該時鐘時間TH1A,並被配置以符合一定時器規格FW22。該定時器545受該處理單元230控制而感測該時鐘時間TH1A以產生一時鐘時間訊號SK21。 In some embodiments, the operation unit 297 includes a timer 545 coupled to the processing unit 230 , and the electrical application target WJ11 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The timer 545 is used to measure the clock time TH1A and is configured to comply with a timer specification FW22. The timer 545 is controlled by the processing unit 230 to sense the clock time TH1A to generate a clock time signal SK21.

在該第一感測單元260被配置以相同於該定時器545的條件下,該第一感測訊號SM11被配置以相同於該時鐘時間訊號SK21,該第一感測器規格FQ11被配置以相同於該定時器規格FW22,且該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置以相同於該時鐘時間TH1A。該記憶體單元25Y1儲存相同於該控制資訊碼CM15的該控制資料碼CK1T。例如,在該第二可變物理參數QP1A被配置以相同於該時鐘時間TH1A的條件下,該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L相同於該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T。該定時器規格FW22被預設。 Under the condition that the first sensing unit 260 is configured to be the same as the timer 545, the first sensing signal SM11 is configured to be the same as the clock time signal SK21, and the first sensor specification FQ11 is configured to The same as the timer specification FW22, and the second variable physical parameter QP1A is configured to be the same as the clock time TH1A. The memory unit 25Y1 stores the control data code CK1T which is the same as the control information code CM15. For example, under the condition that the second variable physical parameter QP1A is configured to be the same as the clock time TH1A, the measured value application range code EH1L is the same as the time value target range code EL1T. The timer specification FW22 is preset.

該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270接收該使用者輸入操作JU11的該使用者輸入事件。該使用者輸入操作JU11用於選擇該電應用目標WJ11。該輸入單元270響應該觸發事件EQ11來提供該操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。在該使用者輸入事件發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來使用該時鐘時間訊號SK21以獲得該第一測量值VM11。例如,該時鐘時間訊號SK21以一指定計數值格式HQ22輸送一特定計數值NP21。該指定計數值格式HQ22基於一指定位元數目UX22而被特 徵化。 The trigger event EQ11 is the user input event in which the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JU11. The user input operation JU11 is used to select the electrical application target WJ11. The input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ11. Under the condition that the user input event occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the clock time signal SK21 to obtain the first measurement value VM11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11. For example, the clock time signal SK21 transmits a specific count value NP21 in a specific count value format HQ22. The specified count value format HQ22 is specified based on a specified number of bits UX22 levy.

該處理單元230使用該時鐘時間訊號SK21以獲得等於該特定計數值NP21的該第一測量值VM11。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來執行該資料確定AE1A以確定相同於該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L。在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VM11和該測量值應用範圍RM1L之間的該第一數學關係KA11而確定該第二可變物理參數QP1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RC1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EH1L來從該記憶體單元25Y1獲得相同於該控制資訊碼CM15的該控制應用碼UA1T。例如,在該第一感測單元260被配置以相同於該定時器545的條件下,該指定測量值格式HQ11被配置以相同於該指定計數值格式HQ22。 The processing unit 230 uses the clock time signal SK21 to obtain the first measurement value VM11 equal to the specific count value NP21. The processing unit 230 performs the data determination AE1A in response to the trigger event EQ11 to determine the measured value application range code EH1L that is the same as the time value target range code EL1T. The processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the second variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KA11 between the first measurement value VM11 and the measurement value application range RM1L Conditionally, the processing unit 230 applies the range code EH1L based on the determined measurement value to obtain the control application code UA1T which is identical to the control information code CM15 from the memory unit 25Y1. For example, under the condition that the first sensing unit 260 is configured to be the same as the timer 545, the specified measurement value format HQ11 is configured to be the same as the specified count value format HQ22.

例如,該控制資訊碼CM15包含所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T和所預設的該時鐘參考時間值NR11。該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制應用碼UA1T來在該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FB11的該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生輸送該控制資料訊息CN15的該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該控制資料訊息CN15包含所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T和所預設的該時鐘參考時間值NR11。在該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作 用。 For example, the control information code CM15 includes the preset time value target range code EL1T and the preset clock reference time value NR11. The processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FB11 within the operation time TD11 based on the obtained control application code UA1T to cause the output unit 240 to generate the output unit 240 to transmit the control data message CN15 The first control signal SC11. For example, the control data message CN15 includes the preset time value target range code EL1T and the preset clock reference time value NR11. Under the condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the first control signal SC11 transmits the preset time value target range code EL1T to instruct the measurement Value Target Range RN1T Action use.

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該功能單元335和該儲存單元332。包含於該操作單元397中的該定時器342用於測量該時鐘時間TH1A,並被配置以符合該定時器規格FT21。該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關於該時鐘時間TH1A。該時鐘時間TH1A基於一時間目標區間HR1ET而被特徵化。該時間目標區間HR1ET由一時間值目標範圍RQ1T所代表。該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T被配置以指示該時間目標區間HR1ET。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 includes the operation unit 397 , the function unit 335 and the storage unit 332 . The timer 342 included in the operation unit 397 is used to measure the clock time TH1A and is configured to comply with the timer specification FT21. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH1A. The clock time TH1A is characterized based on a time target interval HR1ET. The time target interval HR1ET is represented by a time value target range RQ1T. The time value target range code EL1T is configured to indicate the time target interval HR1ET.

該儲存單元332具有一記憶體位置YS1T,並在該記憶體位置YS1T儲存該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T。該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T代表該第一可變物理參數QU1A被期望在該時間目標區間HR1ET內處於的一物理參數目標範圍RK1ET,並被配置以基於該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T而被儲存在該記憶體位置YS1T。該記憶體位置YS1T基於一記憶體位址AS1T而被識別。該記憶體位址AS1T基於該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T而被預設。該物理參數目標範圍RK1ET選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。 The storage unit 332 has a memory location YS1T, and stores the physical parameter target range code UQ1T in the memory location YS1T. The physical parameter target range code UQ1T represents a physical parameter target range RK1ET in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time target interval HR1ET, and is configured to be stored in the time value target range code EL1T based on the time value target range code EL1T The memory location is YS1T. The memory location YS1T is identified based on a memory address AS1T. The memory address AS1T is preset based on the time value target range code EL1T. The physical parameter target range RK1ET is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . .

在一些實施例中,當該操作單元397接收該第一控制訊號SC11時,該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該控制訊號SC11輸送所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T。該操作單元397從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得所輸送的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T,基於所獲得的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T來獲得該 記憶體位址AS1T,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址AS1T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置YS1T的該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T以獲得所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。 In some embodiments, when the operation unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11, the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T. The control signal SC11 transmits the preset time value target range code EL1T. The operation unit 397 obtains the transmitted time value target range code EL1T from the first control signal SC11, and obtains the time value target range code EL1T based on the obtained time value target range code EL1T memory address AS1T, and access the physical parameter target range code UQ1T stored in the memory location YS1T based on the obtained memory address AS1T to obtain the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.

該操作單元397基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的該訊號產生操作BY11以向該功能目標335傳輸該功能訊號SG11。該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A處於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該操作單元397從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得所輸送的該時鐘參考時間值NR11,基於所獲得的該時鐘參考時間值NR11來導致該定時器342在一啟動時間TT12之內啟動,並藉此導致該定時器342在該啟動時間TT12之內產生一時鐘時間訊號SY10。該時鐘時間訊號SY10是一初始時間訊號,並以該指定計數值格式HH25輸送一初始計數值NY10。例如,該初始計數值NY10被配置以相同於該時鐘參考時間值NR11。 The operation unit 397 performs the signal generation operation BY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to transmit the function signal SG11 to the function target 335 . The functional target 335 is responsive to the functional signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The operation unit 397 obtains the supplied clock reference time value NR11 from the first control signal SC11, causes the timer 342 to start within a start time TT12 based on the obtained clock reference time value NR11, and thereby This causes the timer 342 to generate a clock time signal SY10 within the start time TT12. The clock time signal SY10 is an initial time signal, and sends an initial count value NY10 in the specified count value format HH25. For example, the initial count value NY10 is configured to be the same as the clock reference time value NR11.

請參閱第35圖,第35圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8044的示意圖。如第35圖所示,該實施結構8044包含該控制目標裝置330和用於控制該控制目標裝置330的該控制裝置210。該控制目標裝置330包含該第一可變物理參數QU1A、該第二感測單元334和該操作單元397。該第一可變物理參數QU1A基於由該測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和由一測量值應用範圍RN1L所代表的一物理參數應用範圍RD1EL而被特徵化。該第二感測單元334感測該 第一可變物理參數QU1A以產生一感測訊號SN11。 Please refer to FIG. 35 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8044 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 35 , the implementation structure 8044 includes the control target device 330 and the control device 210 for controlling the control target device 330 . The control target device 330 includes the first variable physical parameter QU1A, the second sensing unit 334 and the operating unit 397 . The first variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on the physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by the measurement value target range RN1T and a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L. The second sensing unit 334 senses the The first variable physical parameter QU1A is used to generate a sensing signal SN11.

該操作單元397耦合於該第二感測單元334。在該操作單元397接收起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用的一第一控制訊號SC11的條件下,該操作單元397響應該感測訊號SN11來獲得一測量值VN11。在該操作單元397藉由檢查該測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的一數學關係KV11而確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該操作單元397由於該第一控制訊號SC11而確定該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的一範圍差異DS11以導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 The operating unit 397 is coupled to the second sensing unit 334 . Under the condition that the operation unit 397 receives a first control signal SC11 that functions to indicate the target range of the measurement value RN1T, the operation unit 397 obtains a measurement value VN11 in response to the sensing signal SN11. Under the condition that the operation unit 397 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by checking a mathematical relationship KV11 between the measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L, the The operation unit 397 determines a range difference DS11 between the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L due to the first control signal SC11 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

請參閱第36圖。第36圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8045的示意圖。如第36圖所示,該實施結構8045包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。請額外參閱第35圖。在一些實施例中,該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該第二感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。該測量值VN11以一指定測量值格式HH11而被該操作單元397獲得。 See Figure 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8045 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 36 , the implementation structure 8045 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 . See additionally Figure 35. In some embodiments, the second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L. For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generation HF11 performed by the second sensing unit 334 . The measurement value VN11 is obtained by the operating unit 397 in a specified measurement value format HH11.

該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L皆基於該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11來用該 指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L分別具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T和一應用範圍界限值對DN1L。該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和一控制碼CC1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T而被預設。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。 The measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L are both based on the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 to use the Preset by specifying the measured value format HH11. The measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L respectively have a target range limit value pair DN1T and an application range limit value pair DN1L. The first control signal SC11 transmits the target range limit value pair DN1T, the application range limit value pair DN1L and a control code CC1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target range RN1T of the measurement value by sending the target range limit value pair DN1T.

該操作單元397從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並藉由比較該測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來檢查該數學關係KV11以做出該測量值VN11是否為於該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一邏輯決定PB11。在該邏輯決定PB11是肯定的條件下,該操作單元397確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 The operation unit 397 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L from the first control signal SC11, and checks the mathematical relationship KV11 to make the measurement by comparing the measured value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L Whether the value VN11 is within the measurement value application range RN1L or not is a logical decision PB11. Under the condition that the logical decision PB11 is affirmative, the operation unit 397 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.

該操作單元397從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該目標範圍界限值對DN1T。在該操作單元397確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該操作單元397藉由比較所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來檢查該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的一範圍關係KA1A以做出所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L是否相等的一邏輯決定PY11。 The operation unit 397 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T from the first control signal SC11. Under the condition that the operation unit 397 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the operation unit 397 compares the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T with the obtained application range Range limit value pair DN1L to check a range relationship KA1A between the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L to make the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T and the obtained application range limit value pair A logic that determines whether DN1L is equal or not determines PY11.

在該邏輯決定PY11是否定的條件下,該操 作單元397辨識該範圍關係KA1A為一範圍相異關係以確定該範圍差異DS11。該操作單元397從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該控制碼CC1T。在該操作單元397確定該範圍差異DS11的條件下,該操作單元397基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來執行一訊號產生控制GY11以產生用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一功能訊號SG11。 Under the condition that the logic determines that PY11 is negative, the operation The operation unit 397 identifies the range relationship KA1A as a range dissimilarity relationship to determine the range difference DS11. The operation unit 397 obtains the control code CC1T from the first control signal SC11. Under the condition that the operation unit 397 determines the range difference DS11, the operation unit 397 executes a signal generation control GY11 based on the obtained control code CC1T to generate a signal for causing the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter A function signal SG11 of the target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,在該操作單元397於一操作時間TF11之內執行該訊號產生控制GY11之後,該第二感測單元334感測該第一可變物理參數QU1A以產生一感測訊號SN12。該操作單元397於該操作時間TF11之後的一指定時間TG12之內響應該感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一測量值VN12。在該操作單元397於該指定時間TG12之內藉由比較該測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該操作單元397執行一確保操作GU11,該確保操作GU11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一物理參數目標範圍碼UN1T被記錄。 In some embodiments, after the operation unit 397 executes the signal generation control GY11 within an operation time TF11, the second sensing unit 334 senses the first variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a sensing signal SN12 . The operation unit 397 responds to the sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operation time TF11 to obtain a measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11. Within the specified time TG12, the operation unit 397 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by comparing the measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T Conditional, the operation unit 397 performs a guarantee operation GU11 for causing a physical parameter target range code UN1T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET to be recorded.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關於一可變時間長度LF1A。例如,該操作單元397用於測量該可變時間長度LF1A。該可變時間長度LF1A基於一時間長度參考範圍HJ11和一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該時間長度參考範圍HJ11由一時間長度值參考範圍GJ11所代表。該參考時間長度LJ1T由一時間長度值CL1T所代表。該第 一控制訊號SC11進一步輸送該時間長度值CL1T。該操作單元397被配置以從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該時間長度值CL1T,並檢查所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T和該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11之間的一數值關係KJ11以做出用於控制一特定時間TJ1T的一計數操作BC1T是否要被執行的一邏輯決定PE11。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is associated with a variable time length LF1A. For example, the operation unit 397 is used to measure the variable time length LF1A. The variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ11 and a reference time length LJ1T. The time length reference range HJ11 is represented by a time length value reference range GJ11. The reference time length LJ1T is represented by a time length value CL1T. the A control signal SC11 further transmits the time length value CL1T. The operation unit 397 is configured to obtain the time length value CL1T from the first control signal SC11, and check a numerical relationship KJ11 between the obtained time length value CL1T and the time length value reference range GJ11 for use PE11 is determined by a logic that controls whether a counting operation BC1T at a specific time TJ1T is to be executed.

在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該操作單元397基於所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T來執行該計數操作BC1T。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A由於該第一控制訊號SC11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該操作單元397基於該計數操作BC1T來到達該特定時間TJ1T,並在該特定時間TJ1T之內執行用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一訊號產生操作BY21。 Under the condition that the logic decision PE11 is positive, the operation unit 397 performs the counting operation BC1T based on the obtained time length value CL1T. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the first control signal SC11, the operation unit 397 reaches the specific time TJ1T based on the counting operation BC1T, and A signal generating operation BY21 for causing the first variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL is performed within the specific time TJ1T.

請參閱第37圖、第38圖、第39圖、第40圖和第41圖。第37圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8046的示意圖。第38圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8047的示意圖。第39圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8048的示意圖。第40圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8049的示意圖。第41圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8050的示意圖。如第37圖、第38圖、第39圖、第40圖和第41圖所示,該實施結構8046、該實施結構8047、該實施結構8048、該實施結構8049 和該實施結構8050的每一結構包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 37, 38, 39, 40 and 41. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8046 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8047 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8048 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8049 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8050 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Fig. 37, Fig. 38, Fig. 39, Fig. 40 and Fig. 41, the implementation structure 8046, the implementation structure 8047, the implementation structure 8048, the implementation structure 8049 And each structure of the implementation structure 8050 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 .

請額外參閱第35圖。在一些實施例中,該操作單元397被配置以執行與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一物理參數控制功能FA11,並包含耦合於該第二感測單元334的一處理單元331、耦合於該處理單元331的一輸入單元337、和耦合於該處理單元331的一輸出單元338。該物理參數控制功能FA11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一物理參數控制功能規格GAL1。該第二感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一第二感測器規格FU11。例如,該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該第二感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該第二感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。 See additionally Figure 35. In some embodiments, the operation unit 397 is configured to execute a physical parameter control function FA11 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and includes a processing unit 331 coupled to the second sensing unit 334, coupled to the An input unit 337 of the processing unit 331 and an output unit 338 coupled to the processing unit 331 . The physical parameter control function FA11 is configured to conform to a physical parameter control function specification GAL1 associated with the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The second sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a second sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L. For example, the second sensor specification FU11 includes a second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a second sensor sensitivity YW11. The second sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generation HF11 performed by the second sensing unit 334 .

在該輸入單元337從一控制裝置210接收該第一控制訊號SC11的條件下,該處理單元331響應該感測訊號SN11來以一指定測量值格式HH11獲得該測量值VN11。例如,該指定測量值格式HH11基於一指定位元數目UY11而被特徵化。例如,當該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11時,該第二感測單元334感測該第一可變物理參數QU1A以執行相依於該第二感測器靈敏度YW11的該感測訊號產生HF11,該感測訊號產生HF11用於產生該感測訊號SN11。在該處理單元331由於該第一控制訊號SC11而確定該範圍差異DS11的條件下,該處理單元331 導致該輸出單元240輸出用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一功能訊號SG11。 Under the condition that the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 from a control device 210, the processing unit 331 obtains the measurement value VN11 in a specified measurement value format HH11 in response to the sensing signal SN11. For example, the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY11. For example, when the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the second sensing unit 334 senses the first variable physical parameter QU1A to execute the sensing signal dependent on the second sensor sensitivity YW11 HF11 is generated, the sensing signal generating HF11 is used to generate the sensing signal SN11. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the range difference DS11 due to the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 The output unit 240 is caused to output a function signal SG11 for causing the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於一額定物理參數範圍RD1E而被特徵化。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RD1E由一額定測量值範圍RD1N所代表,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL皆包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1包含該第二感測器規格FU11、用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RD1E的一額定物理參數範圍表示GA1E、和用於表示該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一物理參數應用範圍表示GA1L。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RD1E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a nominal measurement value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . respectively represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . Both the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter application range RD1EL are included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The physical parameter control function specification GAL1 includes the second sensor specification FU11, a rated physical parameter range representation GA1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter application for representing the physical parameter application range RD1EL The range represents GA1L.

該額定測量值範圍RD1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GA1E、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GA1E的一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設,具有一額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…所分別代表的該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DD1A用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…包含該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 The nominal measured value range RD1N is based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GA1E, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GA1E to use the specified measured value format HH11 It is preset to have a rated range limit value pair DD1A, and includes the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . respectively represented by the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . For example, the nominal range limit value pair DD1A is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . include the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L.

在一些實施例中,該測量值目標範圍RN1T 由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一測量值目標範圍碼EM1T所代表;藉此該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…皆基於該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1而被預設。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。 In some embodiments, the measurement target range RN1T Represented by a measurement target range code EM1T contained in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .; whereby the measurement target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11 , EM12 , . . . are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL1 . The first control signal SC11 plays a role of indicating the target range of the measurement value RN1T by sending the target range code of the measurement value EM1T.

該測量值應用範圍RN1L由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一測量值應用範圍碼EM1L所代表,並具有一應用範圍界限值對DN1L;藉此該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L被配置以指示該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GA1L、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數應用範圍表示GA1L的一資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GA1L、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The measurement value application range RN1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EM1L included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . and has an application range limit value pair DN1L; whereby the measurement value applies The range code EM1L is configured to indicate the physical parameter application range RD1EL. For example, the application range limit value for DN1L is based on the physical parameter application range representation GA1L, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a data encoding operation ZX12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GA1L to use the specified measurement value format HH11 is preset. The measurement value application range RN1L is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the physical parameter application range representation GA1L, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the data encoding operation ZX12.

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330進一步包含耦合於該處理單元331的一儲存單元332。該儲存單元332儲存所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和一可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該第一控制訊號SC11進一步輸送該額定範圍界限值對DD1A。當該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11時,該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A等於選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的一特 定測量值範圍碼EM14。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 further includes a storage unit 332 coupled to the processing unit 331 . The storage unit 332 stores the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and a variable physical parameter range code UN1A. The first control signal SC11 further delivers the rated range limit pair DD1A. When the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to a special value selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . Set the measurement value range code EM14.

例如,該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指示基於一感測操作ZS11而被該處理單元331先前確定的一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4。該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。由該第二感測單元334所執行的該感測操作ZS11用於感測該第一可變物理參數QU1A。在該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11之前,該特定測量值範圍碼EM14被指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 For example, the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 331 based on a sensing operation ZS11. The specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The sensing operation ZS11 performed by the second sensing unit 334 is used to sense the first variable physical parameter QU1A. Before the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

例如,在該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11之前,該處理單元331獲得該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。在該處理單元331於該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11之前基於該感測操作ZS11而確定該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的條件下,該處理單元331藉由使用該儲存單元332來將所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該特定測量值範圍碼EM14代表被配置以代表該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的一特定測量值範圍。該特定測量值範圍基於該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。例如,該第二感測單元334藉由執行該感測操作ZS11來執行相依於該第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測訊號產生以產生一感測訊號。 For example, before the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 obtains the specific measurement value range code EM14. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the sensing operation ZS11 before the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 , the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store all the parameters. The specific measurement value range code EM14 obtained is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. The specific measurement value range code EM14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the specific physical parameter range RD1E4. The specific measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11. For example, the second sensing unit 334 performs a sensing signal generation depending on the second sensor sensitivity YW11 by performing the sensing operation ZS11 to generate a sensing signal.

在該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11之前,該處理單元331接收該感測訊號,響應該感測訊號來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一特定測量值,並 執行用於檢查該特定測量值和該特定測量值範圍之間的一數學關係的一特定檢查操作。在該處理單元331基於該特定檢查操作而確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A處於的該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的條件下,該處理單元331藉由使用該儲存單元332來將所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該處理單元331響應用於感測該第一可變物理參數QU1A的一特定感測操作來決定該處理單元331是否要使用該儲存單元332以改變該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。例如,該特定感測操作由該第二感測單元334所執行。 Before the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 receives the sensing signal, obtains a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH11 in response to the sensing signal, and A specific check operation for checking a mathematical relationship between the specific measurement value and the specific measurement value range is performed. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is located based on the specific checking operation, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store the obtained specific physical parameter The measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. The processing unit 331 determines whether the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to change the variable physical parameter range code UN1A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the first variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the second sensing unit 334 .

在一些實施例中,在該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11的條件下,該處理單元331響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11和該儲存單元332的其中之一獲得一操作參考資料碼XU11,並藉由運行一資料確定程序NA1A來執行使用該操作參考資料碼XU11的一資料確定AA1A以確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 responds to the first control signal SC11 from one of the first control signal SC11 and the storage unit 332 Obtain an operation reference data code XU11, and perform a data determination AA1A using the operation reference data code XU11 by running a data determination program NA1A to determine the selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . The measurement value application range code EM1L is used to select the measurement value application range RN1L from the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . .

該操作參考資料碼XU11相同於基於該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1而被預設的一可允許參考資料碼。該資料確定程序NA1A基於該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1而被建構。該資料確定AA1A是一資料確定操作AA11和一資料確定操作AA12的其中之一。在該操作參考資料碼XU11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存單元332中的該可變物理 參數範圍碼UN1A而被獲得以相同於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的條件下,是該資料確定操作AA11的該資料確定AA1A基於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L相同或不同於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。 The operation reference data code XU11 is the same as an allowable reference data code preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL1. The data determination program NA1A is constructed based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL1. The data determination AA1A is one of a data determination operation AA11 and a data determination operation AA12. In the operation reference data code XU11 is stored in the storage unit 332 by accessing the variable physical Under the condition that the parameter range code UN1A is obtained with the same condition as the specific measurement value range code EM14, it is the data determination operation AA11 of the data determination AA1A to determine the measurement value application range based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 Code EM1L. For example, the determined measured value application range code EM1L is the same as or different from the obtained specific measured value range code EM14.

在該操作參考資料碼XU11從該第一控制訊號SC11和該儲存單元332的其中之一而被獲得以相同於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的條件下,是該資料確定操作AA12的該資料確定AA1A藉由執行使用該測量值VN11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的一科學計算MR11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,該科學計算MR11基於一特定經驗公式XR11而被執行。該特定經驗公式XR11基於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…而被預先制定。例如,該特定經驗公式XR11基於該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1而被預先制定。 Under the condition that the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained from one of the first control signal SC11 and the storage unit 332 to be the same as the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, it is the data determination operation AA12 The data determines that AA1A selects the measured value application from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... by performing a scientific calculation MR11 for DD1A using the measured value VN11 and the obtained nominal range limit value for DD1A Range Code EM1L The range code EM1L is applied to determine this measurement value. For example, the scientific calculation MR11 is performed based on a specific empirical formula XR11. The specific empirical formula XR11 is predetermined based on the preset nominal range limit value pair DD1A and the complex number of different measured value reference range codes EM11 , EM12 , . . . For example, the specific empirical formula XR11 is formulated in advance based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL1.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元331基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並基於該測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L之間的一資料比較CD11來檢查該數學關係KV11以做出該測量值VN11是否為於所選擇的該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一邏輯決定PB11。在該邏輯決定PB11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元331確定該第一可變物理參 數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 applies a range code EM1L based on the determined measurement value to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L, and based on the measurement value VN11 and the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L A data comparison of CD11 checks the mathematical relationship KV11 to make a logical decision PB11 whether the measurement value VN11 is within the selected measurement value application range RN1L. Under the condition that the logical decision PB11 is positive, the processing unit 331 determines the first variable physical parameter Number QU1A is currently in the application range RD1EL of this physical parameter.

該處理單元331從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。在該處理單元331確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元331藉由比較所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來檢查該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的一範圍關係KA1A以做出所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L是否相等的一邏輯決定PZ11。在該邏輯決定PZ11是否定的條件下,該處理單元331辨識該範圍關係KA1A為一範圍相異關係以確定該範圍差異DS11。 The processing unit 331 obtains the measured value target range code EM1T from the first control signal SC11. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in, the processing unit 331 compares the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T with the determined measurement Value application range code EM1L to check a range relationship KA1A between the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L to make the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the determined measurement value application range code A logic of whether EM1L is equal or not determines PZ11. Under the condition that the logic decision PZ11 is negative, the processing unit 331 identifies the range relationship KA1A as a range dissimilarity relationship to determine the range difference DS11.

在一些實施例中,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L的一應用範圍界限值DN15和相對於該應用範圍界限值DN15的一應用範圍界限值DN16。該控制目標裝置330進一步包含耦合於該輸出單元338的一功能目標335。該功能目標335具有該第一可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該第二感測單元334耦合於該功能目標335。該處理單元331通過該輸出單元338來使該功能目標335執行與該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定功能操作ZH11。例如,該指定功能操作ZH11用於導致一觸發事件EQ11發生。該控制裝置210響應該觸發事件EQ11來輸出該第一控制訊號SC11。 In some embodiments, the pair of application range limit values DN1L includes an application range limit value DN15 of the measurement value application range RN1L and an application range limit value DN16 relative to the application range limit value DN15. The control target device 330 further includes a functional target 335 coupled to the output unit 338 . The functional object 335 has the first variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the second sensing unit 334 is coupled to the functional target 335 . The processing unit 331 causes the functional object 335 to execute a specified functional operation ZH11 related to the first variable physical parameter QU1A through the output unit 338 . For example, the designated function operation ZH11 is used to cause a trigger event EQ11 to occur. The control device 210 outputs the first control signal SC11 in response to the trigger event EQ11.

例如,在該應用範圍界限值DN15不同於該應用範圍界限值DN16且該測量值VN11是於該應用範圍界 限值DN15和該應用範圍界限值DN16之間的條件下,該處理單元331藉由比較該測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來做出該邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。在該應用範圍界限值DN15、該應用範圍界限值DN16和該測量值VN11是相等的條件下,該處理單元331藉由比較該測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來做出該邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。 For example, the application range limit value DN15 is different from the application range limit value DN16 and the measured value VN11 is in the application range limit value Under the condition between the limit value DN15 and the application range limit value DN16, the processing unit 331 makes the logical decision PB11 to be affirmative by comparing the measured value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L. Under the condition that the application range limit value DN15, the application range limit value DN16 and the measurement value VN11 are equal, the processing unit 331 makes a decision by comparing the measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L The logic determines PB11 to be positive.

該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1進一步包含一物理參數表示GA1T1。該物理參數表示GA1T1用於表示在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T。該儲存單元332具有一記憶體位置YM1L和不同於該記憶體位置YM1L的一記憶體位置YX1T,在該記憶體位置YM1L儲存該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並在該記憶體位置YX1T儲存一控制碼CC1T。 The physical parameter control function specification GAL1 further includes a physical parameter representation GA1T1. The physical parameter representation GA1T1 is used to represent a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The storage unit 332 has a memory location YM1L and a memory location YX1T different from the memory location YM1L, the application range limit value pair DN1L is stored in the memory location YM1L, and a control is stored in the memory location YX1T Code CC1T.

例如,該記憶體位置YM1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被識別。該記憶體位置YX1T基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被識別。該控制碼CC1T基於該物理參數表示GA1T1和用於轉換該物理參數表示GA1T1的一資料編碼操作ZX21而被預設。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和該控制碼CC1T分別基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被該儲存單元332儲存。 For example, the memory location YM1L is identified based on the preset measurement value using the range code EM1L. The memory location YX1T is identified based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T. The control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GA1T1 and a data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GA1T1. For example, the application range limit value pair DN1L and the control code CC1T are stored by the storage unit 332 based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, respectively.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元331藉由運行一資料獲取程序ND1A來執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一資料獲取AD1A以獲得該應用範圍界限 值對DN1L。例如,該資料獲取AD1A是一資料獲取操作AD11和一資料獲取操作AD12的其中之一。該資料獲取程序ND1A基於該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1而被建構。該資料獲取操作AD11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來使用該儲存單元332以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置YM1L的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 executes a data acquisition AD1A using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L to obtain the application range limit by running a data acquisition program ND1A Value pair DN1L. For example, the data acquisition AD1A is one of a data acquisition operation AD11 and a data acquisition operation AD12. The data acquisition program ND1A is constructed based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL1. The data acquisition operation AD11 uses the storage unit 332 based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L to access the application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the memory location YM1L to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L .

該資料獲取操作AD12依靠該第一控制訊號SC11和該儲存單元332的其中之一來取得該額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所取得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的一科學計算MZ11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DD1A包含該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一額定範圍界限值DD11和相對於該額定範圍界限值DD11的一額定範圍界限值DD12,並基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GA1E、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The data acquisition operation AD12 relies on one of the first control signal SC11 and the storage unit 332 to acquire the nominal range limit value pair DD1A, and applies the range code EM1L and the acquired range code EM1L by executing the measured value determined using the A scientific calculation MZ11 of the nominal range limit pair DD1A to obtain the application range limit pair DN1L. For example, the pair of rated range limit values DD1A includes a rated range limit value DD11 of the rated measurement value range RD1N and a rated range limit value DD12 relative to the rated range limit value DD11, and based on the rated physical parameter range, GA1E, The second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the data encoding operation ZX11 are preset with the specified measurement value format HH11.

在該處理單元331確定該範圍差異DS11的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來使用該儲存單元332以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置YX1T的該控制碼CC1T,並基於所存取的該控制碼CC1T來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的一訊號產生控制GY11以控制該輸出單元338。該輸出單元338響應該訊號產生控制GY11來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的一訊號產生操作BY11以產生一功能訊號SG11,該功能 訊號SG11用於控制該功能目標335以導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the range difference DS11, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to access the control code stored in the memory location YX1T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T CC1T, and based on the accessed control code CC1T, executes a signal generation control GY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 to control the output unit 338 . The output unit 338 performs a signal generation operation BY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 in response to the signal generation control GY11 to generate a function signal SG11, the function The signal SG11 is used to control the functional target 335 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210是一外部裝置。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…具有一總參考範圍數目NT11。該總參考範圍數目NT11基於該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1而被預設。該處理單元331響應該第一控制訊號SC11來獲得該總參考範圍數目NT11。該科學計算MR11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11。該科學計算MZ11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11。例如,該總參考範圍數目大於或等於2。例如,該總參考範圍數目NT11≧3;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧4;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧5;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧6;且該總參考範圍數目NT11≦255。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 is an external device. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . have a total reference range number NT11. The total reference range number NT11 is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL1. The processing unit 331 obtains the total reference range number NT11 in response to the first control signal SC11. The scientific computing MR11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11. The scientific calculation MZ11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11. For example, the total number of reference ranges is greater than or equal to two. For example, the total reference range number NT11≧3; the total reference range number NT11≧4; the total reference range number NT11≧5; the total reference range number NT11≧6; and the total reference range number NT11≦255.

該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG11來將該第一可變物理參數QU1A從一特定物理參數QU13改變成一特定物理參數QU14。例如,該特定物理參數QU13是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內;且該特定物理參數QU14是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1進一步包含用於表示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T。 The functional object 335 changes the first variable physical parameter QU1A from a specific physical parameter QU13 to a specific physical parameter QU14 in response to the functional signal SG11. For example, the specific physical parameter QU13 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL; and the specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The physical parameter control function specification GAL1 further includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該測量值目標範圍RN1T是該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一部分,並具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。例如,該目標範圍界限值對DN1T基於該物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T的一資料編碼操作ZX13來 用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L是該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一部分。 The measured value target range RN1T is part of the nominal measured value range RD1N and has a target range limit value pair DN1T. For example, the target range limit value pair DN1T is determined based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T Preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The measurement value target range RN1T is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the data encoding operation ZX13. The measured value application range RN1L is part of the nominal measured value range RD1N.

該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是分開的或相鄰的。在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是分開的條件下,該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L是分開的。在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是相鄰的條件下,該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L是相鄰的。 The physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter application range RD1EL are separate or adjacent. Under the condition that the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter application range RD1EL are separated, the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L are separated. Under the condition that the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter application range RD1EL are adjacent, the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L are adjacent.

例如,該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L被配置以等於一整數。該額定範圍界限值DD12大於該額定範圍界限值DD11。該額定範圍界限值DD12和該額定範圍界限值DD11之間具有相對於該額定範圍界限值DD11的一相對值VA11。該相對值VA11等於該額定範圍界限值DD12減去該額定範圍界限值DD11的一計算結果。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L基於該額定範圍界限值DD11、該額定範圍界限值DD12、該整數、和該相對值VA11對於該總參考範圍數目NT11的一比率而被預設。該科學計算MZ11使用該額定範圍界限值DD11、該額定範圍界限值DD12、該整數、該比率和其任意組合的其中之一。 For example, the measured value is configured to be equal to an integer using the range code EM1L. The rated range limit value DD12 is greater than the rated range limit value DD11. There is a relative value VA11 between the rated range limit value DD12 and the rated range limit value DD11 with respect to the rated range limit value DD11. The relative value VA11 is equal to a calculation result of the nominal range limit value DD12 minus the nominal range limit value DD11. For example, the application range limit value pair DN1L is preset based on the nominal range limit value DD11, the nominal range limit value DD12, the integer, and a ratio of the relative value VA11 to the total reference range number NT11. The scientific calculation MZ11 uses one of the nominal range limit value DD11, the nominal range limit value DD12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.

在一些實施例中,該儲存單元332進一步具有不同於該記憶體位置YX1T的一記憶體位置YM1T,並在 該記憶體位置YM1T儲存該目標範圍界限值對DN1T。例如,該記憶體位置YM1T基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被識別。在該處理單元331於一操作時間TF11之內執行該訊號產生控制GY11之後,該第二感測單元334感測該第一可變物理參數QU1A以產生一感測訊號SN12。例如,在該處理單元331執行該訊號產生控制GY11之後,該第二感測單元334感測該第一可變物理參數QU1A以執行相依於該第二感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測訊號產生HF12,該感測訊號產生HF12用於產生該感測訊號SN12。 In some embodiments, the storage unit 332 further has a memory location YM1T different from the memory location YX1T, and The memory location YM1T stores the target range limit pair DN1T. For example, the memory location YM1T is identified based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T. After the processing unit 331 executes the signal generation control GY11 within an operation time TF11, the second sensing unit 334 senses the first variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a sensing signal SN12. For example, after the processing unit 331 executes the signal generation control GY11, the second sensing unit 334 senses the first variable physical parameter QU1A to execute a sensing signal generation dependent on the second sensor sensitivity YW11 HF12, the sensing signal generating HF12 is used to generate the sensing signal SN12.

該處理單元331於該操作時間TF11之後的一指定時間TG12之內響應該感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一測量值VN12。該處理單元331基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來使用該儲存單元332以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置YM1T的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T,並藉由比較該測量值VN12和所存取的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來檢查該測量值VN12和該測量值目標範圍RN1T之間的一數學關係KV21以做出該測量值VN12是否為於該測量值目標範圍RN1T之內的一邏輯決定PB21。 The processing unit 331 responds to the sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operation time TF11 to obtain a measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to access the target range limit value pair DN1T stored in the memory location YM1T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T, and by comparing the measurement value VN12 with The accessed target range limit value pair DN1T checks a mathematical relationship KV21 between the measurement value VN12 and the measurement value target range RN1T to determine whether the measurement value VN12 is within the measurement value target range RN1T A logic determines PB21.

在該邏輯決定PB21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元331於該指定時間TG12之內確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET,產生一肯定操作報告RL11,並導致該輸出單元338輸出輸送該肯定操作報告RL11的一控制回應訊號SE11,藉此該控制回應訊號SE11用於導致該控制裝置210獲得該肯定操作報告 RL11。例如,該肯定操作報告RL11表示該第一可變物理參數QU1A成功地進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一操作情況EP11。該處理單元331藉由導致該輸出單元338產生該控制回應訊號SE11來回應該第一控制訊號SC11。 Under the condition that the logical decision PB21 is positive, the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in within the specified time TG12, generates a positive operation report RL11, and causes The output unit 338 outputs a control response signal SE11 that transmits the positive operation report RL11, whereby the control response signal SE11 is used to cause the control device 210 to obtain the positive operation report RL11. For example, the positive operation report RL11 indicates an operation situation EP11 in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A successfully enters the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The processing unit 331 responds to the first control signal SC11 by causing the output unit 338 to generate the control response signal SE11.

在一些實施例中,在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該處理單元331藉由做出該邏輯決定PB21而確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元331基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EH14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的一碼差異DF11來使用該儲存單元332以將所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 In some embodiments, the specific measurement range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement target range code EM1T and the processing unit 331 determines that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently present by making the logical decision PB21 Under the condition of the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the processing unit 331 is based on a code between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EH14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T The difference DF11 is used to use the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

當該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11時,該輸出單元338顯示一狀態指示LB11。例如,該狀態指示LB11用於指示該第一可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的一特定狀態XJ11。在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該處理單元331藉由做出該邏輯決定PB21而確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元331進一步基於該碼差異DF11來導致該輸出單元338將該狀態指示LB11改變成一狀態指示LB12。例如,該狀態指示LB12用於指示該第一可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一特定狀態XJ12。 When the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the output unit 338 displays a status indication LB11. For example, the state indication LB11 is used to indicate that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a specific state XJ11 within the specific physical parameter range RD1E4. After the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently at by making the logical decision PB21 Under the condition of the range RD1ET, the processing unit 331 further causes the output unit 338 to change the status indication LB11 to a status indication LB12 based on the code difference DF11. For example, the state indication LB12 is used to indicate that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a specific state XJ12 within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該第一控制訊號SC11是一電訊號SP11和一光訊號SQ11的其中之一。該輸入單元337包含一輸入組件3371、一輸入組件3372和一輸入組件3373。該輸入組件3371耦合於該處理單元331。在該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11的條件下,該輸入組件3371藉由接收輸送一控制訊息CG11的該電訊號SP11來導致該處理單元331獲得該控制訊息CG11。例如,該控制訊息CG11包含該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。 The first control signal SC11 is one of an electrical signal SP11 and an optical signal SQ11. The input unit 337 includes an input element 3371 , an input element 3372 and an input element 3373 . The input component 3371 is coupled to the processing unit 331 . Under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11, the input element 3371 causes the processing unit 331 to obtain the control message CG11 by receiving the electrical signal SP11 conveying a control message CG11. For example, the control message CG11 includes the measurement value target range code EM1T.

該輸入組件3372耦合於該處理單元331。在該第一控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下,該輸入組件3372接收輸送一編碼影像FY11的該光訊號SQ11。例如,該編碼影像FY11代表該控制訊息CG11。該輸入組件3373耦合於該處理單元331。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A由於該第一控制訊號SC11而被配置於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該輸入組件3373接收一使用者輸入操作BQ11,並響應該使用者輸入操作BQ11來導致該處理單元331確定一特定輸入碼UW11。例如,該特定輸入碼UW11選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…。 The input component 3372 is coupled to the processing unit 331 . Under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11, the input element 3372 receives the optical signal SQ11 that transmits an encoded image FY11. For example, the encoded image FY11 represents the control message CG11. The input component 3373 is coupled to the processing unit 331 . Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the first control signal SC11, the input element 3373 receives a user input operation BQ11 and responds to the user input Operation BQ11 causes the processing unit 331 to determine a specific input code UW11. For example, the specific input code UW11 is selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .

在一些實施例中,在該第一控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下,該輸入組件3372感測該編碼影像FY11以確定一編碼資料DY11,並解碼該編碼資料DY11以提供該控制訊息CG11到該處理單元331。在該特定輸入碼UW11不同於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該處理單元331基於等於所獲得的該測量 值目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和該特定輸入碼UW11之間的一碼差異DX11來通過該輸出單元338而導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11, the input element 3372 senses the encoded image FY11 to determine an encoded data DY11, and decodes the encoded data DY11 to provide the control message CG11 to the processing unit 331. Under the condition that the specific input code UW11 is different from the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the processing unit 331 is based on the obtained measurement equal to A code difference DX11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A of the value target range code EM1T and the specific input code UW11 to pass the output unit 338 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter a specific physical parameter range RD1E5 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . .

該第二感測單元334感測處於一拘束條件FR11的該第一可變物理參數QU1A以提供該感測訊號SN11到該處理單元331。例如,該拘束條件FR11是該第一可變物理參數QU1A等於包含於該額定物理參數範圍RD1E中的一特定物理參數QU11。該處理單元331基於該感測訊號SN11來估計該特定物理參數QU11以獲得該測量值VN11。由於處於該拘束條件FR11的該第一可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內,該處理單元331辨識該測量值VN11為於該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一可允許值,藉此辨識該測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該數學關係KV11為一數值交集關係,並藉此確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 The second sensing unit 334 senses the first variable physical parameter QU1A under a constraint condition FR11 to provide the sensing signal SN11 to the processing unit 331 . For example, the constraint condition FR11 is that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is equal to a specific physical parameter QU11 included in the rated physical parameter range RD1E. The processing unit 331 estimates the specific physical parameter QU11 based on the sensing signal SN11 to obtain the measurement value VN11. Since the first variable physical parameter QU1A under the constraint condition FR11 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 331 identifies the measurement value VN11 as an allowable value within the measurement value application range RN1L , thereby identifying the mathematical relationship KV11 between the measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L as a numerical intersection relationship, and thereby determining the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.

在一些實施例中,該第二感測單元334基於與該感測訊號產生HF11相關的該第二感測器靈敏度YW11而被特徵化,並被配置以符合該第二感測器規格FU11。該第二感測器規格FU11包含用於表示該第二感測器靈敏度YW11的該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11、和用於表示一感測器測量範圍RB1E的一感測器測量範圍表示GW1R。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RD1E被配置以相同於該感測器 測量範圍RB1E,或被配置以是該感測器測量範圍RB1E的一部分。該感測器測量範圍RB1E相關於由該第二感測單元334所執行的一物理參數感測。該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R基於一預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the second sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the second sensor sensitivity YW11 associated with the sensing signal generation HF11 and is configured to comply with the second sensor specification FU11. The second sensor specification FU11 includes the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing the second sensor sensitivity YW11, and a sensor measurement range representation for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E GW1R. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RD1E is configured to be the same as the sensor The measurement range RB1E, or is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RB1E. The sensor measurement range RB1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the second sensing unit 334 . The sensor measurement range indicates that the GW1R is provided based on a preset measurement unit. For example, the preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.

該額定測量值範圍RD1N和該額定範圍界限值對DD1A皆基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GA1E、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該應用範圍界限值對DN1L皆基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GA1L、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The rated measurement value range RD1N and the rated range limit value pair DD1A are both based on the rated physical parameter range representation GA1E, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the data encoding operation ZX11 for use The specified measurement value format HH11 is preset. The measurement value application range RN1L and the application range limit value pair DN1L are based on the physical parameter application range representation GA1L, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the data encoding operation ZX12 for use The specified measurement value format HH11 is preset.

該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該目標範圍界限值對DN1T皆基於該物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該額定物理參數範圍表示GA1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GA1L、該物理參數表示GA1T1和該物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T皆基於一預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一,並相同或不同於該預設測量單位。 The measured value target range RN1T and the target range limit pair DN1T are both used based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the data encoding operation ZX13 The specified measurement value format HH11 is preset. The nominal physical parameter range representation GA1E, the physical parameter application range representation GA1L, the physical parameter representation GA1T1 and the physical parameter candidate range representation GA1T are all provided based on a predetermined unit of measurement. For example, the preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit, and is the same as or different from the preset measurement unit.

該第一可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於該感測器測量範圍RB1E而被特徵化。例如,該感測器測量 範圍表示GW1R、該額定物理參數範圍表示GA1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GA1L、該物理參數候選範圍表示GA1T和該物理參數表示GA1T1皆屬於十進制資料類型。該測量值VN11、該測量值VN12、該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該應用範圍界限值對DN1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和該控制碼CC1T皆屬於該二進制資料類型,並皆適用於電腦處理。該第二感測器規格FU11和該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1皆被預設。 The first variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB1E. For example, the sensor measures The range represents GW1R, the nominal physical parameter range represents GA1E, the physical parameter application range represents GA1L, the physical parameter candidate range represents GA1T, and the physical parameter represents GA1T1, all of which belong to the decimal data type. The measured value VN11, the measured value VN12, the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the application range limit value pair DN1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T and the control code CC1T all belong to the binary data type, and are suitable for computer deal with. Both the second sensor specification FU11 and the physical parameter control function specification GAL1 are preset.

在一些實施例中,在該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11之前,該輸入單元337接收包含所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和一記憶體位址AM1L的一寫入請求訊息WN1L。例如,該記憶體位置YM1L基於該記憶體位址AM1L而被識別;且該記憶體位址AM1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被預設。該處理單元331響應該寫入請求訊息WN1L來使用該儲存單元332以將該寫入請求訊息WN1L的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L儲存到該記憶體位置YM1L。 In some embodiments, before the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the input unit 337 receives a write request message WN1L including the preset application range limit pair DN1L and a memory address AM1L . For example, the memory location YM1L is identified based on the memory address AM1L; and the memory address AM1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L. In response to the write request message WN1L, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store the pair DN1L of the application range limit value of the write request message WN1L to the memory location YM1L.

在該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11之前,該輸入單元337接收包含所預設的該控制碼CC1T和一記憶體位址AX1T的一寫入請求訊息WC1T。例如,該記憶體位置YX1T基於該記憶體位址AX1T而被識別;且該記憶體位址AX1T基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被預設。該處理單元331響應該寫入請求訊息WC1T來使用該儲存單元332以將該寫入請求訊息WC1T的該控制碼CC1T儲存到該記憶體位置YX1T。例如,該儲 存單元332具有一儲存空間SU11。該儲存空間SU11具有該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A、該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該應用範圍界限值對DN1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該控制碼CC1T和該總參考範圍數目NT11。 Before the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the input unit 337 receives a write request message WC1T including the preset control code CC1T and a memory address AX1T. For example, the memory location YX1T is identified based on the memory address AX1T; and the memory address AX1T is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store the control code CC1T of the write request message WC1T in the memory location YX1T in response to the write request message WC1T. For example, the storage The storage unit 332 has a storage space SU11. The storage space SU11 has the variable physical parameter range code UN1A, the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the application range limit value pair DN1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T, the control code CC1T and the total reference range number NT11.

請參閱第42圖。第42圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8051的示意圖。如第42圖所示,該實施結構8051包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該第二感測單元334、該功能目標335和該儲存單元332。該操作單元397包含該處理單元331、該輸入單元337和該輸出單元338。該輸入單元337包含該輸入組件3371、該輸入組件3372和該輸入組件3373。該輸出單元338包含一輸出組件3381、一輸出組件3382和一輸出組件3383。該第二感測單元334、該功能目標335、該儲存單元332、該輸入組件3371、該輸入組件3372、該輸入組件3373、該輸出組件3381、該輸出組件3382和該輸出組件3383皆耦合於該處理單元331,並皆受該處理單元331控制。 See Figure 42. FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8051 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 42 , the implementation structure 8051 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 . The control target device 330 includes the operation unit 397 , the second sensing unit 334 , the function target 335 and the storage unit 332 . The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331 , the input unit 337 and the output unit 338 . The input unit 337 includes the input component 3371 , the input component 3372 and the input component 3373 . The output unit 338 includes an output element 3381 , an output element 3382 and an output element 3383 . The second sensing unit 334, the functional target 335, the storage unit 332, the input element 3371, the input element 3372, the input element 3373, the output element 3381, the output element 3382 and the output element 3383 are all coupled to The processing unit 331 is controlled by the processing unit 331 .

在一些實施例中,該輸出組件3381進一步耦合於該功能目標335。該處理單元331於該操作時間TF11之內基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來執行該訊號產生控制GY11。該輸出組件3381響應該訊號產生控制GY11來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的該訊號產生操作BY11以於該操作時間TF11之內產生該功能訊號SG11。例如,該功能訊號SG11是一控制訊號。該輸出組件3381將該功能訊號SG11傳輸到該功能目標335。該功能目標335響應該 功能訊號SG11來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該功能訊號SG11是一脈衝寬度調變訊號、一電位準訊號、一驅動訊號和一指令訊號的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the output component 3381 is further coupled to the functional object 335 . The processing unit 331 executes the signal generation control GY11 based on the obtained control code CC1T within the operation time TF11. The output element 3381 responds to the signal generation control GY11 to execute the signal generation operation BY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 to generate the function signal SG11 within the operation time TF11. For example, the function signal SG11 is a control signal. The output element 3381 transmits the function signal SG11 to the function object 335 . The function target 335 responds to the The function signal SG11 is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the function signal SG11 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a potential level signal, a driving signal and a command signal.

在該處理單元331檢查該數學關係KV21以確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元331確定該肯定操作報告RL11,並導致該輸出單元338產生輸送該肯定操作報告RL11的該控制回應訊號SE11。該控制回應訊號SE11是一電訊號LP11和一光訊號LQ11的其中之一。該輸出組件3382是一傳輸器。該輸出組件3383是一光發射組件。例如,該處理單元331藉由檢查該數學關係KV21來確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一物理參數情況,並藉此辨識該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之間的一物理參數關係為該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一物理參數交集關係。 Under the condition that the processing unit 331 checks the mathematical relationship KV21 to determine the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 determines the positive operation report RL11 and causes the output unit 338 The control response signal SE11 that transmits the positive operation report RL11 is generated. The control response signal SE11 is one of an electrical signal LP11 and an optical signal LQ11. The output assembly 3382 is a transmitter. The output element 3383 is a light emitting element. For example, the processing unit 331 determines a physical parameter condition of the first variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the physical parameter target range RD1ET by checking the mathematical relationship KV21, and thereby identifies the first variable physical parameter A physical parameter relationship between QU1A and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is a physical parameter intersection relationship of the first variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在該輸出組件3382被配置以產生該控制回應訊號SE11的條件下,該處理單元331基於所確定的該肯定操作報告RL11來導致該輸出組件3382向該控制裝置210傳輸輸送該肯定操作報告RL11的該電訊號LP11。在該輸出組件3383被配置以產生該控制回應訊號SE11的條件下,該處理單元331基於所確定的該肯定操作報告RL11來導致該輸出組件3383產生輸送該肯定操作報告RL11的該光訊號LQ11,藉此該控制裝置210從該輸出組件3383接 收所產生的該光訊號LQ11。例如,該光發射組件是一顯示組件。該光訊號LQ11輸送代表該肯定操作報告RL11的一編碼影像FZ11。例如,該編碼影像FZ11是一條碼影像。 Under the condition that the output element 3382 is configured to generate the control response signal SE11, the processing unit 331 causes the output element 3382 to transmit the positive operation report RL11 to the control device 210 based on the determined positive operation report RL11 The electrical signal LP11. Under the condition that the output element 3383 is configured to generate the control response signal SE11, the processing unit 331 causes the output element 3383 to generate the optical signal LQ11 transmitting the positive operation report RL11 based on the determined positive operation report RL11, Thereby the control device 210 is connected from the output element 3383 The generated optical signal LQ11 is received. For example, the light emitting element is a display element. The optical signal LQ11 conveys an encoded image FZ11 representing the positive operation report RL11. For example, the encoded image FZ11 is a barcode image.

例如,該控制裝置210由一控制裝置識別符HA0T所識別。該第一控制訊號SC11進一步輸送該控制裝置識別符HA0T。該處理單元331響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該控制裝置識別符HA0T,並基於所獲得的該控制裝置識別符HA0T和所確定的該肯定操作報告RL11來導致該輸出組件3382向該控制裝置210傳輸輸送該肯定操作報告RL11的該電訊號LP11。 For example, the control device 210 is identified by a control device identifier HAOT. The first control signal SC11 further transmits the control device identifier HA0T. The processing unit 331 obtains the control device identifier HA0T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and causes the The output element 3382 transmits the electrical signal LP11 conveying the positive operation report RL11 to the control device 210 .

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元337有線地或無線地從該控制裝置210接收該第一控制訊號SC11。該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11和該光訊號SQ11的其中之一。該輸入組件3371是一接收器,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11的條件下從該控制裝置210接收該電訊號SP11。該輸入組件3372是一讀取器,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下從該控制裝置210接收輸送該編碼影像FY11的該光訊號SQ11。例如,該編碼影像FY11是一條碼影像。 In some embodiments, the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 from the control device 210 by wire or wirelessly. The first control signal SC11 is one of the electrical signal SP11 and the optical signal SQ11. The input element 3371 is a receiver, and receives the electrical signal SP11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11. The input element 3372 is a reader, and receives the optical signal SQ11 for delivering the encoded image FY11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11. For example, the encoded image FY11 is a barcode image.

該功能目標335具有該第一可變物理參數QU1A。該輸入單元337進一步包含一輸入組件3374。該輸入組件3374耦合於該處理單元331,受該處理單元331控制,並在該第一可變物理參數QU1A要依靠該控制裝置210而被提供的條件下從該控制裝置210接收一物理參數訊號SB11。該功能目標335從該輸入組件3374接收該物理參數 訊號SB11。該處理單元331通過該輸出組件3381來導致該功能目標335使用該物理參數訊號SB11以形成取決於該物理參數訊號SB11的該第一可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該輸入組件3374是一接收組件。該控制裝置210有線地或無線地傳輸該物理參數訊號SB11到該輸入組件3374。 The functional object 335 has the first variable physical parameter QU1A. The input unit 337 further includes an input element 3374 . The input element 3374 is coupled to the processing unit 331, is controlled by the processing unit 331, and receives a physical parameter signal from the control device 210 under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is to be provided by the control device 210 SB11. The functional object 335 receives the physical parameter from the input component 3374 Signal SB11. The processing unit 331 causes the functional object 335 to use the physical parameter signal SB11 through the output element 3381 to form the first variable physical parameter QU1A depending on the physical parameter signal SB11. For example, the input component 3374 is a receiving component. The control device 210 transmits the physical parameter signal SB11 to the input element 3374 by wire or wirelessly.

該第二感測單元334包含耦合於該處理單元331的一感測組件3341,並使用該感測組件3341以產生該感測訊號SN11和該感測訊號SN12。該感測組件3341是複數應用感測器的其中之一。該複數應用感測器包含一電壓感測器、一電流感測器、一電阻感測器、一電容感測器、一電感感測器、一加速度計、一陀螺儀、一壓力轉能器、一應變規、一定時器、一光偵測器、一溫度感測器和一濕度感測器。例如,該感測組件3341產生一感測訊號分量。該感測訊號SN11包含該感測訊號分量。 The second sensing unit 334 includes a sensing element 3341 coupled to the processing unit 331, and uses the sensing element 3341 to generate the sensing signal SN11 and the sensing signal SN12. The sensing component 3341 is one of a plurality of application sensors. The complex application sensor includes a voltage sensor, a current sensor, a resistance sensor, a capacitance sensor, an inductance sensor, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, and a pressure transducer , a strain gauge, a timer, a light detector, a temperature sensor and a humidity sensor. For example, the sensing element 3341 generates a sensing signal component. The sensing signal SN11 includes the sensing signal component.

請參閱第43圖和第44圖。第43圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8052的示意圖。第44圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8053的示意圖。如第43圖和第44圖所示,該實施結構8052和該實施結構8053的每一結構包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該第二感測單元334、該功能目標335和該儲存單元332。該操作單元397包含該處理單元331、該輸入單元337、該輸出單元338和耦合於該處理單元331的一定時器339。 See Figures 43 and 44. FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8052 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8053 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 , each of the implementation structure 8052 and the implementation structure 8053 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 . The control target device 330 includes the operation unit 397 , the second sensing unit 334 , the function target 335 and the storage unit 332 . The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331 , the input unit 337 , the output unit 338 , and a timer 339 coupled to the processing unit 331 .

在一些實施例中,由該輸入單元337所接收 的該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該控制訊息CG11,該控制訊息CG11包含該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該控制碼CC1T和該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。在該處理單元331由於該第一控制訊號SC11而確定該範圍差異DS11的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來導致該輸出單元338執行該訊號產生操作BY11,該訊號產生操作BY11用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 In some embodiments, received by the input unit 337 The first control signal SC11 conveys the control message CG11, the control message CG11 includes the target range limit value pair DN1T, the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the control code CC1T and the measured value target range code EM1T. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the range difference DS11 due to the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to perform the signal generating operation BY11 based on the obtained control code CC1T, the signal generating Operation BY11 is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該處理單元331從所接收的該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和該目標範圍界限值對DN1T。在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該處理單元331藉由比較該測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元331基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EH14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的該碼差異DF11來使用該儲存單元332以將所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 The processing unit 331 obtains the measured value target range code EM1T and the target range limit value pair DN1T from the received first control signal SC11. The specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the processing unit 331 determines the first variable by comparing the measurement value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T Under the condition of the physical parameter target range RD1ET that the physical parameter QU1A is currently in, the processing unit 331 is based on the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EH14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T. The storage unit 332 is used to assign the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A using the code difference DF11 between.

例如,該處理單元331藉由比較該測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一物理參數情況,並藉此辨識該第一可變物理參數QU1A和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之間的一物理參數關係為該第一可變物理參數QU1A目前於該物理參數目標範 圍RD1ET之內的一物理參數交集關係。 For example, the processing unit 331 determines a physical parameter condition of the first variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the physical parameter target range RD1ET by comparing the measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T, and thereby identifying a physical parameter relationship between the first variable physical parameter QU1A and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter target range. A physical parameter intersection relationship within RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該定時器339受該處理單元331控制,用於測量該可變時間長度LF1A,並被配置以符合一定時器規格FT11。該可變時間長度LF1A進一步基於一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該第一控制訊號SC11輸送代表該參考時間長度LJ1T的該時間長度值CL1T。例如,該時間長度值CL1T基於該參考時間長度LJ1T和該定時器規格FT11來以一指定計數值格式HH21而被預設。該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1包含一時間長度表示GA1KJ。該時間長度表示GA1KJ用於表示該參考時間長度LJ1T,並相同於該時間長度表示GB1KJ。例如,該指定計數值格式HH21基於一指定位元數目UY21而被特徵化。 In some embodiments, the timer 339 is controlled by the processing unit 331 for measuring the variable time length LF1A, and is configured to conform to a timer specification FT11. The variable time length LF1A is further characterized based on a reference time length LJ1T. The first control signal SC11 delivers the time length value CL1T representing the reference time length LJ1T. For example, the time length value CL1T is preset in a specified count value format HH21 based on the reference time length LJ1T and the timer specification FT11. The physical parameter control function specification GAL1 includes a time length representation GA1KJ. The time length representation GA1KJ is used to represent the reference time length LJ1T, and is the same as the time length representation GB1KJ. For example, the specified count value format HH21 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY21.

例如,該時間長度值CL1T基於該時間長度表示GA1KJ、該定時器規格FT11和用於轉換該時間長度表示GA1KJ的一資料編碼操作ZX1KJ來以該指定計數值格式HH21而被預設。該處理單元331從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該時間長度值CL1T,並檢查所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T和該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11之間的該數值關係KJ11以做出用於控制該特定時間TJ1T的該計數操作BC1T是否要被執行的該邏輯決定PE11。 For example, the time length value CL1T is preset in the specified count value format HH21 based on the time length representation GA1KJ, the timer specification FT11 and a data encoding operation ZX1KJ for converting the time length representation GA1KJ. The processing unit 331 obtains the time length value CL1T from the first control signal SC11, and checks the numerical relationship KJ11 between the obtained time length value CL1T and the time length value reference range GJ11 to make a decision for controlling the time length value CL1T The logic decides PE11 whether the counting operation BC1T at a specific time TJ1T is to be performed or not.

在一些實施例中,用於做出該邏輯決定PE11的該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11具有一時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A,並代表該時間長度參考範圍HJ11。該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11基於該時間長度參考範圍HJ11和該定時器規格FT11來用該指定計數值格式HH21而被預 設。例如,該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1包含一時間長度參考範圍表示GA1HJ,該時間長度參考範圍表示GA1HJ用於表示該時間長度參考範圍HJ11。該時間長度參考範圍HJ11和該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A皆基於該時間長度參考範圍表示GA1HJ、該定時器規格FT11和用於轉換該時間長度參考範圍表示GA1HJ的一資料編碼操作ZX1HJ來用該指定計數值格式HH21而被預設。 In some embodiments, the time length value reference range GJ11 used to make the logical decision PE11 has a time length range limit value pair LN1A and represents the time length reference range HJ11. The time length value reference range GJ11 is preset with the specified count value format HH21 based on the time length reference range HJ11 and the timer specification FT11 Assume. For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL1 includes a time length reference range representation GA1HJ, and the time length reference range representation GA1HJ is used to represent the time length reference range HJ11. The time length reference range HJ11 and the time length range limit pair LN1A are both based on the time length reference range representation GA1HJ, the timer specification FT11 and a data encoding operation ZX1HJ for converting the time length reference range representation GA1HJ to use the time length reference range representation GA1HJ It is preset by specifying the count value format HH21.

該儲存單元332儲存該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A。該處理單元331響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該儲存單元332獲得該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A,並藉由比較包含於所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T和所獲得的該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A來檢查該數值關係KJ11以做出該邏輯決定PE11。 The storage unit 332 stores the time length range limit pair LN1A. The processing unit 331 obtains the time length range limit value pair LN1A from the storage unit 332 in response to the first control signal SC11, and by comparing the obtained time length value CL1T with the obtained time length range limit value The value pair LN1A checks the numerical relationship KJ11 to make the logical decision PE11.

例如,在該處理單元331藉由檢查該數值關係KJ11而辨識該數值關係KJ11為一數值交集關係的條件下,該處理單元331做出該邏輯決定PE11以成為肯定的。例如,該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A被預設,並包含該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11的一時間長度範圍界限值LN11和相對於該時間長度範圍界限值LN11的一時間長度範圍界限值LN12。在該處理單元331藉由比較所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T和所獲得的該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A而確定該參考時間長度LJ1T包含於的該時間長度參考範圍HJ11的條件下,該處理單元331做出該邏輯決定PE11以成為肯定的。 For example, under the condition that the processing unit 331 recognizes the numerical relation KJ11 as a numerical intersection relation by checking the numerical relation KJ11, the processing unit 331 makes the logical decision PE11 to be affirmative. For example, the time length range limit value pair LN1A is preset and includes a time length range limit value LN11 of the time length value reference range GJ11 and a time length range limit value LN12 relative to the time length range limit value LN11. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the time length reference range HJ11 included in the reference time length LJ1T by comparing the obtained time length value CL1T with the obtained time length range limit value pair LN1A, the processing Unit 331 makes this logical decision PE11 to be affirmative.

在一些實施例中,在該邏輯決定PE11是肯 定的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T來導致該定時器339執行該計數操作BC1T。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A由於該第一控制訊號SC11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該處理單元331基於該計數操作BC1T來到達該特定時間TJ1T,並在該特定時間TJ1T之內導致該輸出單元338執行一訊號產生操作BY21,該訊號產生操作BY21用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET。 In some embodiments, the logic determines whether PE11 is Under certain conditions, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 339 to perform the counting operation BC1T based on the obtained time length value CL1T. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 reaches the specific time TJ1T based on the counting operation BC1T, and The output unit 338 is caused to perform a signal generation operation BY21 within the specific time TJ1T, and the signal generation operation BY21 is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET .

例如,在該第一可變物理參數QU1A由於該第一控制訊號SC11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET內的條件下,該處理單元331基於該計數操作BC1T來經歷具有一結束時間TZ1T的一應用時間長度LT1T以到達該特定時間TJ1T。該處理單元331於該特定時間TJ1T之內藉由執行使用所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的一科學計算MK11來取得不同於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12。例如,該控制裝置210基於該參考時間長度LJ1T和該定時器規格FT11來確定該時間長度值CL1T,並基於所確定的該時間長度值CL1T來輸出該第一控制訊號SC11。該控制訊息CG11進一步包含該時間長度值CL1T。該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內足有與該參考時間長度LJ1T匹配的該應用時間長度LT1T。 For example, under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 experiences an end time TZ1T based on the counting operation BC1T An application time length LT1T of to reach the specific time TJ1T. The processing unit 331 obtains the measurement value candidate range different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T by performing a scientific calculation MK11 using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T within the specific time TJ1T Code EM12. For example, the control device 210 determines the time length value CL1T based on the reference time length LJ1T and the timer specification FT11, and outputs the first control signal SC11 based on the determined time length value CL1T. The control message CG11 further includes the time length value CL1T. The first control signal SC11 is used to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to have the application time length LT1T that matches the reference time length LJ1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元331基於所取 得的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12和所獲得的該控制碼類型識別符HC11來取得該記憶體位址AX12。該處理單元331基於所取得的該記憶體位址AX12來使用該儲存單元332以讀取被儲存在該記憶體位置YX12的一控制碼CC12,並基於所讀取的該控制碼CC12來執行用於控制該輸出單元338的一訊號產生控制GY21。該輸出單元338響應該訊號產生控制GY21來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的該訊號產生操作BY21以產生一功能訊號SG21,該功能訊號SG21用於控制該功能目標335以導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入包含於該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET中的一物理參數候選範圍RD2E2。例如,該功能訊號SG21是一控制訊號。該物理參數候選範圍RD2E2是該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的其中之一,並不同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 is based on the fetched The obtained measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the obtained control code type identifier HC11 are used to obtain the memory address AX12. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to read a control code CC12 stored in the memory location YX12 based on the acquired memory address AX12, and executes a control code CC12 based on the read control code CC12 A signal for controlling the output unit 338 is generated to control the GY21. The output unit 338 performs the signal generation operation BY21 for the physical parameter control function FA11 in response to the signal generation control GY21 to generate a function signal SG21 for controlling the function object 335 to cause the first possible The variable physical parameter QU1A enters a physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 contained in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET. For example, the function signal SG21 is a control signal. The physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, and is different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

例如,在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T來導致該定時器339執行該計數操作BC1T以到達該結束時間TZ1T。當該定時器339藉由執行該計數操作BC1T而到達該結束時間TZ1T時,該定時器339向該處理單元331傳輸一中斷請求訊號UH1T以到達該特定時間TJ1T。該處理單元331於該特定時間TJ1T之內響應該中斷請求訊號UH1T來執行使用所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該科學計算MK11以取得不同於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12。例如,該處理單元331藉由從該定時器339接收該中斷請求訊號UH1T來辨識該 特定時間TJ1T,並藉此經歷該應用時間長度LT1T。該特定時間TJ1T相鄰於該結束時間TZ1T。 For example, under the condition that the logic decision PE11 is positive, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 339 to perform the counting operation BC1T to reach the end time TZ1T based on the obtained time length value CL1T. When the timer 339 reaches the end time TZ1T by executing the counting operation BC1T, the timer 339 transmits an interrupt request signal UH1T to the processing unit 331 to reach the specific time TJ1T. The processing unit 331 performs the scientific calculation MK11 using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T in response to the interrupt request signal UH1T within the specific time TJ1T to obtain a different measurement value target range code EM1T from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T The measured value candidate range code EM12. For example, the processing unit 331 identifies the interrupt request signal UH1T by receiving the interrupt request signal UH1T from the timer 339 . A specific time TJ1T, and through which the application time length LT1T is experienced. The specific time TJ1T is adjacent to the end time TZ1T.

在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A基於該額定物理參數範圍RD1E而被特徵化。該額定物理參數範圍RD1E包含該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET、該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2,並由該額定測量值範圍RD1N所代表。例如,該額定測量值範圍RD1N包含該測量值目標範圍RN1T、該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值候選範圍RN12。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET、該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2分別由該測量值目標範圍RN1T、該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值候選範圍RN12所代表。 In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range RD1E. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E includes the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, and is represented by the nominal measurement value range RD1N. For example, the rated measurement value range RD1N includes the measurement value target range RN1T, the measurement value application range RN1L, and the measurement value candidate range RN12. The physical parameter target range RD1ET, the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are respectively represented by the measurement value target range RN1T, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN12.

該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1包含用於表示該物理參數候選範圍RD1E3的一物理參數候選範圍表示GA13。該測量值候選範圍RN13基於該物理參數候選範圍表示GA13、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該第二感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數候選範圍表示GA13的一資料編碼操作ZX17來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設,並由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一測量值候選範圍碼EM13所代表。 The physical parameter control function specification GAL1 includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GA13 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RD1E3. The measurement value candidate range RN13 is based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA13, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the second sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a data encoding operation ZX17 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA13 is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11, and is represented by a measurement value candidate range code EM13 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .

該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是不同的。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET相同或不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET相同或不同於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值候選範圍RN12是不同 的。該測量值目標範圍RN1T相同或不同於該測量值應用範圍RN1L。該測量值目標範圍RN1T相同或不同於該測量值候選範圍RN12。 The physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are different. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is the same as or different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is the same as or different from the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. The measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN12 are different of. The measurement value target range RN1T is the same as or different from the measurement value application range RN1L. The measurement value target range RN1T is the same as or different from the measurement value candidate range RN12.

在一些實施例中,該第一可變物理參數QU1A的該額定物理參數範圍RD1E包含該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…包含該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET、該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。該第一可變物理參數QU1A基於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…而處於複數不同參考狀態的其中之一。該複數不同參考狀態包含一第一參考狀態、一第二參考狀態和一第三參考狀態,藉此該第一可變物理參數QU1A由一可變目前狀態所特徵化。該可變目前狀態是該複數不同參考狀態的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the rated physical parameter range RD1E of the first variable physical parameter QU1A includes the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The complex number of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... include the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is in one of a plurality of different reference states based on the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The plurality of different reference states includes a first reference state, a second reference state and a third reference state, whereby the first variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized by a variable current state. The variable current state is one of the plurality of different reference states.

例如,該第一參考狀態和該第二參考狀態是互補的。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內的條件下,該第一可變物理參數QU1A處於該第一參考狀態。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內的條件下,該第一可變物理參數QU1A處於該第二參考狀態。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該第一可變物理參數QU1A處於該第三參考狀態。該第三參考狀態相同或不同於該第一參考狀態。該第三參考狀態相同或不同於該第二參考狀態。 For example, the first reference state and the second reference state are complementary. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is in the first reference state. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is in the second reference state. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is in the third reference state. The third reference state is the same as or different from the first reference state. The third reference state is the same as or different from the second reference state.

由該第一控制訊號SC11所輸送的該控制碼 CC1T和由該儲存單元332所儲存的該控制碼CC1T皆基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的該指定物理參數QD1T而被預設。在該處理單元331確定該範圍差異DS11的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來導致該輸出單元338執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的該訊號產生操作BY11以產生該功能訊號SG11。 The control code sent by the first control signal SC11 Both CC1T and the control code CC1T stored by the storage unit 332 are preset based on the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the range difference DS11, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to perform the signal generation operation BY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 based on the obtained control code CC1T to generate the Function signal SG11.

該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A從一目前狀態改變成該第三參考狀態,或響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A從一特定物理參數QU13改變成一特定物理參數QU14。例如,該目前狀態是該第一參考狀態和該第二參考狀態的其中之一。該特定物理參數QU13是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內,或於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內。該特定物理參數QU14是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。例如,該特定物理參數QU13是於該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET之內。 The function object 335 causes the first variable physical parameter QU1A to change from a current state to the third reference state in response to the function signal SG11, or causes the first variable physical parameter QU1A to change from a specific state in response to the function signal SG11 The physical parameter QU13 is changed to a specific physical parameter QU14. For example, the current state is one of the first reference state and the second reference state. The specific physical parameter QU13 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, or within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. The specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the specific physical parameter QU13 is within the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同參考狀態分別導致該功能目標335處於複數不同功能狀態。該複數不同功能狀態是不同的,並包含一第一功能狀態、一第二功能狀態和一第三功能狀態。例如,該第一功能狀態和該第二功能狀態是互補的。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內的條件下,該功能目標335處於該第一功能狀態。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內的條件下,該功能目標335處於該第二功能狀態。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是於 該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該功能目標335處於該第三功能狀態。該第三功能狀態相同或不同於該第一功能狀態。該第三功能狀態相同或不同於該第二功能狀態。 In some embodiments, the plurality of different reference states respectively cause the functional object 335 to be in a plurality of different functional states. The plurality of different functional states are different and include a first functional state, a second functional state and a third functional state. For example, the first functional state and the second functional state are complementary. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the functional object 335 is in the first functional state. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, the functional object 335 is in the second functional state. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is at Under the condition that the physical parameter target range RD1ET is within the functional target 335, the functional target 335 is in the third functional state. The third functional state is the same as or different from the first functional state. The third functional state is the same as or different from the second functional state.

例如,該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RD1N中。該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值應用範圍RN1L基於該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RD1N中。該測量值候選範圍碼EM12是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值候選範圍RN12基於該測量值候選範圍碼EM12而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RD1N中。 For example, the measurement value target range code EM1T is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value target range RN1T is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N based on the measured value target range code EM1T. The measurement value application range code EM1L is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value application range RN1L is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N based on the measured value application range code EM1L. The measurement value candidate range code EM12 is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value candidate range RN12 is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N based on the measured value candidate range code EM12.

在一些實施例中,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變電壓的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電壓範圍和一相對低電壓範圍。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變電流的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電流範圍和一相對低電流範圍。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變電阻的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電阻範圍和一相對低電阻範 圍。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter application range RD1EL is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range Another of the parameter ranges. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable voltage, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high voltage range and a relatively low voltage range, respectively. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable current, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high current range and a relatively low current range, respectively. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable resistor, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high resistance range and a relatively low resistance range, respectively around.

在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變亮度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高亮度範圍和一相對低亮度範圍。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變光強度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高光強度範圍和一相對低光強度範圍。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變音量的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高音量範圍和一相對低音量範圍。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變角速度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高角速度範圍和一相對低角速度範圍。 Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable brightness, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high brightness range and a relatively low brightness range, respectively. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable light intensity, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high light intensity range and a relatively low light intensity range, respectively. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable volume, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high volume range and a relatively low volume range, respectively. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable angular velocity, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high angular velocity range and a relatively low angular velocity range, respectively.

例如,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。例如,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。例如,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。例如,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之 一;且該特定物理參數範圍RD1E5是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。 For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is one of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another. For example, the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is one of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another. For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is one of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another. For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range one; and the specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range.

在一些實施例中,在該控制目標裝置330是一繼電器的條件下,該功能目標335是一控制開關。在該功能目標335是該控制開關的條件下,該控制開關具有一可變開關狀態,並基於該第一可變物理參數QU1A而處於一接通狀態和一關斷狀態的其中之一。例如,該可變開關狀態等於該接通狀態和該關斷狀態的其中之一,且該接通狀態和該關斷狀態是互補的。該接通狀態是該第一功能狀態和該第二功能狀態的其中之一,且該關斷狀態是該第一功能狀態和該第二功能狀態的其中另一。 In some embodiments, where the control target device 330 is a relay, the function target 335 is a control switch. Provided that the functional target 335 is the control switch, the control switch has a variable switch state and is in one of an on state and an off state based on the first variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the variable switching state is equal to one of the on state and the off state, and the on state and the off state are complementary. The on state is one of the first functional state and the second functional state, and the off state is the other of the first functional state and the second functional state.

在該處理單元331確定該範圍差異DS11的條件下,該處理單元331辨識該可變目前狀態為不同於該第三參考狀態的一特定狀態,並藉此產生該功能訊號SG11。該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET,因此該可變目前狀態被改變成該第三參考狀態。在該處理單元331確定該碼差異DX11的條件下,該處理單元331導致該輸出單元338產生該功能訊號SG12。該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG12來導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A從該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET進入包含於該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET中的該特定物理參數範圍RD1E5;因此,在該特定物理參數範圍RD1E5等於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的條件下,該可變目前狀態被改變成該第二參考狀態。 Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the range difference DS11, the processing unit 331 recognizes that the variable current state is a specific state different from the third reference state, and thereby generates the function signal SG11. The function target 335 is responsive to the function signal SG11 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET, whereby the variable current state is changed to the third reference state. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the code difference DX11, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to generate the function signal SG12. The function target 335 is responsive to the function signal SG12 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the specific physical parameter range RD1E5 contained in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1ET; thus, in the specific physical parameter The variable current state is changed to the second reference state under the condition that the parameter range RD1E5 is equal to the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.

例如,該第一可變物理參數QU1A是該可變 電流。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL、該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET分別是一第一電流參考範圍、一第二電流參考範圍和一第三電流參考範圍。被儲存在該儲存單元332中的一控制碼CC1L基於在該電流參考範圍之內的一第一指定電流而被預設。該控制碼CC12基於在該第二電流參考範圍之內的一第二指定電流而被預設。該控制碼CC1T基於在該電流參考範圍之內的一第三指定電流而被預設。 For example, the first variable physical parameter QU1A is the variable current. The physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are a first current reference range, a second current reference range and a third current reference range, respectively. A control code CC1L stored in the storage unit 332 is preset based on a first specified current within the current reference range. The control code CC12 is preset based on a second specified current within the second current reference range. The control code CC1T is preset based on a third specified current within the current reference range.

該時間長度值CL1T基於該時間長度表示GA1KJ、該定時器規格FT11和該資料編碼操作ZX1KJ來以該指定計數值格式HH21而被預設。在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T來導致該定時器339執行該計數操作BC1T。在該第一可變電流由於該第一控制訊號SC11而被配置以於該第三電流參考範圍之內的條件下,該處理單元331基於該計數操作BC1T來經歷該應用時間長度LT1T以到達該特定時間TJ1T,藉此該第一可變電流在相關於該計數操作BC1T的該應用時間長度LT1T之內維持成為於該第三電流參考範圍之內。 The time length value CL1T is preset in the specified count value format HH21 based on the time length representation GA1KJ, the timer specification FT11 and the data encoding operation ZX1KJ. Under the condition that the logic decision PE11 is positive, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 339 to perform the counting operation BC1T based on the obtained time length value CL1T. Under the condition that the first variable current is configured to be within the third current reference range due to the first control signal SC11, the processing unit 331 undergoes the application time length LT1T based on the counting operation BC1T to reach the A specific time TJ1T whereby the first variable current remains within the third current reference range within the application time length LT1T relative to the counting operation BC1T.

例如,在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是一可變轉速的條件下,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL、該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET分別是一第一轉速參考範圍、一第二轉速參考範圍和一第三轉速參考範圍。在該第一可變物理參數QU1A是一可變溫度的條件下,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL、該物理參數候選範圍 RD1E2和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET分別是一第一溫度參考範圍、一第二溫度參考範圍和一第三溫度參考範圍。 For example, under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is a variable rotational speed, the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are respectively a first rotational speed reference range, a A second rotational speed reference range and a third rotational speed reference range. Under the condition that the first variable physical parameter QU1A is a variable temperature, the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are respectively a first temperature reference range, a second temperature reference range and a third temperature reference range.

請參閱第45圖。第45圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8054的示意圖。如第45圖所示,該實施結構8054包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280皆耦合於一網路410。該控制裝置210通過該網路410而鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該第二感測單元334、該功能目標335和該儲存單元332。該操作單元397包含該處理單元331、該輸入單元337和該輸出單元338。該控制裝置210通過該網路410來向該控制目標裝置330傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。該控制目標裝置330通過該網路410來向該控制裝置210傳輸該控制回應訊號SE11。 See Figure 45. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure 8054 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 45 , the implementation structure 8054 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 are all coupled to a network 410 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 through the network 410 . The control target device 330 includes the operation unit 397 , the second sensing unit 334 , the function target 335 and the storage unit 332 . The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331 , the input unit 337 and the output unit 338 . The control device 210 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 through the network 410 . The control target device 330 transmits the control response signal SE11 to the control device 210 through the network 410 .

在一些實施例中,所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T是一測量值參考範圍號碼。所儲存的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A是一可變物理參數範圍號碼。該第一控制訊號SC11輸送一相對參考範圍碼ZB11。例如,該相對參考範圍碼ZB11是一相對參考範圍號碼。該處理單元331從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該相對參考範圍碼ZB11,並在該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11的條件下藉由使用該儲存單元332來存取等於一測量值參考範圍碼EB11的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該處理單元331基於所獲得的該相對參考範圍碼ZB11和所存取的該測量值參考範圍碼EB11來執行一科學計算MU11以獲得所預設的 該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。例如,該科學計算MU11使用所獲得的該相對參考範圍碼ZB11和所存取的該測量值參考範圍碼EB11。 In some embodiments, the preset measurement value target range code EM1T is a measurement value reference range number. The stored variable physical parameter range code UN1A is a variable physical parameter range number. The first control signal SC11 transmits a relative reference range code ZB11. For example, the relative reference range code ZB11 is a relative reference range number. The processing unit 331 obtains the relative reference range code ZB11 from the first control signal SC11, and accesses a reference equal to a measured value by using the storage unit 332 under the condition that the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 The variable physical parameter range code UN1A of the range code EB11. The processing unit 331 performs a scientific calculation MU11 based on the obtained relative reference range code ZB11 and the accessed measured value reference range code EB11 to obtain the preset The measured value target range code EM1T. For example, the scientific computing MU11 uses the obtained relative reference range code ZB11 and the accessed measurement value reference range code EB11.

例如,該處理單元331藉由將所獲得的該相對參考範圍碼ZB11和所存取的該測量值參考範圍碼EB11相加來獲得所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送該相對參考範圍碼ZB11來起到指示指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。該處理單元331執行使用所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該資料獲取AD1A以獲得該目標範圍界限值對DN1T。在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該處理單元331確定該第一可變物理參數QU1A進入的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元331基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EH14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的該碼差異DF11來使用該儲存單元332以將所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 For example, the processing unit 331 obtains the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by adding the obtained relative reference range code ZB11 and the accessed measurement value reference range code EB11. The first control signal SC11 serves to indicate the target range RN1T of the measurement value by sending the relative reference range code ZB11. The processing unit 331 performs the data acquisition AD1A using the obtained measurement target range code EM1T to obtain the target range limit value pair DN1T. Under the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the first variable physical parameter QU1A enters, the processing unit 331 The storage unit 332 is used to store the obtained measurement value based on the code difference DF11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EH14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T The target range code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

請參閱第46圖和第47圖。第46圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8055的示意圖。第47圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8056的示意圖。如第46圖和第47圖所示,該實施結構8055和該實施結構8056的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該第二感測單元334、該功能目標335和該儲存單元332。該操作單元397包含該處理單 元331、該輸入單元337、該輸出單元338和耦合於該處理單元331的該定時器342。 See Figures 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8055 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8056 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 , each structure of the implementation structure 8055 and the implementation structure 8056 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control target device 330 includes the operation unit 397 , the second sensing unit 334 , the function target 335 and the storage unit 332 . The operation unit 397 contains the processing order unit 331 , the input unit 337 , the output unit 338 and the timer 342 coupled to the processing unit 331 .

在一些實施例中,該定時器342受該處理單元331控制,並用於測量該時鐘時間TH1A。該定時器342被配置以符合該定時器規格FT21。該第一可變物理參數QU1A相關於該時鐘時間TH1A。該時鐘時間TH1A基於該時間目標區間HR1ET和一時間候選區間HR1E2而被特徵化。該時間目標區間HR1ET包含該時鐘參考時間TR11,並由該時間值目標範圍RQ1T所代表。該時間值目標範圍RQ1T由該時間值候選範圍碼EL1T所代表;因此,該時間值候選範圍碼EL1T被配置以指示該時間目標區間HR1ET。該時間候選區間HR1E2不同於該時間目標區間HR1ET,並由一時間值候選範圍RQ12所代表。該時間值候選範圍RQ12由一時間值候選範圍碼EL12所代表;因此,該時間值候選範圍碼EL12被配置以指示該時間候選區間HR1E2。 In some embodiments, the timer 342 is controlled by the processing unit 331 and is used to measure the clock time TH1A. The timer 342 is configured to conform to the timer specification FT21. The first variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH1A. The clock time TH1A is characterized based on the time target interval HR1ET and a time candidate interval HR1E2. The time target interval HR1ET includes the clock reference time TR11 and is represented by the time value target range RQ1T. The time value target range RQ1T is represented by the time value candidate range code EL1T; therefore, the time value candidate range code EL1T is configured to indicate the time target interval HR1ET. The time candidate interval HR1E2 is different from the time target interval HR1ET, and is represented by a time value candidate range RQ12. The time value candidate range RQ12 is represented by a time value candidate range code EL12; therefore, the time value candidate range code EL12 is configured to indicate the time value candidate interval HR1E2.

該控制訊息CG11包含該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T和該時鐘參考時間值NR11。該時鐘參考時間TR11由該時鐘參考時間值NR11所代表。例如,該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1包含一時鐘時間表示GA1TR。該時鐘時間表示GA1TR用於表示該時鐘參考時間TR11,並相同於該時鐘時間表示GB1TR。該時鐘參考時間值NR11基於該時鐘時間表示GA1TR、該定時器規格FT21和用於轉換該時鐘時間表示GA1TR的一資料編碼操作ZX1TR來以一指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。例如,該指定計數值格式HH25 基於一指定位元數目UY25而被特徵化。 The control message CG11 includes the time value target range code EL1T and the clock reference time value NR11. The clock reference time TR11 is represented by the clock reference time value NR11. For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL1 includes a clock time representation GA1TR. The clock time representation GA1TR is used to represent the clock reference time TR11 and is the same as the clock time representation GB1TR. The clock reference time value NR11 is preset in a specified count value format HH25 based on the clock time representation GA1TR, the timer specification FT21 and a data encoding operation ZX1TR for converting the clock time representation GA1TR. For example, the specified count value format HH25 Characterized based on a specified number of bits UY25.

在一些實施例中,該時間值目標範圍RQ1T具有一目標範圍界限值對DQ1T。該時間值候選範圍RQ12具有一候選範圍界限值對DQ1B。該時間值目標範圍RQ1T和該目標範圍界限值對DQ1T皆基於該時間目標區間HR1ET和該定時器規格FT21來用該指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。該時間值候選範圍RQ12和該候選範圍界限值對DQ1B皆基於該時間候選區間HR1E2和該定時器規格FT21來用該指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。 In some embodiments, the time value target range RQ1T has a target range limit value pair DQ1T. The time value candidate range RQ12 has a candidate range limit value pair DQ1B. The time value target range RQ1T and the target range limit value pair DQ1T are both preset in the specified count value format HH25 based on the time target interval HR1ET and the timer specification FT21. The time value candidate range RQ12 and the candidate range limit value pair DQ1B are both preset in the specified count value format HH25 based on the time candidate range HR1E2 and the timer specification FT21.

例如,該物理參數控制功能規格GAL1進一步包含一時間候選區間表示GA1HT和一時間候選區間表示GA1H2。該時間候選區間表示GA1HT用於表示該時間目標區間HR1ET。該時間候選區間表示GA1H2用於表示該時間候選區間HR1E2。該時間值目標範圍RQ1T和該目標範圍界限值對DQ1T皆基於該時間候選區間表示GA1HT、該定時器規格FT21和用於轉換該時間候選區間表示GA1HT的一資料編碼操作ZX1HT來用該指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。該時間值候選範圍RQ12和該候選範圍界限值對DQ1B皆基於該時間候選區間表示GA1H2、該定時器規格FT21和用於轉換該時間候選區間表示GA12的一資料編碼操作ZX1H2來用該指定計數值格式HH25而被預設。 For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL1 further includes a time candidate interval representation GA1HT and a time candidate interval representation GA1H2. The time candidate interval representation GA1HT is used to represent the time target interval HR1ET. The time candidate interval representation GA1H2 is used to represent the time candidate interval HR1E2. The time value target range RQ1T and the target range limit pair DQ1T are based on the time candidate interval representation GA1HT, the timer specification FT21 and a data encoding operation ZX1HT for converting the time candidate interval representation GA1HT to use the specified count value format HH25 is preset. The time value candidate range RQ12 and the candidate range limit value pair DQ1B are both based on the time candidate range representation GA1H2, the timer specification FT21 and a data encoding operation ZX1H2 for converting the time candidate range representation GA12 to use the specified count value format HH25 is preset.

該儲存單元332具有該記憶體位置YS1T和一記憶體位置YS12,在該記憶體位置YS1T儲存該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T,並在該記憶體位置YS12儲存一物理參數候選範圍碼UQ12。該物理參數候選範圍碼UQ12代表 該第一可變物理參數QU1A被期望在該時間候選區間HR1E2內處於的一物理參數候選範圍RK1E2,並被配置以基於該時間值候選範圍碼EL12而被儲存在該記憶體位置YS12。該記憶體位置YS12基於一記憶體位址AS12而被識別。該記憶體位址AS12基於該時間值候選範圍碼EL12而被預設。該物理參數候選範圍RK1E2選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。例如,該時間候選區間HR1E2相鄰於該時間目標區間HR1ET。 The storage unit 332 has the memory location YS1T and a memory location YS12, the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is stored in the memory location YS1T, and a physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 is stored in the memory location YS12. The physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 represents A physical parameter candidate range RK1E2 in which the first variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time candidate interval HR1E2 is configured to be stored in the memory location YS12 based on the time value candidate range code EL12. The memory location YS12 is identified based on a memory address AS12. The memory address AS12 is preset based on the time value candidate range code EL12. The physical parameter candidate range RK1E2 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . For example, the time candidate interval HR1E2 is adjacent to the time target interval HR1ET.

在一些實施例中,當該輸入單元337接收該第一控制訊號SC11時,該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該控制訊號SC11輸送所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T。該處理單元331響應該控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得所輸送的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T,基於所獲得的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T來獲得該記憶體位址AS1T,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址AS1T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置YS1T的該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T以獲得所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。 In some embodiments, when the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11, the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T. The control signal SC11 transmits the preset time value target range code EL1T. The processing unit 331 obtains the transmitted time value target range code EL1T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the control signal SC11, obtains the memory address AS1T based on the obtained time value target range code EL1T, and based on The obtained memory address AS1T is used to access the physical parameter target range code UQ1T stored in the memory location YS1T to obtain the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.

例如,在該物理參數目標範圍碼UQ1T等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該第一控制訊號SC11藉由輸送所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T來起到指示該測量值目標範圍RN1T的作用。該處理單元331執行使用所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該資料獲取AD1A以獲得該目標範圍界限值對DN1T。例如,該時間目標區間HR1ET和該時間候選區間HR1E2之間具有一 預設時間間隔。 For example, under the condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the first control signal SC11 serves as an instruction by transmitting the preset time value target range code EL1T The effect of the measured value target range RN1T. The processing unit 331 performs the data acquisition AD1A using the obtained measurement target range code EM1T to obtain the target range limit value pair DN1T. For example, there is an interval between the time target interval HR1ET and the time candidate interval HR1E2. Preset time interval.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元331藉由比較該測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元331藉由比較所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來檢查該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該範圍關係KA1A以做出所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L是否相等的該邏輯決定PY11。在該邏輯決定PY11是否定的條件下,該處理單元331辨識該範圍關係KA1A為該範圍相異關係以確定該範圍差異DS11。例如,該處理單元331基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得所預定的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by comparing the measured value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L, The processing unit 331 checks the range relationship KA1A between the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L by comparing the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L The logical decision PY11 is made to make the obtained pair of target range limit values DN1T and the obtained pair of application range limit values DN1L equal. Under the condition that the logic decision PY11 is negative, the processing unit 331 identifies the range relationship KA1A as the range dissimilarity relationship to determine the range difference DS11. For example, the processing unit 331 applies a range code EM1L based on the determined measurement value to obtain the predetermined pair of application range limit values DN1L.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元331藉由比較該測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元331藉由比較所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來做出所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L是否相等的該邏輯決定PZ11。在該邏輯決定PZ11是否定的條件下,該處理單元331辨識該範圍關係KA1A為該範圍相異關係以確定該範圍差異DS11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by comparing the measured value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L, The processing unit 331 makes the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the determined measurement value application range by comparing the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T with the determined measurement value application range code EM1L This logic of whether the codes EM1L are equal or not determines PZ11. Under the condition that the logic decision PZ11 is negative, the processing unit 331 identifies the range relationship KA1A as the range dissimilar relationship to determine the range difference DS11.

在該處理單元331確定該範圍差異DS11的 條件下,該處理單元331於該操作時間TF11之內執行用於控制該輸出組件3381的該訊號產生控制GY11。該輸出組件3381響應該訊號產生控制GY11來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的該訊號產生操作BY11以向該功能目標335傳輸該功能訊號SG11。該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A於相同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的該物理參數目標範圍RK1ET之內。 The processing unit 331 determines the range difference DS11 of the Under certain conditions, the processing unit 331 executes the signal generation control GY11 for controlling the output element 3381 within the operation time TF11. The output element 3381 responds to the signal generation control GY11 to execute the signal generation operation BY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 to transmit the function signal SG11 to the function target 335 . The functional target 335 is responsive to the functional signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RK1ET which is the same as the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元331響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得所輸送的該時鐘參考時間值NR11,基於所獲得的該時鐘參考時間值NR11來導致該定時器342在該啟動時間TT12之內啟動,並藉此導致該定時器342在該啟動時間TT12之內產生該時鐘時間訊號SY10。該時鐘時間訊號SY10是一初始時間訊號,並以該指定計數值格式HH25輸送該初始計數值NY10。例如,該初始計數值NY10被配置以相同於該時鐘參考時間值NR11。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 obtains the delivered clock reference time value NR11 from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and causes the timing based on the obtained clock reference time value NR11 The timer 342 is activated within the activation time TT12, thereby causing the timer 342 to generate the clock time signal SY10 within the activation time TT12. The clock time signal SY10 is an initial time signal, and transmits the initial count value NY10 in the specified count value format HH25. For example, the initial count value NY10 is configured to be the same as the clock reference time value NR11.

例如,該定時器342被配置以具有一可變計數值NY1A。在該輸入單元337從該控制裝置210接收輸送該時鐘參考時間值NR11的該第一控制訊號SC11的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該時鐘參考時間值NR11來啟動該定時器342以執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的一計數操作BD11以改變該可變計數值NY1A。該可變計數值NY1A在該啟動時間TT12之內被配置以等於該初始計數值NY10,並以該指定計數值格式HH25而被提供。 For example, the timer 342 is configured to have a variable count value NY1A. Under the condition that the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 delivering the clock reference time value NR11 from the control device 210, the processing unit 331 starts the timer 342 based on the obtained clock reference time value NR11 to A count operation BD11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 is performed to change the variable count value NY1A. The variable count value NY1A is configured to be equal to the initial count value NY10 within the start-up time TT12, and is provided in the specified count value format HH25.

在該第一可變物理參數QU1A由於該第一 控制訊號SC11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該處理單元331基於該計數操作BD11來到達一指定時間TY11。在該指定時間TY11之內,該定時器342感測該時鐘時間TH1A以導致該可變計數值NY1A等於一特定計數值NY11,並藉此產生輸送該特定計數值NY11的一時鐘時間訊號SY11。 In the first variable physical parameter QU1A due to the first The control signal SC11 is configured so that the processing unit 331 reaches a specified time TY11 based on the counting operation BD11 under the condition that the physical parameter target range RD1ET is within the target range RD1ET. Within the designated time TY11, the timer 342 senses the clock time TH1A to cause the variable count value NY1A to be equal to a specific count value NY11, and thereby generates a clock time signal SY11 delivering the specific count value NY11.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元331在該指定時間TY11之內從該時鐘時間訊號SY11以該指定計數值格式HH25獲得該特定計數值NY11,並在該指定時間TY11之內藉由執行使用所獲得的該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T的一科學計算MK15來獲得該時間值候選範圍碼EL12以便檢查所獲得的該特定計數值NY11和該時間值候選範圍RQ12之間的一數學關係KQ11。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 obtains the specific count value NY11 from the clock time signal SY11 in the specified count value format HH25 within the specified time TY11, and executes the use of the specified count value within the specified time TY11. A scientific calculation MK15 of the obtained time value target range code EL1T to obtain the time value candidate range code EL12 in order to check a mathematical relationship KQ11 between the obtained specific count value NY11 and the time value candidate range RQ12.

例如,在該指定時間TY11之內,該物理參數候選範圍碼UQ12等於所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12。該儲存單元332儲存該目標範圍界限值對DQ1T和該候選範圍界限值對DQ1B。該目標範圍界限值對DQ1T和該候選範圍界限值對DQ1B分別基於該時間值目標範圍碼EL1T和該時間值候選範圍碼EL12而被儲存在該儲存單元332中。 For example, within the specified time TY11, the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 is equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12. The storage unit 332 stores the target range limit value pair DQ1T and the candidate range limit value pair DQ1B. The target range limit value pair DQ1T and the candidate range limit value pair DQ1B are stored in the storage unit 332 based on the time value target range code EL1T and the time value candidate range code EL12, respectively.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元331被配置以在該指定時間TY11之內基於所獲得的該時間值候選範圍碼EL12來從該儲存單元332獲得該候選範圍界限值對DQ1B,並藉由比較所獲得的該特定計數值NY11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DQ1B來執行用於檢查該特定計數 值NY11和該時間值候選範圍RQ12之間的該數學關係KQ11的一檢查操作ZQ11。在該處理單元331於該指定時間TY11之內基於該檢查操作ZQ11而確定該時鐘時間TH1A目前處於的該時間候選區間HR1E2的條件下,該處理單元331基於所獲得的該時間值候選範圍碼EL12來獲得該記憶體位址AS12,並於該指定時間TY11之內基於所獲得的該記憶體位址AS12來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置YS12的該物理參數候選範圍碼UQ12以獲得該物理參數候選範圍碼UQ12。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 is configured to obtain the candidate range limit value pair DQ1B from the storage unit 332 based on the obtained time value candidate range code EL12 within the specified time TY11, and by comparing The obtained specific count value NY11 and the obtained candidate range limit value are performed on DQ1B for checking the specific count A check operation ZQ11 of the mathematical relationship KQ11 between the value NY11 and the time value candidate range RQ12. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the time candidate interval HR1E2 that the clock time TH1A is currently in based on the checking operation ZQ11 within the specified time TY11, the processing unit 331 determines the time value candidate range code EL12 based on the obtained time value candidate range code EL12 to obtain the memory address AS12, and access the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 stored in the memory location YS12 based on the obtained memory address AS12 within the specified time TY11 to obtain the physical parameter candidate Range code UQ12.

例如,該處理單元331基於該檢查操作ZQ11來確定該時鐘時間TH1A目前於該時間候選區間HR1E2之內的一時間情況,並藉此辨識該時鐘時間TH1A和該時間候選區間HR1E2之間的一時間關係為該時鐘時間TH1A目前於該時間候選區間HR1E2之內的一時間交集關係。在該處理單元331從該記憶體位置YS12獲得等於所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12的該物理參數候選範圍碼UQ12的條件下,該處理單元331於該指定時間TY11之內基於所獲得的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12來通過該輸出組件3381而導致該第一可變物理參數QU1A於相同於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的該物理參數候選範圍RK1E2之內。 For example, the processing unit 331 determines a time condition that the clock time TH1A is currently within the time candidate time interval HR1E2 based on the checking operation ZQ11, and thereby identifies a time between the clock time TH1A and the time candidate time interval HR1E2 The relationship is a time intersection relationship between the clock time TH1A currently within the time candidate interval HR1E2. Under the condition that the processing unit 331 obtains the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12 from the memory location YS12, the processing unit 331 based on the obtained value within the specified time TY11 The measured value candidate range code EM12 is passed through the output element 3381 to cause the first variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter candidate range RK1E2 which is the same as the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.

提出於此之本揭露多數變形例與其他實施例,將對於熟習本項技藝者理解到具有呈現於上述說明與相關圖式之教導的益處。因此,吾人應理解到本揭露並非受限於所揭露之特定實施例,而變形例與其他實施例意圖是包含在以下的申請專利範圍之範疇之內。 Many modifications and other embodiments of the disclosure presented herein will be appreciated by those skilled in the art having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions and associated drawings. Therefore, it should be understood that the present disclosure is not limited to the specific embodiments disclosed, and modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the following claims.

210:控制裝置 210: Controls

260:第一感測單元 260: The first sensing unit

297:操作單元 297: Operating Unit

330:控制目標裝置 330: Control target device

801:控制系統 801: Control System

EQ11:觸發事件 EQ11: Trigger event

KA11:第一數學關係 KA11: First Mathematical Relations

QP1A:第二可變物理參數 QP1A: Second variable physical parameter

QU1A:第一可變物理參數 QU1A: First variable physical parameter

RC1EL:物理參數應用範圍 RC1EL: Physical parameter application range

RD1ET:物理參數目標範圍 RD1ET: Physical parameter target range

RM1L:測量值應用範圍 RM1L: Measured value application range

RN1T:測量值目標範圍 RN1T: Measured value target range

SC11:第一控制訊號 SC11: The first control signal

SM11:第一感測訊號 SM11: The first sensing signal

VM11:第一測量值 VM11: First measurement

Claims (20)

一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一第一物理參數形成區,具有一可變物理參數,其中該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一第一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;一感測單元,感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一操作單元,耦合於該感測單元,並包含一觸控螢幕,其中:該觸控螢幕包含是一按鈕目標的一感測目標;在是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件依靠該感測目標而發生的條件下,該操作單元響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值;以及在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元被配置以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the control device comprising: a first physical parameter forming region having a variable physical parameter parameters, wherein the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a first physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range; a sensing unit that senses the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and an operating unit coupled to the sensing unit and comprising a touch screen, wherein: the touch screen comprises a sensing target which is a button target; a trigger event which is a user input event relies on the sensing Under the condition that the target occurs, the operation unit obtains a measurement value in response to the sensing signal; and the operation unit determines the possible value by checking a first mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value Under the condition of the first physical parameter application range that the physical parameter is currently in, the operation unit is configured to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter, and based on the obtained control application code, to the control application code. The lighting device transmits a control signal, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 如請求項1所述的控制裝置,其中:該第一物理參數形成區是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一第一環境區的其中之一; 該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;該照明裝置包含一第二物理參數形成區,其中該第二物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一第二環境區;該物理參數目標範圍由一測量值目標範圍所代表,其中該測量值目標範圍由一測量值目標範圍碼所代表,且該測量值應用範圍碼和該測量值目標範圍碼之間具有一第二數學關係;該控制訊號輸送所獲得的該控制應用碼以起到指示該物理參數目標範圍的作用;該可變光學參數進一步基於不同於該物理參數目標範圍的一第二物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;所輸送的該控制應用碼被該照明裝置使用以導致該可變光學參數從該第二物理參數應用範圍進入所指示的該物理參數目標範圍;在該操作單元藉由檢查該第一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼和該第二數學關係的一科學計算以獲得等於該測量值目標範圍碼的該控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來執行一訊號產生控制以產生該控制訊號;該控制訊號用於使該照明裝置辨識該可變光學參數和所指示的該物理參數目標範圍之間的一物理參數關係;以及該操作單元從該照明裝置接收由於辨識該物理參數關係而被傳輸的一控制回應訊號,其中該控制回應訊號輸送 一肯定操作報告,且該肯定操作報告表示該可變光學參數由於該控制訊號而成功地進入所指示的該物理參數目標範圍的一操作情況。 The control device of claim 1, wherein: the first physical parameter forming area is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and a first environment area; The measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the lighting device includes a second physical parameter forming area, wherein the second physical parameter forming area has the variable optical parameter and is a second environment area; The physical parameter target range is represented by a measurement value target range, wherein the measurement value target range is represented by a measurement value target range code, and there is a second between the measurement value application range code and the measurement value target range code Mathematical relationship; the control signal conveys the obtained control application code to play the role of indicating the physical parameter target range; the variable optical parameter is further determined based on a second physical parameter application range different from the physical parameter target range Characterizing; the supplied control application code is used by the lighting device to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the indicated physical parameter target range from the second physical parameter application range; in the operating unit by checking the first Under the condition of the application range of the first physical parameter that the variable physical parameter is currently in, the operation unit performs a scientific calculation using the determined application range code of the measurement value and the second mathematical relationship to obtain a value equal to The control application code of the measured value target range code, and based on the obtained control application code, a signal generation control is executed to generate the control signal; the control signal is used for the lighting device to identify the variable optical parameter and all a physical parameter relationship between the indicated physical parameter target ranges; and the operating unit receives a control response signal from the lighting device that is transmitted due to the identification of the physical parameter relationship, wherein the control response signal sends A positive operational report, and the positive operational report represents an operational condition in which the variable optical parameter successfully entered the indicated target range of the physical parameter due to the control signal. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含一物理參數形成區和一觸控螢幕,該物理參數形成區具有一可變物理參數,該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化,且該觸控螢幕包含是一按鈕目標的一感測目標;感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;在是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件依靠該感測目標而發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該控制裝置確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a physical parameter forming area and a touch screen, the physical parameter forming area having a variable physical parameter characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range, and the touch screen Including a sensing target that is a button target; sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; under the condition that a trigger event that is a user input event occurs depending on the sensing target, by using The control device obtains a measurement value in response to the sensing signal; the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter is currently in is determined by the measurement value by checking a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value. Under conditions determined by the control device, by using the control device, a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter is obtained; and by using the control device, the lighting device is sent to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code A control signal is transmitted, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含: 一物理參數形成區,具有一第一可變物理參數,其中該第一可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;一操作單元;一感測單元,耦合於該操作單元,並感測該第一可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一狀態改變偵測器,耦合於該操作單元,並響應一狀態改變事件來產生一觸發訊號,其中:該狀態改變事件是該照明裝置的一第二可變物理參數從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;以及該操作單元接收該觸發訊號,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值,在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該第一可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the control device comprising: a physical parameter forming area having a first variable physical parameter, wherein the first variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range; an operating unit; a sensing a unit coupled to the operation unit and sensing the first variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and a state change detector coupled to the operation unit and responding to a state change event to generate a trigger signal , wherein: the state change event is that a second variable physical parameter of the lighting device is changed from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; and the operating unit receives the trigger signal and responds to the received The trigger signal uses the sensing signal to obtain a measured value, and the operating unit determines the current location of the first variable physical parameter by checking a mathematical relationship between the measured value and the application range of the measured value. Configured under the condition of the physical parameter application range to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter, and transmit a control signal to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code, wherein the control signal is used for causing the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一第一物理參數形成區,具有一可變物理參數,其中該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一第一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化; 一功能開關,用於提供一觸發訊號;一感測單元,感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一操作單元,耦合於該功能開關和該感測單元,在該操作單元接收該觸發訊號的一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值,在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the control device comprising: a first physical parameter forming region having a variable physical parameter parameters, wherein the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a first physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range; a function switch for providing a trigger signal; a sensing unit for sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and an operation unit coupled to the function switch and the sensing unit, in the operation unit Under the condition that a trigger event of receiving the trigger signal occurs, a measurement value is obtained in response to the sensing signal, and the operation unit determines the measurement value by checking a first mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value. The variable physical parameter is configured under the condition of the first physical parameter application range in which the variable physical parameter is currently located to obtain a control application code configured to indicate a target range of the physical parameter, and transmits to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code A control signal, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 如請求項5所述的控制裝置,其中:該第一物理參數形成區是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一第一環境區的其中之一;該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;該操作單元使用該測量值以確定該測量值應用範圍碼;該照明裝置包含一第二物理參數形成區,其中該第二物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一第二環境區;該物理參數目標範圍由一測量值目標範圍所代表,其中該測量值目標範圍由一測量值目標範圍碼所代表,且該測量值應用範圍碼和該測量值目標範圍碼之間具有一第二數學關係;該控制訊號輸送所獲得的該控制應用碼以起到指示該 物理參數目標範圍的作用;該可變光學參數進一步基於不同於該物理參數目標範圍的一第二物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;所輸送的該控制應用碼被該照明裝置使用以導致該可變光學參數從該第二物理參數應用範圍進入所指示的該物理參數目標範圍;在該操作單元藉由檢查該第一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼和該第二數學關係的一科學計算以獲得等於該測量值目標範圍碼的該控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來執行一訊號產生控制以產生該控制訊號;該控制訊號用於使該照明裝置辨識該可變光學參數和所指示的該物理參數目標範圍之間的一物理參數關係;以及該操作單元從該照明裝置接收由於辨識該物理參數關係而被傳輸的一控制回應訊號,其中該控制回應訊號輸送一肯定操作報告,且該肯定操作報告表示該可變光學參數由於該控制訊號而成功地進入所指示的該物理參數目標範圍的一操作情況。 The control device of claim 5, wherein: the first physical parameter forming area is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and a first environment area; the measurement The value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the operation unit uses the measurement value to determine the measurement value application range code; the lighting device includes a second physical parameter forming area, wherein the second physical parameter forming area has The variable optical parameter is a second environmental zone; the physical parameter target range is represented by a measurement value target range, wherein the measurement value target range is represented by a measurement value target range code, and the measurement value application range There is a second mathematical relationship between the code and the measured value target range code; the control signal conveys the obtained control application code to indicate the The effect of a physical parameter target range; the variable optical parameter is further characterized based on a second physical parameter application range different from the physical parameter target range; the control application code delivered is used by the lighting device to cause the available The variable optical parameter enters the indicated target range of the physical parameter from the second physical parameter application range; the operation unit determines the first physical parameter application range that the variable physical parameter is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship condition, the operation unit performs a scientific calculation using the determined measurement value application range code and the second mathematical relationship to obtain the control application code equal to the measurement value target range code, and based on the obtained control application code applying code to execute a signal generation control to generate the control signal; the control signal is used to make the lighting device recognize a physical parameter relationship between the variable optical parameter and the indicated target range of the physical parameter; and the operating unit Receive a control response signal from the lighting device that is transmitted as a result of identifying the physical parameter relationship, wherein the control response signal conveys a positive operation report, and the positive operation report indicates that the variable optical parameter was successfully entered due to the control signal An operating condition for the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一可變物理參數的一物理參數形成區、一功能開關和耦合於該功能 開關的一操作單元,且該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;藉由使用該功能開關,提供一觸發訊號;在該操作單元接收該觸發訊號的一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該操作單元來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該操作單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該操作單元而獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a variable optical parameter having a variable A physical parameter forming region of varying physical parameters, a function switch and coupling to the function an operating unit of a switch, and the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range; sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; by using the The function switch provides a trigger signal; under the condition that a trigger event occurs when the operation unit receives the trigger signal, a measurement value is obtained by using the operation unit to respond to the sensing signal; when the variable physical parameter is currently Under the condition that the physical parameter application range is determined by the operating unit by examining a mathematical relationship between the measured value and the measured value application range, obtained by using the operating unit configured to indicate the physical parameter a control application code of the target range; and by using the control device, transmitting a control signal to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be in the indicated Physical parameter target range. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一第一可變物理參數的一物理參數形成區、一狀態改變偵測器和耦合於該狀態改變偵測器的一操作單元,且該第一可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;感測該第一可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;藉由使用該狀態改變偵測器,響應一狀態改變事件而產生一觸發訊號,其中該狀態改變事件是該照明裝置的一 第二可變物理參數從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;藉由使用該操作單元,接收該觸發訊號;藉由使用該操作單元,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值;在該第一可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該操作單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該操作單元而獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device comprises having a first A physical parameter forming region of a variable physical parameter, a state change detector, and an operating unit coupled to the state change detector, and the first variable physical parameter is based on a range represented by a measured value application A physical parameter application range is characterized; the first variable physical parameter is sensed to generate a sensing signal; by using the state change detector, a trigger signal is generated in response to a state change event, wherein the state A change event is a The second variable physical parameter is changed from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; by using the operation unit, receiving the trigger signal; by using the operation unit, responding to the received trigger signal to use the sensed signal to obtain a measurement; the physical parameter application range in which the first variable physical parameter is currently located is manipulated by examining a mathematical relationship between the measurement and the measurement application range obtaining a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter by using the operating unit under conditions determined by the unit; and transmitting to the lighting device by using the control device based on the obtained control application code A control signal, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一物理參數形成區,具有一可變物理參數,其中該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;一處理單元;一感測單元,耦合於該處理單元,並感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一使用者介面區,具有一電應用目標,其中:該電應用目標耦合於該處理單元,並是一按鈕目標和一圖符目標的其中之一; 一觸發事件依靠該電應用目標而發生,並導致該處理單元接收一操作請求訊號;該處理單元響應該操作請求訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值,在該處理單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來導致一控制訊號向該照明裝置被傳輸;以及該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the control device comprising: a physical parameter forming region having a variable physical parameter, wherein the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range; a processing unit; a sensing unit coupled to the processing unit and sensing the variable physical parameter to generating a sensing signal; and a user interface area having an electrical application target, wherein: the electrical application target is coupled to the processing unit and is one of a button target and an icon target; A trigger event occurs depending on the electrical application target and causes the processing unit to receive an operation request signal; the processing unit uses the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value in response to the operation request signal, and the processing unit checks the A mathematical relationship between the measured value and the measured value application range determines that the variable physical parameter is currently configured under the conditions of the physical parameter application range to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the physical parameter target range , and cause a control signal to be transmitted to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code; and the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一可變物理參數的一物理參數形成區、具有一電應用目標的一使用者介面區、和耦合於該電應用目標的一處理單元,該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化,且該電應用目標是一按鈕目標和一圖符目標的其中之一;感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;依靠該電應用目標,導致一觸發事件發生;依靠該觸發事件,導致該處理單元接收一操作請求訊號;藉由使用該處理單元,響應該操作請求訊號來使用該 感測訊號以獲得一測量值;在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該處理單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該處理單元而獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a variable optical parameter having a variable A physical parameter forming area of variable physical parameters, a user interface area having an electrical application target, and a processing unit coupled to the electrical application target, the variable physical parameter based on a measured value application range represented by a A physical parameter application range is characterized, and the electrical application target is one of a button target and an icon target; the variable physical parameter is sensed to generate a sensing signal; depending on the electrical application target, a A trigger event occurs; depending on the trigger event, the processing unit receives an operation request signal; by using the processing unit, the processing unit is used in response to the operation request signal Sensing the signal to obtain a measurement value; under the condition that the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter is currently in is determined by the processing unit by examining a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value , by using the processing unit to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter; and by using the control device, transmit a control signal to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code, wherein The control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一物理參數形成區,具有一可變物理參數,其中該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;一使用者介面區,具有一電應用目標,其中該電應用目標是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一;一感測單元,感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一處理單元,耦合於該電應用目標和該感測單元,在用於選擇該電應用目標的一使用者輸入操作導致是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值,在該處理單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼,並基於所獲 得的該控制應用碼來導致一控制訊號向該照明裝置被傳輸,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the control device comprising: a physical parameter forming region having a variable physical parameter, wherein the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range; a user interface area has an electrical application target, wherein the electrical application target is a display target and a sensor one of the sensing targets; a sensing unit for sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and a processing unit coupled to the electrical application target and the sensing unit for selecting the electrical application A user input operation of the target results in a measurement value being obtained in response to the sensing signal under the condition that a trigger event which is a user input event occurs, and the processing unit checks the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value. A mathematical relationship between determines that the variable physical parameter is currently configured under the conditions of the physical parameter application range to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the physical parameter target range, and based on the obtained The obtained control application code causes a control signal to be transmitted to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一可變物理參數的一物理參數形成區、和具有一電應用目標的一使用者介面區,該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化,且該電應用目標是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一;感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;在用於選擇該電應用目標的一使用者輸入操作導致是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該控制裝置確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置而獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a variable optical parameter having a variable a physical parameter forming area of variable physical parameters characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range, and a user interface area having an electrical application target, and the The electrical application target is one of a display target and a sensing target; the variable physical parameter is sensed to generate a sensing signal; a user input operation for selecting the electrical application target results in a user Under the condition that a trigger event of the input event occurs, a measurement value is obtained by using the control device to respond to the sensing signal; in the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter is currently located, by checking the measurement value and Obtaining, by using the control device, a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter, provided that a mathematical relationship between the measured value application ranges is determined by the control device; and by using the control device a device that transmits a control signal to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含: 一第一物理參數形成區,具有一可變物理參數,其中該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一第一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化,且該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;一感測單元,感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一操作單元,耦合於該感測單元,在一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值,在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下使用該測量值應用範圍碼以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the control device comprising: A first physical parameter forming region having a variable physical parameter, wherein the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a first physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range, and the measurement value application range is defined by A measurement value represented by an application range code; a sensing unit for sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and an operation unit coupled to the sensing unit for responding to the trigger event when a trigger event occurs Sensing the signal to obtain a measurement value, the operation unit determines the first physical parameter application range that the variable physical parameter is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the measurement value application range Using the measured value application range code to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter, and based on the obtained control application code to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal uses to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 如請求項13所述的控制裝置,其中:該第一物理參數形成區是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一第一環境區的其中之一;該操作單元包含具有一電應用目標的一使用者介面區、和耦合於該電應用目標的一處理單元,並使用該測量值以確定該測量值應用範圍碼,其中該電應用目標是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一;該觸發事件是該操作單元接收用於選擇該電應用目標的一使用者輸入操作的一使用者輸入事件,並導致該處理單元接收一操作請求訊號,其中該處理單元響應該操作請 求訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得該測量值;該照明裝置包含一第二物理參數形成區,其中該第二物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一第二環境區;該物理參數目標範圍由一測量值目標範圍所代表,其中該測量值目標範圍由一測量值目標範圍碼所代表,且該測量值應用範圍碼和該測量值目標範圍碼之間具有一第二數學關係;該控制訊號輸送所獲得的該控制應用碼以起到指示該物理參數目標範圍的作用;該可變光學參數進一步基於不同於該物理參數目標範圍的一第二物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;所輸送的該控制應用碼被該照明裝置使用以導致該可變光學參數從該第二物理參數應用範圍進入所指示的該物理參數目標範圍;在該操作單元藉由檢查該第一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼和該第二數學關係的一科學計算以獲得等於該測量值目標範圍碼的該控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來執行一訊號產生控制以產生該控制訊號;該控制訊號用於使該照明裝置辨識該可變光學參數和所指示的該物理參數目標範圍之間的一物理參數關係;以及該操作單元從該照明裝置接收由於辨識該物理參數關係而被傳輸的一控制回應訊號,其中該控制回應訊號輸送 一肯定操作報告,且該肯定操作報告表示該可變光學參數由於該控制訊號而成功地進入所指示的該物理參數目標範圍的一操作情況。 The control device of claim 13, wherein: the first physical parameter forming area is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and a first environment area; the operation The unit includes a user interface area having an electrical application target, wherein the electrical application target is a display target and a processing unit coupled to the electrical application target, and uses the measured value to determine the measured value application range code One of a sensing target; the trigger event is that the operation unit receives a user input event for selecting a user input operation of the electrical application target, and causes the processing unit to receive an operation request signal, wherein the The processing unit responds to the operation request seeking a signal to use the sensing signal to obtain the measurement value; the lighting device includes a second physical parameter forming area, wherein the second physical parameter forming area has the variable optical parameter and is a second environment area; the The physical parameter target range is represented by a measurement value target range, wherein the measurement value target range is represented by a measurement value target range code, and there is a second mathematical value between the measurement value application range code and the measurement value target range code relationship; the control signal transmits the obtained control application code to play the role of indicating the physical parameter target range; the variable optical parameter is further characterized based on a second physical parameter application range different from the physical parameter target range The supplied control application code is used by the lighting device to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the indicated physical parameter target range from the second physical parameter application range; in the operating unit by checking the first mathematical Under the condition of the application range of the first physical parameter that the variable physical parameter is currently in, the operation unit performs a scientific calculation using the determined application range code of the measurement value and the second mathematical relationship to obtain a value equal to the The control application code of the measured value target range code, and based on the obtained control application code, a signal generation control is executed to generate the control signal; the control signal is used for the lighting device to identify the variable optical parameter and the indicated a physical parameter relationship between the physical parameter target ranges of A positive operational report, and the positive operational report represents an operational condition in which the variable optical parameter successfully entered the indicated target range of the physical parameter due to the control signal. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一可變物理參數的一物理參數形成區,該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化,且該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;在一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該控制裝置確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來使用該測量值應用範圍碼以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a variable optical parameter having a variable A physical parameter forming region of variable physical parameters characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range represented by a measurement value application range code ; Sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; under the condition that a trigger event occurs, obtain a measurement value by using the control device to respond to the sensing signal; when the variable physical parameter is currently in The physical parameter application range is determined by the control device by checking a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the measurement value application range, by using the measurement value application range code by using the control device to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter; and transmitting a control signal to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code by using the control device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable The optical parameters are within the indicated target range for that physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一物理參數形成區,具有一可變物理參數,其中該可 變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;一操作單元;一感測單元,耦合於該操作單元,並感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一狀態改變偵測器,耦合於該操作單元,並響應一狀態改變事件來產生一觸發訊號,其中:該狀態改變事件是一可變時間長度從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;以及該操作單元接收該觸發訊號,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值,在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼,並基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the control device comprising: a physical parameter forming region having a variable physical parameter, of which the The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range; an operating unit; a sensing unit, coupled to the operating unit, and sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sense detection signal; and a state change detector, coupled to the operating unit, and in response to a state change event to generate a trigger signal, wherein: the state change event is a variable time length from a non-characteristic physical parameter to the state changing to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; and the operating unit receives the trigger signal, uses the sensing signal to obtain a measured value in response to the received trigger signal, and checks the measured value and the measured value in the operating unit A mathematical relationship between the value application ranges determines that the variable physical parameter is currently configured under the conditions of the physical parameter application range to obtain a control application code configured to indicate the physical parameter target range, and based on the obtained The control application code is used to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,且與該物理參數目標範圍相關的一控制資料碼基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被預設,該控制裝置包含:一第一物理參數形成區,具有一可變物理參數,其中該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一第一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化,且該測量值應用範圍由一 測量值應用範圍碼所代表;一感測單元,感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一操作單元,耦合於該感測單元,在一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值,在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下使用該測量值應用範圍碼以獲得所預設的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, and a control data code associated with the physical parameter target range is based on the physical parameter A specified physical parameter within a target range is preset, and the control device includes: a first physical parameter forming area having a variable physical parameter, wherein the variable physical parameter is based on a range represented by a measured value application A first physical parameter application range is characterized, and the measurement value application range is characterized by a The measured value is represented by an application range code; a sensing unit, sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and an operating unit, coupled to the sensing unit, and responding to the sensing when a trigger event occurs A measurement signal is obtained to obtain a measurement value, under the condition that the operation unit determines the application range of the first physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter is currently located by checking a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value Using the measured value to apply a range code to obtain the preset control data code, and based on the obtained control data code to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be in the Physical parameter target range. 如請求項17所述的控制裝置,其中:該第一物理參數形成區是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一第一環境區的其中之一;該操作單元包含具有一電應用目標的一使用者介面區、和耦合於該電應用目標的一處理單元,並使用該測量值以確定該測量值應用範圍碼,其中該電應用目標是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一;該觸發事件是該操作單元接收用於選擇該電應用目標的一使用者輸入操作的一使用者輸入事件,並導致該處理單元接收一操作請求訊號,其中該處理單元響應該操作請求訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得該測量值;該照明裝置包含一第二物理參數形成區,其中該第二物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一第二環境區;該控制訊號起到指示該物理參數目標範圍的作用; 所獲得的該控制資料碼包含基於該指定物理參數而被預先設定的一控制碼;該可變光學參數進一步基於不同於該物理參數目標範圍的一第二物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化;該控制訊號輸送該控制碼,所輸送的該控制碼被該照明裝置使用以導致該可變光學參數從該第二物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍;該控制裝置進一步包含耦合於該操作單元的一儲存單元;該儲存單元儲存所預設的該控制資料碼,其中所預設的該控制資料碼包含所預設的該控制碼;在該操作單元藉由檢查該數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該第一物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼以從該儲存單元獲得所儲存的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來執行一訊號產生控制以產生該控制訊號;該控制訊號用於使該照明裝置辨識該可變光學參數和所指示的該物理參數目標範圍之間的一物理參數關係;以及該操作單元從該照明裝置接收由於辨識該物理參數關係而被傳輸的一控制回應訊號,其中該控制回應訊號輸送一肯定操作報告,且該肯定操作報告表示該可變光學參數由於該控制訊號而成功地進入所指示的該物理參數目標範圍的一操作情況。 The control device of claim 17, wherein: the first physical parameter forming area is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and a first environment area; the operation The unit includes a user interface area having an electrical application target, wherein the electrical application target is a display target and a processing unit coupled to the electrical application target, and uses the measured value to determine the measured value application range code One of a sensing target; the trigger event is that the operation unit receives a user input event for selecting a user input operation of the electrical application target, and causes the processing unit to receive an operation request signal, wherein the The processing unit uses the sensing signal to obtain the measurement value in response to the operation request signal; the lighting device includes a second physical parameter forming area, wherein the second physical parameter forming area has the variable optical parameter and is a first 2. Environmental zone; the control signal serves to indicate the target range of the physical parameter; The obtained control data code includes a control code preset based on the specified physical parameter; the variable optical parameter is further characterized based on a second physical parameter application range different from the physical parameter target range; the The control signal conveys the control code, and the conveyed control code is used by the lighting device to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range from the second physical parameter application range; the control device further comprises coupled to the operating unit a storage unit; the storage unit stores the preset control data code, wherein the preset control data code includes the preset control code; by checking the mathematical relationship in the operation unit to determine the possible Under the condition of the application range of the first physical parameter that the variable physical parameter is currently in, the operation unit uses the determined application range code of the measured value to obtain the stored control data code from the storage unit, and based on the obtained control data code control data code to perform a signal generation control to generate the control signal; the control signal is used for the lighting device to identify a physical parameter relationship between the variable optical parameter and the indicated target range of the physical parameter; and the operation The unit receives a control response signal from the lighting device that is transmitted due to the identification of the physical parameter relationship, wherein the control response signal sends a positive operation report, and the positive operation report indicates that the variable optical parameter is successfully due to the control signal An operating condition is entered into the indicated target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的 一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,且與該物理參數目標範圍相關的一控制資料碼基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被預設,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一可變物理參數的一物理參數形成區,該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特徵化,且該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;在一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該控制裝置確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來使用該測量值應用範圍碼以獲得所預設的該控制資料碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein the lighting device A variable optical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, and a control data code associated with the physical parameter target range is preset based on a specified physical parameter within the physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a physical parameter forming region having a variable physical parameter characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measured value application range and the measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the variable physical parameter is sensed to generate a sensing signal; under the condition that a trigger event occurs, the control device is used to respond to the Sensing the signal to obtain a measured value; under the condition that the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter is currently located is determined by the control device by examining a mathematical relationship between the measured value and the application range of the measured value , by using the control device to use the measured value to apply a range code to obtain the preset control data code; and by using the control device to transmit a control signal to the lighting device based on the obtained control data code , wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the physical parameter target range. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一可變物理參數的一物理參數形成區、一狀態改變偵測器和耦合於該狀態改變偵測器的一操作單元,且該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍而被特 徵化;感測該可變物理參數以產生一感測訊號;藉由使用該狀態改變偵測器,響應一狀態改變事件而產生一觸發訊號,其中該狀態改變事件是一可變時間長度從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;藉由使用該操作單元,接收該觸發訊號;藉由使用該操作單元,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值;在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該操作單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該操作單元而獲得被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍的一控制應用碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制應用碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數處於所指示的該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is characterized based on a physical parameter target range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a variable optical parameter having a variable A physical parameter forming region of variable physical parameters, a state change detector, and an operating unit coupled to the state change detector, and the variable physical parameters are applied based on a physical parameter represented by a measured value application range scoped characterization; sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal; generating a trigger signal by using the state change detector in response to a state change event, wherein the state change event is a variable time duration from A non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state is changed into an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; by using the operation unit, the trigger signal is received; by using the operation unit, in response to the received trigger signal, the sensing signal is used to Obtaining a measured value; under the condition that the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter is currently located is determined by the operating unit by examining a mathematical relationship between the measured value and the application range of the measured value, by using The operating unit obtains a control application code configured to indicate the target range of the physical parameter; and by using the control device, transmits a control signal to the lighting device based on the obtained control application code, wherein the control signal uses to cause the variable optical parameter to be within the indicated target range of the physical parameter.
TW110133089A 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device TWI775592B (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW110133089A TWI775592B (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW110133089A TWI775592B (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202202954A TW202202954A (en) 2022-01-16
TWI775592B true TWI775592B (en) 2022-08-21

Family

ID=80787661

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW110133089A TWI775592B (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI775592B (en)

Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW565755B (en) * 2002-04-25 2003-12-11 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Control parameter automatic adjustment apparatus
CN101346676A (en) * 2005-12-30 2009-01-14 Abb公司 Method and device for tuning and control
CN101506507A (en) * 2006-08-22 2009-08-12 通用汽车环球科技运作公司 Method and apparatus for estimating exhaust pressure of an internal combustion engine
CN101930215A (en) * 2009-06-22 2010-12-29 费希尔-罗斯蒙特系统公司 Adaptive controller based on the model parameter of continuous scheduling
CN102812303A (en) * 2009-12-16 2012-12-05 国家科学和工业研究组织 HVAC Control System And Method
US20150241881A1 (en) * 2012-01-10 2015-08-27 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Submersible pump control
CN105473354A (en) * 2013-08-18 2016-04-06 森思博有限公司 Power consumption assessment of an HVAC system
CN106030296A (en) * 2013-12-20 2016-10-12 格尔德·赖梅 Sensor arrangement and method for determining at least one physical parameter
CN106233080A (en) * 2014-04-25 2016-12-14 尚飞公司 Order and/or control device and system
CN107850876A (en) * 2015-06-25 2018-03-27 雷诺两合公司 For the method for the energy equivalence coefficient for controlling hybrid moto vehicle
US20190033846A1 (en) * 2016-05-09 2019-01-31 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Methods and systems for detection in an industrial internet of things data collection environment with adjustment of detection parameters for continuous vibration data
CN109642536A (en) * 2016-06-21 2019-04-16 能源启用解决方案有限公司 Control or processing system and method
TW201921197A (en) * 2013-10-14 2019-06-01 美商應用材料股份有限公司 Matching process controllers for improved matching of process

Patent Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW565755B (en) * 2002-04-25 2003-12-11 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Control parameter automatic adjustment apparatus
CN101346676A (en) * 2005-12-30 2009-01-14 Abb公司 Method and device for tuning and control
CN101506507A (en) * 2006-08-22 2009-08-12 通用汽车环球科技运作公司 Method and apparatus for estimating exhaust pressure of an internal combustion engine
CN101930215A (en) * 2009-06-22 2010-12-29 费希尔-罗斯蒙特系统公司 Adaptive controller based on the model parameter of continuous scheduling
CN102812303A (en) * 2009-12-16 2012-12-05 国家科学和工业研究组织 HVAC Control System And Method
US20150241881A1 (en) * 2012-01-10 2015-08-27 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Submersible pump control
CN105473354A (en) * 2013-08-18 2016-04-06 森思博有限公司 Power consumption assessment of an HVAC system
TW201921197A (en) * 2013-10-14 2019-06-01 美商應用材料股份有限公司 Matching process controllers for improved matching of process
CN106030296A (en) * 2013-12-20 2016-10-12 格尔德·赖梅 Sensor arrangement and method for determining at least one physical parameter
CN106233080A (en) * 2014-04-25 2016-12-14 尚飞公司 Order and/or control device and system
CN107850876A (en) * 2015-06-25 2018-03-27 雷诺两合公司 For the method for the energy equivalence coefficient for controlling hybrid moto vehicle
US20190033846A1 (en) * 2016-05-09 2019-01-31 Strong Force Iot Portfolio 2016, Llc Methods and systems for detection in an industrial internet of things data collection environment with adjustment of detection parameters for continuous vibration data
CN109642536A (en) * 2016-06-21 2019-04-16 能源启用解决方案有限公司 Control or processing system and method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202202954A (en) 2022-01-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9537337B2 (en) Selecting a configuration of coils in response to a multi-coil wireless charging system initiating charging
JP5822261B2 (en) Terminal device, communication system, and terminal device activation method
KR19980076165A (en) Wired / wireless combined keyboard device with power supply discrimination function and control method
KR101692004B1 (en) wearable bio-device
CN104049123A (en) Storage modes for measurement values and contextual information
CN108351715A (en) Resident sensor device applied to human body touch
TWI775592B (en) Control device and method for controlling illuminating device
TWI742502B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
CN107580711B (en) RFID transponder, RFID transponder device and method for communication between an RFID transponder and a reading device
TW202314412A (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
CN114222978A (en) Power consumption information processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
TWI741471B (en) Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TWI734335B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TWI734334B (en) Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TWI755228B (en) Functional device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
CN113126486B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameters
WO2021136374A1 (en) Control target apparatus and method for controlling variable physical parameters
TW202201358A (en) Control device and method for controlling illuminating device
WO2021136253A1 (en) Functional apparatus and method for controlling variable physical parameters
CN105549735A (en) Control method, control device and electronic device
JP7515691B2 (en) Power supply control device, power supply control method, and program
KR101545702B1 (en) Portable terminal for operating based sensed data and method for operating portable terminal based sensed data
CN108958370A (en) Control method, device, electronic equipment and the storage medium of sliding equipment
CN113126487B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameters
WO2022196027A1 (en) Power feeding control device, power feeding control method, and program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent